Get documents about "2011 Chevrolet Corvette Convertible Owners Manual
Description
Owners Manual for the 2011 Chevy Corvette
Document Sample
2011 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-18
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Performance and Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-28
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-55 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-64 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-36
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-55
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2
2011 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase A French language copy of this
or due to changes subsequent to manual can be obtained from your
the printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
in this manual including, but not For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
limited to, GM, the GM logo, substitute the name “General
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for P.O. Box 07130
Emblem, CORVETTE, CORVETTE Chevrolet Motor Division wherever
GRAND SPORT, ZO6, and ZR1 are Detroit, MI 48207
it appears in this manual.
trademarks and/or service marks 1-800-551-4123
of General Motors LLC, its Keep this manual the vehicle for Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. quick reference. française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 25961341 B Second Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols
{ WARNING
To quickly locate information The vehicle has components and
about the vehicle, use the Index These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
in the back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is
hazard that could result in injury or a safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps
Here are some additional symbols . : Fuel Gauge
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more + : Fuses
information on the symbol, refer to 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
the Index. Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light j : LATCH System Child
# : Air Conditioning Restraints
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls : : Oil Pressure
®
or OnStar } : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature d : Traction Control
O : Exterior Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
1-13
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Instrument Panel Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
ZO6, Z16, and ZR1
Vehicle Features Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Initial Drive Information Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-23
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Driving for Better Fuel
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Roadside Assistance
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Driver Information
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Sensing System for Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑6. J. Infotainment on page 7‑1. S. Telescopic Steering Column
B. Head‐Up Display Controls K. Dual Automatic Climate Control Control (If Equipped). See
(If Equipped). See Head-Up System on page 8‑1. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
Display (HUD) on page 5‑31. page 5‑2.
L. Fuel Door Release Button. See
C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Filling the Tank on page 9‑52. T. Ignition Positions on page 9‑20.
See Turn and Lane-Change Hatch/Trunk Release Button. U. Heated Front Seats on page 3‑8
Signals (Auto Signal) on See “Hatch/Trunk Lid Release” (If Equipped).
page 6‑4. under Hatch on page 2‑10. V. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown).
Cruise Control on page 9‑45. See Automatic Transmission on
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. M. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5. page 9‑28 or Manual
Exterior Lamp Controls on Transmission on page 9‑32.
page 6‑1. N. Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction W. Active Handling System on
D. Manual Shift Paddles Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18. page 9‑37.
(If Equipped). See Automatic X. Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
Transmission on page 9‑28. O. Power Folding Top Switch
(If Equipped). See Convertible Y. Selective Ride Control on
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Top on page 2‑23. page 9‑43 (If Equipped).
on page 5‑25.
P. Bluetooth Controls Z. Cupholders on page 4‑1.
F. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9. (If Equipped). See Bluetooth on AA. Ashtrays on page 5‑8.
G. Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 7‑18.
page 5‑4. Steering Wheel Controls on Cigarette Lighter on page 5‑7.
H. Driver Information Center (DIC) page 5‑3 (If Equipped). AB. Parking Brake on page 9‑35.
Buttons. See Driver Information Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment on AC. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25. page 5‑2.
AD. Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
I. Hazard Warning Flashers on R. Horn on page 5‑4. page 10‑55.
page 6‑4.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive K : Press to unlock the driver door.
Press again within five seconds to
Information unlock both doors.
This section provides a brief Q : Press to lock all doors.
overview about some of the
important features that may or may } : Press and hold for
not be on your specific vehicle. approximately one second to open
the hatch/trunk.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be L : Press to sound the horn.
found later in this owner manual. Press any other button on the RKE
transmitter to stop it.
Remote Keyless Entry Press the button (A) to remove the
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
(RKE) System Keyless Entry (RKE) System
key. The key can be used to lock Operation on page 2‑3.
The RKE transmitter is used to lock and unlock the glove box and to
and unlock the doors from up to open the hatch/trunk lid if power to
30 m (100 ft) away from the vehicle. the vehicle is lost. See Hatch on
page 2‑10 for more information.
In Brief 1-5
Door Locks From the inside, use the power door Inside the Vehicle
lock switch (B), located at the top of
From the outside, press Q or K the door panel, near both windows.
on the keyless access transmitter. K: Press to unlock the doors.
Q: Press to lock the doors.
To open a door from the inside after
it is locked, press the button (C) in
front of the door handle and push
the door open.
See Power Door Locks on page 2‑9.
Loss of Vehicle Electrical
Power
Pull the door release handle located
If the vehicle has lost battery power, on the floor next to the seat.
the driver door can be opened
manually.
When you have the transmitter with
you, you may also unlock and open
the door by squeezing the door
handle sensor (A).
1-6 In Brief
Trunk Release Windows Seat Adjustment
Opening and Closing the Manual Seats
Hatch/Trunk
There are three ways to open the
hatch/trunk:
. Touch the button located above
the license plate. The keyless
access transmitter must be
within three feet of the button.
. Press V located to the left of
the steering wheel.
. Press } on the keyless
The power window switches are
access transmitter.
located on each door.
For more information, see Hatch on To adjust a manual seat:
Pull up or press down on the front
page 2‑10. 1. Lift the bar under the front of the
of the switch to raise or lower the
window. seat cushion to unlock the seat.
For more information, see Power 2. Slide the seat to the desired
Windows on page 2‑18. position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure it is locked in
place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑2
for more information.
In Brief 1-7
Power Seats Power Lumbar and Side Reclining Seatbacks
Bolsters
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: To recline a manual seatback:
A. Lumbar Support Control
. Move the seat forward or 1. Lift the lever on the outboard
rearward by sliding the control B. Side Bolster Support Control side of the seat.
forward or rearward. To adjust the support, if equipped: 2. Move the seatback to the
. Raise or lower the front or rear . Move control (A) forward or desired position, and then
part of the seat cushion by rearward to adjust lumbar release the lever to lock the
moving the front or rear of the support. seatback in place.
control up or down. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
. Move control (B) up or down to
See Power Seat Adjustment on adjust the side bolsters. make sure it is locked.
page 3‑3 for more information. See Reclining Seatbacks on
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑6 for more information. page 3‑6 for more information.
1-8 In Brief
Heated Seats Memory Features Storing Memory Positions
To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, both
outside mirrors, and the
telescopic steering column.
2. Press and hold “1” until
two beeps sound.
3. Repeat for a second driver
position using “2.”
To recall:
. On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, press and release
If available, the buttons are on the On vehicles with the memory “1” or “2.”
center console. The ignition must be feature, the controls on the driver If the vehicle is in P (Park), a
on for this feature to work. door are used to program and recall single beep sounds and the
L: Press to turn on the heated memory settings for the driver seat, memory position is recalled after
seat at the high setting. outside mirrors, and the telescopic a brief delay.
steering column.
Press again to switch to the low If the vehicle is not in P (Park),
setting. three beeps sound and the
memory position is not recalled.
9: Press to turn the system off.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑8 for more information.
In Brief 1-9
. On vehicles with a manual Easy Exit Driver Seat To recall, press and release B.
transmission, when the vehicle The vehicle must be in P (Park) for
is on, the parking brake must be This feature can move the seat
rearward and the telescopic steering an automatic transmission or the
set to recall a memory position. parking brake must be set for a
Press and release “1” or “2.” column out of the way to allow extra
room to exit the vehicle. manual transmission. A single beep
A single beep sounds and the sounds. The seat and telescopic
memory position is recalled after B : Press to save and recall the steering column will move to the
a brief delay. easy exit seat position. position previously stored for the
To save into memory: identified driver.
If the vehicle is on and the
parking brake is not set, 1. Recall the desired driving See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
three beeps sound and the position by pressing “1.” Steering Wheel” under Power Seat
memory position is not recalled. Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
2. Adjust the seat and the information.
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and telescopic steering column to
Steering Wheel” under Power Seat the desired exit position.
Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
3. Press and hold B until
information.
two beeps sound.
4. Repeat for a second driver
position using “2.”
1-10 In Brief
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Safety Belts Children (LATCH System)
(Coupe and Convertible Models
Only) on page 3‑43 or Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
(ZO6 and ZR1 Models Only) on
page 3‑44. United States
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat‐mounted Canada and Mexico
Refer to the following sections for side impact airbag under certain
important information on how to use conditions. The driver airbags are See Passenger Sensing System on
safety belts properly. not affected by this. page 3‑30 for important information.
. Safety Belts on page 3‑9. The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible in the
. How to Wear Safety Belts rearview mirror when the vehicle is
Properly on page 3‑13. started.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18.
In Brief 1-11
Mirror Adjustment 2. Use the arrows located on the Steering Wheel
four-way control pad to move the
Exterior Mirrors mirror in the desired direction.
Adjustment
Keep the control in the center
position when not adjusting either
outside mirror.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.
Manually fold the mirrors inward
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, pull the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑16.
Controls for the outside power Interior Mirror The lever is located on the left side
mirrors are located on the of the steering column.
Vehicles with an automatic dimming
driver door. rearview mirror will automatically To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Move the top control to the left reduce headlamp glare coming from 1. Pull the lever toward you.
or right to select either the driver vehicles that are traveling
behind you. 2. Move the steering wheel up
or passenger mirror.
or down.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 2‑17. 3. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.
1-12 In Brief
Telescopic Steering Column To adjust the telescopic steering Reading Lamps
column: The inside rearview mirror includes
1. Push the switch forward to move two reading lamps. The lamps go on
the wheel away from you. when a door is opened. When the
2. Pull the switch toward you to doors are closed, press the lamp
move the wheel closer to you. buttons to turn on each lamp.
The telescopic steering column Interior Light Control
position can be stored with your To adjust the brightness of the
memory settings. See “Memory interior lights, turn and hold the
Seat, Mirrors, and Steering Wheel” instrument panel brightness control
under Power Seat Adjustment on knob located on the left side of the
page 3‑3 for more information. instrument panel. Push the knob in
to turn the lights on or off.
For vehicles with this feature, the Interior Lighting For more information on interior
telescopic steering column control Courtesy Lamps lighting, see:
is located on the right side of the
When any door or the hatch/trunk
. Instrument Panel Illumination
steering column.
lid is opened, the interior lamps will Control on page 6‑5.
go on, unless it is bright outside. . Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑6.
The courtesy lamps can also be
turned on and off by pressing the
instrument panel brightness knob.
In Brief 1-13
Exterior Lighting 5 : Turns on the headlamps Windshield Wiper/Washer
together with the parking lamps,
sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, and instrument panel
lights.
Turn and Lane-Change Signal
The turn signal lever has two
upward and downward positions to
Exterior Lamps signal a lane change or a turn. The windshield wiper lever is
The exterior lamp control is located located on the right side of the
. For a lane change, raise or steering column.
to the left of the steering wheel, on lower the lever. The signal
the multifunction lever. automatically flashes three 1 : Use for fast wipes.
O : Turn the band with this times. 6 : Use for slow wipes.
symbol on it to operate the exterior
lamps.
. For a turn, raise or lower the & : Use to set a delay between
lever all of the way up or down. wipes.
O: Turns off all lamps. The turn signal will stop flashing
x : Use for a delayed wiping
AUTO: Sets the exterior lamps when the turn is completed.
cycle. Turn the intermittent adjust
to automatic mode. AUTO mode For more information, see: band down for a longer delay or up
turns the exterior lamps on and off . Exterior Lamp Controls on for a shorter delay.
depending on how much light is page 6‑1.
available outside the vehicle.
. Turn and Lane-Change Signals
;: Turns on the parking lamps (Auto Signal) on page 6‑4.
together with the sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps, and
instrument panel lights.
1-14 In Brief
9 : Use to turn off the windshield Climate Controls
wipers.
With this system, the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
8: Use for a for a single wiping
cycle. For more wipes, hold the
band longer.
Windshield Washer: Press the
button at the end of the lever until
the washers begin.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.
A. Driver Temperature Control G. Fan Control
B. Display H. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Passenger Temperature Control I. Defrost
D. AUTO J. Rear Window Defogger
E. Air Recirculation See Dual Automatic Climate Control
F. Air Conditioning System on page 8‑1.
In Brief 1-15
Transmission wheel spokes, to manually up-shift One to Four Shift Light
to the next gear, or pulling on the (Manual Transmission)
Manual Paddle Shift paddle, behind the steering wheel
(Automatic Transmission) spokes to manually down-shift.
The current gear will be displayed
in the Driver Information (DIC),
or the Head-Up Display (HUD),
if the vehicle has either of these
features.
The Manual Paddle Shift system On vehicles with a manual
can be deactivated by moving the transmission, when this light comes
shifter from S (Sport Mode) back to on, you can only shift from 1 (First)
D (Drive), or by holding the up‐shift to 4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to
paddle for more than one second. 2 (Second).
The Manual Paddle Shift system For more information about shifting
will not allow either an up-shift or for the best fuel economy, see
a down-shift, if the vehicle speed Manual Transmission on page 9‑32.
To operate the Manual Paddle Shift is too fast or too slow, nor will it
system, the automatic transmission allow a start from 4 (Fourth) or
shifter must be in S (Sport Mode). higher gear.
The system is activated by pushing
the paddle, above the steering See Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑28.
1-16 In Brief
Vehicle Features O / e : Turn to select radio
stations.
Radio(s) © SEEK ¨ : Press to seek stations.
© SCAN ¨ : Press and hold to scan
stations.
4: Press to change the information
that shows on the display while
listening to the radio.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Infotainment on page 7‑1 and
Operation on page 7‑2.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,
and six AM, and if equipped,
six XM1, and six XM2) can be
programmed.
To program presets:
Radio with CD 1. Turn the radio on.
Top Knob: Press to turn the BAND: Press to switch between 2. Press BAND to select FM1,
system on and off. Turn to increase FM1, FM2, AM, and if equipped, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2.
or decrease the volume. XM1 and XM2. 3. Tune in the desired station.
In Brief 1-17
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices
equalization.
XM is a satellite radio service This vehicle may have an auxiliary
5. Press and hold one of the six based in the 48 contiguous United input jack, located on the audio
numbered pushbuttons until the States and 10 Canadian provinces. faceplate. External devices such as
radio beeps once. XM satellite radio has a wide iPod®, MP3 players, etc. can be
6. Repeat the steps for each variety of programming and connected to the auxiliary input jack
pushbutton. commercial-free music, coast to using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack
coast, and in digital-quality sound. cable.
See Operation on page 7‑2.
A fee is required to receive the See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”
Setting the Clock XM service. under Auxiliary Devices on
To set the clock: For more information, refer to: page 7‑17.
1. Press and hold H until the . www.xmradio.com or call
correct hour displays. 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
2. Press and hold M until the . www.xmradio.ca or call
correct minute displays. 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See Clock on page 5‑6. See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.
1-18 In Brief
Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls b g : Press to turn on and off the
vehicle speakers. Press and hold
For vehicles with a Bluetooth
longer than two seconds to interact
system, it allows users with a
with the OnStar® or Bluetooth
Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
systems.
make and receive hands-free calls
using the vehicle’s audio system c : Press to reject an incoming
and controls. call, or to end a call.
The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone e + / e − : Press to Increase or
must be paired with the Bluetooth decrease volume.
system before it can be used in the w / x : Press to change radio
vehicle. Not all phones will support stations or select tracks on a CD.
all functions. For more information,
visit www.gm.com/bluetooth. 1 to 6: Press to play stations that
are programmed on the radio preset
For more information, see Bluetooth For vehicles with steering wheel pushbuttons.
on page 7‑18. controls, some audio controls can For more information, see Steering
be adjusted at the steering wheel. Wheel Controls on page 5‑3.
In Brief 1-19
Cruise Control Navigation System Driver Information
If the vehicle has a navigation Center (DIC)
system, there is a separate The DIC display is located at the
Navigation System Manual that bottom of the instrument panel
includes information on the radio, cluster. It shows the status of many
audio players, and navigation vehicle systems and enables
system. access to the personalization menu.
The navigation system provides
detailed maps of most major
freeways and roads. After a
destination has been set, the
system provides turn-by-turn
instructions for reaching the
destination. In addition, the system
The cruise controls are located at can help locate a variety of points
the end of the multifunction lever. of interest (POIs), such as banks,
9 : Turns the system off. airports, restaurants, and more.
R : Turns the system on. See the Navigation System Manual
for more information.
+ : Makes the vehicle accelerate or
resume a previously set speed.
The DIC buttons are located on
T: Press the button at the end of the instrument panel to the right
the lever to set the speed. of the instrument panel cluster.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑45. . 4 : Press to display fuel
information such as fuel economy
and range.
1-20 In Brief
2 : Press to display gauge Vehicle Personalization Power Outlets
information like oil pressure and Some vehicle features can be The accessory power outlet can be
temperature, coolant temperature, programmed by using the DIC used to plug in electrical equipment,
automatic transmission fluid buttons located to the right of the such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
temperature (if equipped), battery instrument panel cluster. The
voltage, and front/rear tire features that can be programmed The accessory power outlet is
pressures. include: located inside the center console
storage compartment, on the
TRIP: Press to display your total . Units forward left side.
and trip distance driven, the elapsed
time function, your average speed,
. Memory Features Remove the cover to access and
and the engine oil life. . Lighting Features replace when not in use.
OPTION: Press to choose personal . Lock and Unlock Feedback See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
options that are available on your . Door Lock and Unlock Settings
vehicle, depending on the options Roof Panel
your vehicle is equipped with, such . Language
as door locks, easy entry seats, and On vehicles with a removable
. Personalization Name roof panel, there are three release
language.
See Vehicle Personalization on latches. Two are located on the front
RESET: Press, along with the other page 5‑55. of the roof panel and the other is
buttons, to reset system functions, located on the back of the roof
select personal options, and turn off panel. See “Removing the Roof
or acknowledge messages on Panel” under Roof Panel on
the DIC. page 2‑19.
For more information, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
In Brief 1-21
Until you are sure you can remove Performance and The vehicle has an Active
the roof panel by yourself, have Handling System that helps
someone help you. Once removed, Maintenance maintain directional control of the
the roof panel should always be vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
stored properly in the rear storage Traction Control See Active Handling System on
compartment. page 9‑37.
System (TCS)
For more information: The vehicle may have Competitive
The traction control system limits Driving Mode (except ZR1),
. See “Storing the Roof Panel” wheel spin. The system turns on
under Roof Panel on page 2‑19. Performance Traction
automatically every time the vehicle Management (ZR1), and Launch
. See “Installing the Roof Panel” is started. Control systems designed to allow
under Roof Panel on page 2‑19. . To turn off traction control, increased performance while
press and release d on the accelerating and cornering. See
Convertible console. d illuminates and
Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑39.
If equipped, the convertible top can the appropriate DIC message
be lowered and stowed under the displays. See Ride Control
tonneau cover behind the rear seat. System Messages on page 5‑44.
Towing
For step-by-step instructions, see The vehicle was neither designed
. Press and release the button
Convertible Top on page 2‑23. nor intended to be towed with any of
again to turn on traction control.
its wheels on the ground.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36. See Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑86 and Recreational
Vehicle Towing on page 10‑86.
1-22 In Brief
Tire Pressure Monitor indicator that the tire pressures are Jump Starting the Battery
getting low and the tires need to be The battery of ZO6, ZR1, and
This vehicle may have a Tire inflated to the proper pressure.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). manual transmission Z16 (Grand
The TPMS does not replace normal Sport) coupe models is in the rear
monthly tire maintenance. It is the of the vehicle. You do not need to
driver’s responsibility to maintain access the battery for jump starting.
correct tire pressures. There are remote positive (+) and
See Tire Pressure Monitor System negative (−) terminals under the
on page 10‑68. hood for this purpose. See Battery
on page 10‑43 and Jump Starting
on page 10‑82.
The TPMS warning light alerts you ZO6, Z16, and ZR1
to a significant loss in pressure of Features Brake Noise
one of the vehicle's tires. If the Under certain weather or operating
warning light comes on, stop as Checking Engine Oil
conditions, occasional brake noise
soon as possible and inflate the ZO6, ZR1, and manual transmission might be heard with the vehicle's
tires to the recommended pressure Z16 (Grand Sport) coupe models performance braking system. This
shown on the Tire and Loading have a high performance dry sump brake system is designed for
Information label. See Vehicle Load lubrication system. This system superior fade resistance and
Limits on page 9‑14. The warning operates differently than a standard consistent operation using high
light will remain on until the tire engine lubrication system. See performance brake pads. Brake
pressure is corrected. Engine Oil on page 10‑15. noise is normal and does not affect
During cooler conditions, the low tire You should check the oil level system performance. See Braking
pressure warning light may appear only after the engine has been on page 9‑3.
when the vehicle is first started and thoroughly warmed up and then
then turn off. This may be an early shut off for at least five minutes.
This ensures that the oil level
reading obtained will be accurate.
In Brief 1-23
Car Wash Guidelines Engine Oil Life System Driving for Better Fuel
Automatic car washes are not The engine oil life system calculates Economy
recommended for this vehicle. engine oil life based on vehicle use
Some car washes cause damage to Driving habits can affect fuel
and displays a DIC message when mileage. Here are some driving tips
the vehicle, the wheels, and the it is necessary to change the engine
convertible top, if the vehicle is so to get the best fuel economy
oil and filter. The oil life system possible.
equipped. should be reset to 100% only
If you drive the vehicle through an following an oil change.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
automatic car wash that does not smoothly.
Resetting the Oil Life System
have enough clearance for the . Brake gradually and avoid
undercarriage and/or wide rear tires 1. Press the TRIP button so the abrupt stops.
and wheels, you could damage the OIL LIFE percentage is
displayed.
. Avoid idling the engine for long
vehicle. Verify with the manager of
periods of time.
the car wash that the vehicle will fit 2. Press RESET and hold for
before entering the car wash or use two seconds. OIL LIFE
. When road and weather
a touchless car wash. See “Washing REMAINING 100% will appear. conditions are appropriate, use
Your Vehicle” under Exterior Care cruise control, if equipped.
on page 10‑87. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑22.
. Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
. Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
1-24 In Brief
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
molded into the tire's sidewall Program
near the size. If you have an active OnStar
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
subscription, press the Q button
. Follow recommended scheduled TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 and the current GPS location will be
maintenance.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 sent to an OnStar advisor who will
Premium Fuel assess your problem, contact
Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 Roadside Assistance, and relay
This vehicle's engine was designed
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, your exact location to get the help
to use premium unleaded gasoline.
you are automatically enrolled in the you need.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑49. Roadside Assistance program.
Online Owner Center (U.S. and
See Roadside Assistance Program Canada)
Battery (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
The Online Owner Center is a
Roadside Assistance Program
This vehicle has a maintenance free complimentary service that includes
(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for more
battery. See Battery on page 10‑43 online service reminders, vehicle
information.
and Jump Starting on page 10‑82. maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
For ZO6, ZR1, and manual and more.
transmission Z16 (Grand Sport)
coupe models the battery is located Sign up today at:
in the rear hatch/trunk area. Access www.chevyownercenter.com
to the battery is not necessary to (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
jump start the vehicle. There are
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminals in the engine
compartment.
In Brief 1-25
OnStar® ] : Push this red emergency For a full description of OnStar
button to get priority help from services and system limitations,
specially trained OnStar Emergency see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
Advisors. the glove box.
X : Push this button for hands‐free, OnStar service is subject to the
voice‐activated calling and to give OnStar Terms and Conditions
voice commands for Turn‐by‐Turn included in the OnStar Glove
Navigation. Box Kit.
OnStar uses several innovative Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle OnStar service requires wireless
technologies and live Advisors to Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, communication networks and the
provide a wide range of safety, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside Global Positioning System (GPS)
security, navigation, diagnostics, Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn satellite network. Not all OnStar
and calling services. Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling services are available everywhere
are available on most vehicles. Not or on all vehicles at all times.
Automatic Crash Response
all OnStar services are available on OnStar service can’t work unless
In a crash, built‐in sensors can all vehicles. For more information your vehicle is in a place where
automatically alert an OnStar see the OnStar Owner's Guide or OnStar has an agreement with a
Advisor who is immediately visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or wireless service provider for service
connected to the vehicle to see if www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact in that area, and the wireless
you need help. OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR service provider has coverage,
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY network capacity, reception, and
How OnStar Service Works
1‐877‐248‐2080, or push Q to technology compatible with OnStar
Q : This blue button connects speak with an OnStar Advisor service. Service involving location
you to a specially trained OnStar 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. information about your vehicle
Advisor to verify your account can’t work unless GPS signals
information and to answer are available, unobstructed, and
questions. compatible with the OnStar
1-26 In Brief
hardware. The vehicle has to have See Radio Frequency Statement on If the light next to the OnStar
a working electrical system and page 13‑19 for information buttons is red, the system may not
adequate battery power for the regarding Part 15 of the Federal be functioning properly. Push Q
OnStar equipment to operate. Communications Commission (FCC) and request a vehicle diagnostic
OnStar service may not work if the rules and Industry Canada check. If the light appears clear
OnStar equipment isn’t properly Standards RSS-210/220/310. (no light is appearing), your OnStar
installed or you haven’t maintained subscription has expired and all
it and your vehicle is in good OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls services have been deactivated.
working order and in compliance
Push Q to confirm that the OnStar
with all government regulations. This vehicle may have a b g / c
If you try to add, connect, or modify equipment is active.
x Talk/Mute button that can be
any equipment or software in your
used to interact with OnStar OnStar®
vehicle, OnStar service may not
Hands-Free Calling. See Steering If the vehicle is equipped with an
work. Other problems OnStar can’t
Wheel Controls on page 5‑3 for active OnStar system, that system
control may prevent service to you,
more information. may also record data in crash or
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather, electrical system design On some vehicles, the mute button near crash-like situations. The
and architecture of your vehicle, can be used to dial numbers into OnStar Terms and Conditions
damage to important parts of your voice mail systems, or to dial phone provides information on data
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone extensions. See the OnStar Owner's collection and use and is available
network congestion or jamming. Guide for more information. in the OnStar Glove Box Kit, at
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
Your Responsibility www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
Increase the volume of the radio if pushing Q and speaking to an
the OnStar Advisor cannot be Advisor.
heard.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
2-16
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Keys and Locks Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-17
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Interior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Automatic Dimming Rearview
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Windows
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-10 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Roof
Doors Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-13
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks the hatch/trunk lid if power to the
vehicle is lost. See Hatch on
page 2‑10 for more information.
Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons; children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the
RKE transmitter in the vehicle Press the button (A) near the bottom
and they could be seriously of the RKE transmitter to remove
injured or killed if caught in the the key. Never pull the key out
path of a closing window. Do not without pressing the button.
leave the RKE transmitter in a
vehicle with children.
The key located inside the RKE
transmitter can be used to lock and
unlock the glove box and to open
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3
This vehicle has a keyless access Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry
system with pushbutton start. See
Ignition Positions on page 9‑20 for
(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation
information on starting the vehicle. See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Notice: If you ever lose your page 13‑19 for information transmitter functions work up to
transmitter(s) and/or key, it could regarding Part 15 of the Federal 30 m (100 ft) away from the vehicle.
be difficult to get into your Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada Keyless Unlocking
vehicle. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in. Be Standards RSS-210/220/310. Press the door handle sensor
sure you have a spare transmitter If there is a decrease in the RKE to unlock and open the doors if
and/or key. operating range: the RKE transmitter is within range.
See Door Locks on page 2‑8
If you are locked out of the vehicle, . Check the distance. The and “Passive Door Unlock”
contact Roadside Assistance. See transmitter may be too far from under Vehicle Personalization on
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S. the vehicle. page 5‑55 for additional information.
and Canada) on page 13‑8 or . Check the location. Other
Roadside Assistance Program
vehicles or objects may be
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
blocking the signal.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
. If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keyless Locking There are other conditions that K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
The doors lock after several can affect the performance of the only the driver door. Press K twice
seconds if all doors are closed and transmitter. See Remote Keyless
within five seconds to unlock both
at least one RKE transmitter has Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
doors. The interior lamps may
been removed from the interior of come on.
the vehicle. To customize whether
the doors automatically lock when Pressing K also recalls the memory
exiting the vehicle, see “Passive settings. See “Memory Seat,
Door Locking” under Vehicle Mirrors, and Steering Wheel” under
Personalization on page 5‑55 for Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3
additional information. for more information.
Keyless Trunk Opening } (Hatch/Trunk): Press and
hold for about one second to unlock
Press the hatch/trunk release the hatch/trunk. If the engine is
button located on the rear of the running, the shift lever must be
hatch/trunk lid above the license in P (Park) for an automatic
plate to open the trunk if the RKE transmission. For a manual
transmitter is within range. See This vehicle comes with two transmission, the shift lever must
Hatch on page 2‑10 for additional transmitters. be in N (Neutral) with the parking
information. brake set.
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the
doors. When Q is pressed twice,
the lights flash and the horn sounds
to confirm locking.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5
L (Panic): Press to sound the can be reprogrammed so that lost
horn. Press any other button on or stolen transmitters no longer
the RKE transmitter to stop it. work. Each vehicle can have up to
four transmitters programmed to it.
The vehicle comes with
two transmitters. Each transmitter Programming with a Recognized
will have a number on top of it, Transmitter
“1” or “2.” These numbers A new transmitter can be
correspond to the driver of the programmed to the vehicle when
vehicle. For example, the memory there is one recognized transmitter.
seat position for driver 1 will be For vehicles sold in Canada, two
recalled when using the transmitter recognized transmitters are required
labeled “1,” if enabled through the to program a new transmitter.
DIC. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, 7. Place the new transmitter in
and Steering Wheel” under Power 1. The vehicle must be off. the glove box transmitter pocket
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3 and 2. Both the recognized and new with the buttons facing the
Vehicle Personalization on transmitters must be with you. passenger side.
page 5‑55 for more information. 8. A beep sounds when
3. Insert the vehicle key into the
Programming Transmitters key cylinder located above the programming is complete.
to the Vehicle license plate. The DIC displays READY FOR
#3 or 4, or MAXIMUM NUMBER
Only RKE transmitters 4. Open the hatch/trunk. OF FOBS LEARNED.
programmed to this vehicle will 5. Turn the key five times within
work. If a transmitter is lost or five seconds.
stolen, a replacement can be
purchased and programmed 6. The DIC displays READY FOR
through your dealer. The vehicle FOB #2, 3 or 4.
2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows
9. To program additional 6. The DIC message displays
transmitters, repeat Step 7. OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN.
Press Acc. on the ignition switch 7. Press Acc. on the ignition
if programming is complete. switch.
10. Press K on each newly 8. The DIC reads WAIT
programmed transmitter to 10 MINUTES and counts down
complete the process. to zero.
Programming without a 9. The DIC displays
Recognized Transmitter OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN
This procedure requires three again.
10-minute cycles to complete the 10. Press Acc. on the ignition
programming process. United 2. Place the new transmitter in switch.
States owners are permitted to the glove box transmitter pocket
11. Steps 8, 9, and 10 will be
program a new transmitter to with the buttons facing the
repeated two more times.
their vehicle when a recognized passenger side.
transmitter is not available. The 12. A beep sounds and the DIC
3. Insert the vehicle key into the
Canadian immobilizer standard reads READY FOR FOB #1. All
key cylinder located above the
requires that Canadian owners see previously known transmitter
license plate.
their dealer for programming new programming has been erased.
transmitters when two recognized 4. Open the hatch/trunk.
13. A beep sounds once
transmitters are not available. 5. Turn the key five times within programming in complete.
1. The vehicle must be off. five seconds. The DIC displays READY
FOR FOB #2.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7
To program additional Starting the Vehicle with a Low
transmitters, take transmitter 1 Transmitter Battery
out of the transmitter pocket
and place transmitter 2 in the If the transmitter battery is weak,
pocket. Up to four transmitters the DIC may display NO FOBS
can be programmed. The DIC DETECTED when trying to start the
then displays MAXIMUM vehicle. To start the vehicle, place
NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED the transmitter in the glove box
and exits the transmitter pocket with the buttons
programming mode. facing the passenger side. Then,
with the vehicle in P (Park) for an
Press Acc. on the ignition automatic transmission, press the
switch to complete the process. brake pedal and /. If the vehicle
1. Separate the transmitter with a
14. Press Acc. on the ignition has a manual transmission, press flat, thin object inserted into the
switch if programming is the clutch and /. Replace the slot on the side or back of the
complete. transmitter battery as soon as transmitter.
15. Press K on each newly possible. Change the transmitter
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
programmed transmitter to battery if the DIC displays FOB
use a metal object.
complete the process. BATTERY LOW.
3. Insert the new battery, positive
Battery Replacement side facing down. Replace with a
Notice: When replacing the CR2032 or equivalent battery.
battery, do not touch any of the 4. Reassemble the transmitter.
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the
transmitter.
2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows
Door Locks WARNING (Continued)
{ WARNING . Young children who get into
Unlocked doors can be unlocked vehicles may be
dangerous. unable to get out. A child can
. Passengers — especially be overcome by extreme heat
children — can easily open and can suffer permanent
the doors and fall out of a injuries or even death from
moving vehicle. When a door heat stroke. Always lock your
is locked it will not open. You vehicle whenever you
increase the chance of being leave it.
When you have the transmitter with
thrown out of the vehicle in a . Outsiders can easily enter you, you may also unlock and open
crash if the doors are not through an unlocked door the door by squeezing the door
locked. So, wear safety belts when you slow down or stop handle sensor (A). You do not have
properly and lock the doors your vehicle. Locking your to press the unlock button on the
whenever you drive. doors can help prevent this transmitter. You will be able to open
(Continued) from happening. the door when you press the door
handle sensor and the vehicle
There are several ways to lock and recognizes your keyless access
unlock your vehicle. transmitter. When the passenger
door is opened first, the driver door
From the outside, press the lock or will also unlock.
unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter. From the inside, use the power door
lock switch (B) located at the top of
the door panel near both windows.
See Power Door Locks on page 2‑9.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9
To open a door from the inside, Power Door Locks
press the button (C) in front of the
door handle and push the door The power door lock switches are
open. You will hear a tone when located on the doors.
the button is pressed. There is an indicator light on the
If power to the vehicle or the rear of the door near the window.
keyless access transmitter is lost, K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
there are two ways to open doors.
the door:
When pressed, a beep sounds.
If the door is closed, the light blinks
twice. If the door is open, the light
flashes.
. From outside the vehicle, use
the key in the cylinder above the Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
license plate to open the hatch. When pressed, a beep sounds.
Then, use the door release tab, If the door is closed when
located on the carpet inside the pressed, the light comes on for a
hatch on the driver side of the few seconds, then turns off. If the
vehicle. Pull the tab to unlock door is open when pressed, the
and unlatch the driver door. See light stays on.
Keys on page 2‑2 for information
on opening the hatch during a
loss of power.
. From inside the vehicle, use the
door release handle located on
the floor next to each seat. Pull
the handle up to unlock and
unlatch the door.
2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows
Automatic Door Locks With the vehicle stopped and the Doors
engine running, door unlocking can
The vehicle is programmed so that be programmed through the Driver
when the doors are closed, the Information Center (DIC). This Hatch
ignition is on, and the shift lever is allows the driver to choose various
moved out of P (Park) for automatic
transmissions, or when vehicle
unlock settings. For programming { WARNING
information, see Vehicle
speed becomes faster than 13 km/h Personalization on page 5‑55. Exhaust gases can enter the
(8 mph) for manual transmissions, vehicle if it is driven with the
both doors will lock. Lockout Protection liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
Use the power door unlock switch to any objects that pass through the
Your vehicle can be programmed seal between the body and the
unlock the door when the vehicle is
to sound the horn three times and trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
not in P (Park). When the door is
unlock the driver door when both
closed again, the doors will lock exhaust contains Carbon
doors are closed and there is a
either when your foot is removed Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
keyless access transmitter inside
from the brake or the vehicle speed seen or smelled. It can cause
the vehicle. When the driver door
becomes faster than unconsciousness and even death.
is opened, a reminder chime will
13 km/h (8 mph).
sound continuously. The vehicle will If the vehicle must be driven with
Automatic Door Unlock remain locked only when at least the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
one transmitter has been removed
The vehicle is programmed so that from the vehicle and both doors are
. Close all of the windows.
when the shift lever is moved into closed. See Vehicle Personalization . Fully open the air outlets on
P (Park) for automatic transmission on page 5‑55. or under the instrument
vehicles or when the ignition is panel.
turned OFF or is in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) for manual (Continued)
transmission vehicles, both doors
will unlock.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11
WARNING (Continued)
Notice: Do not store heavy or } (Hatch/Trunk) : Press this
sharp objects in the rear storage button on the keyless access
compartments located in the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
. Adjust the Climate Control hatch/trunk area. The objects
system to a setting that Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
could damage the underbody.
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
highest setting. See Climate
There are several ways to release
Control System in the Index.
the hatch/trunk lid. If your vehicle
. If the vehicle is equipped with has an automatic transmission, the
a power liftgate, disable the shift lever must be in P (Park). For
power liftgate function. manual transmission vehicles, the
For more information about parking brake must be set when the
carbon monoxide, see Engine ignition is started for the hatch/trunk
release to operate. The parking
Exhaust on page 9‑26.
brake does not need to be set when
the ignition is off for the hatch/trunk
Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk release to operate. See Parking
lid forcefully or from the sides Brake on page 9‑35. Press the hatch/trunk release button
can cause damage to the glass, located on the rear of the hatch/
the defogger or the weather
V (Hatch/Trunk) : Press this trunk lid above the license plate, as
button, located on the instrument long as you have your transmitter
stripping. Be sure objects will fit
panel to the left of the steering with you.
in the hatch/trunk area before
wheel. The theft-deterrent alarm
closing the hatch/trunk lid. When
system must not be armed.
closing the hatch/trunk lid, gently
pull down from the center.
2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows
If your vehicle has lost battery Emergency Trunk Release The emergency trunk release
power, open the hatch/trunk using Handle (Coupe) handle is only intended to aid a
the vehicle key. See Keys on person trapped in a latched trunk,
page 2‑2 for more information. enabling them to open the trunk
The key lock cylinder is located on from the inside.
the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above There is a glow-in-the-dark
the license plate. Turn the vehicle emergency trunk release handle
key clockwise in the lock. located on the rear wall of the trunk
Closing the Rear Compartment below the latch. This handle will
(Except Convertible) glow following exposure to light. Pull
the release handle down to open
To close the rear compartment
the trunk from the inside.
lid of your coupe, pull down on the
rear edge of the lid. Lower it until
the power pull down latch feature
activates; it will close the rest of
the way and latch automatically. Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13
Vehicle Security Arming the System If a door or the hatch/trunk is
opened without using the RKE
This vehicle has theft-deterrent To arm the system, press Q on the transmitter, the alarm goes off. The
features; however, they do not make RKE transmitter, or open the door horn sounds for two minutes, then
it impossible to steal. and lock the door with the power goes off to save battery power. The
door lock switch. The security light vehicle will not start without a RKE
Anti-Theft Alarm System should flash. Remove the RKE transmitter present.
transmitter from inside the vehicle
This vehicle has a theft-deterrent and close the door. The security The theft-deterrent system does not
alarm system. light stops flashing and stays on. arm if the driver door is locked with
After 30 seconds, the light should the power door lock switch after the
turn off. doors are closed.
The vehicle can be programmed to If the RKE transmitter is removed
automatically lock the doors and from the vehicle while a passenger
arm the theft-deterrent system when is in it, have them lock the doors
you exit the vehicle. See Vehicle after they are closed. The alarm will
Personalization on page 5‑55. not arm, so the passenger will not
The security light flashes if a door set it off.
is open and locked with the power
door lock switch.
If this light stays on while the engine
is running, the vehicle needs
service.
2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows
Testing the Alarm Disarming the System Immobilizer
To test the system use the following Press the unlock button on the RKE See Radio Frequency Statement on
procedure. transmitter or squeeze the door page 13‑19 for information
1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch is handle sensor while the transmitter regarding Part 15 of the Federal
latched. is near the vehicle to unlock a door. Communications Commission (FCC)
Unlocking a door any other way sets rules and Industry Canada
2. Lower the window on the off the alarm. If the alarm sounds, Standards RSS-210/220/310.
driver door. press the unlock button on the RKE
3. Manually arm the system. transmitter to disarm it. Immobilizer Operation
4. Close the doors and wait Do not leave the key or device The vehicle has a passive
30 seconds. that disarms or deactivates the theft-deterrent system.
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
5. Reach through the open window The system is automatically armed
and manually pull the release when the ignition is turned off.
lever on the floor.
The immobilization system is
6. Press the unlock button on the disarmed when the ignition is turned
transmitter to turn off the alarm. to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and
If the alarm does not sound, check a valid transmitter is found in the
to see if the horn works. The horn vehicle.
fuse may be blown. See Fuses and You do not have to manually arm or
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑51. disarm the system.
If the horn works, but the alarm
does not go off, see your dealer.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15
The security light comes on if If the vehicle does not start and The immobilizer system can
there is a problem with arming or the RKE transmitter appears to be learn new or replacement RKE
disarming the theft-deterrent undamaged, try another RKE transmitters. Up to four RKE
system. transmitter. Or, place the transmitter transmitters can be programmed for
The system has one or more RKE in the transmitter pocket. See “NO the vehicle. To program additional
transmitters that are matched to FOBS DETECTED” under Key and transmitters, see “Matching
an immobilizer control unit in the Lock Messages on page 5‑42 for transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
vehicle. Only a correctly matched additional information. Check the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
RKE transmitter starts the vehicle. fuse. See Fuses and Circuit System Operation on page 2‑3.
The vehicle may not start if the RKE Breakers on page 10‑51. If the Do not leave the key or device
transmitter is damaged. engine still does not start with the that disarms or deactivates the
other transmitter, the vehicle needs theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
If the engine does not start and the service. If the engine does start, the
security light comes on, there may first transmitter may be faulty. See
be a problem with the immobilizer your dealer or have a new RKE
system. Press the START button transmitter programmed to the
again. vehicle.
2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors 2. Use the arrows located on the
four-way control pad to move the
mirror in the desired direction.
Convex Mirrors
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and the
{ WARNING area behind it can be seen.
A convex mirror can make things, Keep the control in the center
like other vehicles, look farther position when not adjusting either
away than they really are. If you outside mirror.
cut too sharply into the right lane, If the vehicle has the memory
you could hit a vehicle on the feature, a preferred mirror position
right. Check the inside mirror or can be stored. See Power Seat
glance over your shoulder before Adjustment on page 3‑3.
changing lanes.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
Folding Mirrors
The passenger side mirror is convex driver door. Manually fold the mirrors inward
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is to prevent damage when going
curved so more can be seen from To adjust the mirrors:
through an automatic car wash.
the driver seat. 1. Move the top selector control to To fold, pull the mirror toward the
the left or right to select either vehicle. Push the mirror outward to
the driver or passenger mirror. return it to the original position.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17
Heated Mirrors Interior Mirrors P (On/Off): The automatic
dimming feature is activated
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
Automatic Dimming when the vehicle is started.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press and hold this button for up
Press to heat the mirrors. Rearview Mirror to six seconds to turn this feature
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Vehicles with an automatic dimming on or off.
Dual Automatic Climate Control inside rearview mirror, compass T (Indicator Light): This light turns
System on page 8‑1 for more display, and/or map lamps, and on when the automatic dimming
information. OnStar® will automatically change feature is active.
to reduce glare from headlamps
Automatic Dimming behind you. A time delay feature Map Lamps
prevents rapid changing from the If the mirror has map lamps, they
Mirror day to night positions while driving are located at the bottom of the
If the vehicle has this feature, the under lights and through traffic. mirror. To manually turn the lamps
driver side outside mirror adjusts for If the vehicle has OnStar®, there on or off, press the button next to
the glare of headlamps behind you. are three control buttons located each lamp.
This feature is controlled by the on at the bottom of the mirror. See the
and off setting on the inside Cleaning the Mirror
OnStar® owner's guide for more
rearview mirror. information on the services OnStar® Do not spray glass cleaner directly
provides. on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows
Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless
adults, or pets in a vehicle with
the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather. The power window switches are
located on each door.
Pull up or press down on the front of
the switch to raise or lower the
window.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
allows you to use the power
windows when the ignition is off.
For more information, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑23.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19
Express-Down Window Power Window Initialize Roof
Press the front of the switch to After a power reconnect such as
the second position to activate battery replacement, the window Roof Panel
the express-down feature. To stop index‐up feature will not function
the window as it is lowering, press until the system is initialized. On vehicles with a removable roof
the switch again. panel, follow the procedures when
Once power is restored: removing or installing it.
Window Indexing 1. Close the door. Removing the Roof Panel
This feature automatically lowers 2. Raise the window and hold the
the window a small amount when
the door is opened. When the door
switch up for three seconds after
the window is closed.
{ WARNING
is closed, the window will raise to Do not try to remove a roof panel
its full up position. If either window 3. Release the switch, then
hold the switch up again for while the vehicle is moving.
does not index properly, it could Trying to remove the roof panel
be due to loss of power. Before three seconds and release.
while the vehicle is moving could
returning to your dealer for service,
Sun Visors cause an accident. The panel
perform the power window initialize
procedure. could fall into the vehicle and
Pull the visor toward you, or move cause you to lose control, or it
it to the side to help reduce glare. could fly off and strike another
To use the lighted mirror, lift the vehicle. You or others could be
cover. injured. Remove the roof panel
only when the vehicle is parked.
Until you are sure you can remove
the panel alone, have someone
help you.
2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof
panel on its edges, the roof panel,
paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place
the roof panel in the stowage
receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface and set
the parking brake. Shift an
automatic transmission into
P (Park). Shift a manual
transmission into N (Neutral).
2. Make sure the ignition is off. 6. To unlock the release latches on The driver side handle moves
the front of the roof panel, grasp toward the driver door. The
3. Lower both sun visors. each handle and pull it outward. passenger side handle moves
4. Open the rear hatch and remove toward the passenger door.
any items that may interfere with
proper storage of the roof panel.
5. Lower the windows.
There are two release latches on
the front of the roof panel and
one rear release latch on the
back of the roof panel.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-21
9. When the roof panel is loosened 1. Turn the roof panel so that the
from the vehicle, one person front edge of the panel is facing
should grasp the roof panel as the storage area.
close to the center as possible
and lift it away from the vehicle.
Storing the Roof Panel
{ WARNING
If a roof panel is not stored
properly, it could be thrown about
the vehicle in a crash or sudden
7. To unlock the rear of the roof maneuver. People in the vehicle
panel's rear release latch, could be injured. Whenever you
press the back of the release store a roof panel in the vehicle,
handle (B). Then press the
always be sure that it is stored
button on the front of the release 2. Insert the roof panel so that
securely in the proper location.
handle (A). the outside front edges line up
Pull down the latch lever. between the receiver covers.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof Push forward on the roof panel
8. Stand on one side of the panel on its edges, the roof panel, until it stops.
vehicle, and if necessary, have paint and/or weatherstripping
someone stand on the other may be damaged. Always place
side. Together, carefully lift the the roof panel in the stowage
front edge of the roof panel up receivers after removing it from
and forward. the vehicle.
2-22 Keys, Doors and Windows
Installing the Roof Panel 1. Park on a level surface and set
the parking brake. Shift an
{ WARNING automatic transmission into
P (Park). Shift a manual
An improperly attached roof panel transmission into N (Neutral).
may fall into or fly off the vehicle. 2. Check that the front release
You or others could be injured. latches and the rear release
After installing the roof panel, latch on the vehicle's roof
always check that it is firmly opening are in their opened
attached by pushing up on the positions before attempting to
underside of the panel. Check install the roof panel.
now and then to be sure the roof 3. To remove the roof panel from
3. Gently place the roof panel panel is firmly in place. the rear storage area of the
down so that the back pins on vehicle, pull up on the rear edge
the roof panel drop into the and remove it from the
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof
receivers in the back of the storage area.
panel on its edges, the roof panel,
storage area.
paint and/or weatherstripping 4. Carefully place the roof panel
Press down firmly to seat the pins may be damaged. Always place over the top of the vehicle.
in the receivers. the roof panel in the stowage
receivers after removing it from 5. Position the rear edge of the
the vehicle. roof panel to the weatherstrip
on the back of the roof opening.
In most cases, it makes it easier if Then align and fit the pins at the
two people install the roof panel. rear of the roof panel inside the
openings in the rear overhead
weatherstrip. Gently lower the
front edge of the roof panel to
the front of the roof opening.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-23
Removable Roof Panel If water drops are frequently allowed
to dry on the roof panel, impurities
Notice: If you use a glass
in the water will adhere to the top.
treatment and/or conditioner that
These impurities may etch or mar
contains ethyl sulfate on the roof
the finish. When the panel gets wet,
panel, you could damage the
dry it off.
panel. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Only
use a GM-approved glass cleaner Convertible Top
on the roof panel. Manual Operation
Special care is necessary when For care and cleaning of the
cleaning, removing, and/or storing convertible top, see “Cleaning the
the roof panel. Convertible Top” in this section.
6. Turn the front release handles
inward so that they latch to the . Flush with water to remove dust High pressure car washes may
closed position. and dirt, then dry the panel. cause water to enter the vehicle.
7. Push up on the handle of the . Clean a transparent roof panel If the vehicle has this feature, the
rear roof release handle to latch with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave following procedures explain the
its hook in the closed position. the cleaner on the panel for proper operation of the manual
one minute, then wipe the panel convertible top.
8. Push and pull the roof panel up with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not
and down and side to side to use glass cleaner on a painted
ensure the roof panel is securely roof panel.
installed.
. Do not use abrasive cleaning
materials on either type of panel.
2-24 Keys, Doors and Windows
The parts of the manual convertible Notice: Leaving the convertible Notice: If you raise or lower the
top that are used when lowering and top down and exposing the convertible top while the vehicle
raising it are: interior of your vehicle to outdoor is in motion, you could damage
conditions may cause damage. the top or the top mechanism.
Always close the convertible top The repairs would not be covered
if leaving your vehicle outdoors. by your warranty. Always put
Notice: Lowering the convertible an automatic transmission in
top when there are objects in P (Park) or a manual transmission
the storage area could damage it in Neutral before raising or
or break the glass rear window. lowering the convertible top.
Always verify that no objects are Lowering the Manual
in the storage area before Convertible Top
lowering the convertible top.
1. Park on a level surface.
Notice: Lowering the convertible Shift an automatic transmission
top if it is damp, wet, or dirty into P (Park) and set the
can cause stains, mildew, and parking brake. Shift a manual
A. Front Edge of the
damage to the inside of your transmission into N (Neutral) and
Convertible Top
vehicle. Dry off the convertible set the parking brake.
B. Rear Edge of the top before lowering it.
Convertible Top 2. Make sure the ignition is off.
Notice: If you lower the
C. Tonneau Cover convertible top on your vehicle 3. Make sure the trunk is closed.
in cold weather (-18°C (0°F)
or lower), you may damage
convertible top components. Do
not lower the top in cold weather.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-25
4. The convertible top front latch, 5. Lift upward on the front edge (A) 7. Tilt the driver seatback forward
located above the inside of the convertible top off of the and press the tonneau cover
rearview mirror, must be windshield frame. Then lift release button located on the
unlocked. Pull the convertible upward on the rear edge (B) of underside of the tonneau
top front latch down and turn it the convertible top so it is cover (C) behind the driver
clockwise to unlock it. vertical to the tonneau cover (C). seat. Then raise the tonneau
The front edge (A) and rear cover (C). If the tonneau
edge (B) should be straight up. cover does not release and
6. The convertible top front latch three chimes are heard, check
must be turned and closed after to make sure the trunk lid is
the top has been pushed up. closed. Also, the tonneau cover
Failure to close the latch may will not release if the vehicle
prevent the tonneau cover from alarm is armed.
completely closing.
2-26 Keys, Doors and Windows
After pressing the release Notice: If you lower the
button, the driver and passenger convertible top into the storage
door glass should retract to the compartment and the rear edge
full-down position. of the top is not in the full-down
If the vehicle has lost battery position, you could damage the
power, the tonneau cover (C) top. Always verify that the rear
can still be opened using the edge of the convertible top is in
manual release cable. the full-down position before
lowering the top into the storage
The tonneau cover emergency compartment.
manual release cable is located
underneath the carpeting behind
the passenger seat head
restraint, on the underside 9. Push forward on the front
forward edge of the tonneau edge (A) of the convertible top
cover. To access the cable, to allow the rear edge (B) of the
lift and pull back the carpeting. convertible top to be moved to
Also, see Hatch on page 2‑10 its full-down position.
for information on the
emergency trunk release handle.
8. Pull the cable to release the
tonneau cover.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-27
Raising the Manual
Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Shift
an automatic transmission into
P (Park) and set the parking
brake. Shift a manual
transmission into N (Neutral)
and set the parking brake.
2. Lower both windows.
3. Make sure the ignition is off.
4. Tilt the driver seat forward and
10. Then move the convertible top press the tonneau cover release 6. Pull the convertible top up by
rearward to its fully stored button, or use the manual firmly gripping the front edge (A)
position. release cable if battery power near the center and applying a
11. After the convertible top is has been lost. See Step 6 brisk upward and forward motion
stored, apply one even push on under “Lowering the Manual to get the top in the full-up
the center of the front edge (A) Convertible Top” in this section. position.
of the convertible top to ensure After pressing the release
that the convertible top is fully button, the driver and passenger
retracted. door glass should retract to the
12. Close the tonneau cover (B) by full-down position, if they have
pressing down on it with a not already been lowered.
swift, firm motion. 5. Lift the tonneau cover.
2-28 Keys, Doors and Windows
8. Close the tonneau cover (C) by
pushing it down with a swift, firm
motion.
9. Lower the rear edge (B) of the
convertible top by first slightly
pushing the front edge (A) of the
convertible top forward.
10. Push the front edge (A) of the
convertible top down from the
outside of the vehicle, or pull
the front edge (A) of the
convertible top down from the
7. Lift the rear edge (B) of the center pull-down handle 11. Pull the convertible top front
convertible top to its full-up located in the inside of the latch handle down and turn it
position by first raising the front vehicle. counterclockwise to lock the
edge (A). convertible top.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-29
Power Operation Notice: Lowering the convertible Lowering the Power
top if it is damp, wet, or dirty Convertible Top
For care and cleaning of the
can cause stains, mildew, and 1. Park on a level surface. Start
convertible top see “Cleaning the
damage to the inside of your the engine. Shift an automatic
Convertible Top” in this section.
vehicle. Dry off the convertible transmission into P (Park) and
High pressure car washes may
top before lowering it. set the parking brake. Shift a
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Notice: If you lower the manual transmission into
To operate the convertible top use
convertible top on your vehicle N (Neutral), and set the parking
the following steps.
in cold weather (-18°C (0°F) brake.
Notice: Leaving the convertible or lower), you may damage 2. Make sure the trunk is closed,
top down and exposing the convertible top components. the rear trunk partition in the rear
interior of your vehicle to outdoor Do not lower the top in cold storage area is in the fastened
conditions may cause damage. weather. upright position, and no objects
Always close the convertible top
Notice: If you raise or lower the are forward of the divider. See
if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
convertible top while the vehicle “Rear Trunk Partition” under
Notice: Lowering the convertible is in motion, you could damage Rear Storage on page 4‑1.
top when there are objects in the the top or the top mechanism.
storage area could damage it or The repairs would not be covered
break the glass rear window. by your warranty. Always put
Always verify that no objects an automatic transmission in
are in the storage area before P (Park) or a manual transmission
lowering the convertible top. in Neutral before raising or
lowering the convertible top.
2-30 Keys, Doors and Windows
If the convertible top is operated
multiple times, the engine should
be running to prevent drain on the
vehicle's battery. Under certain
conditions, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) may display a
message regarding the convertible
top. See Convertible Top Messages
on page 5‑37 for more information.
Raising the Power Convertible Top
Notice: If you raise or lower the
convertible top while the vehicle
3. Release the convertible top front 5. Push and hold the bottom of the is in motion, you could damage
latch, located above the inside convertible top switch, located to the top or the top mechanism.
rearview mirror, by pulling and the left of the steering wheel, on The repairs would not be covered
turning it clockwise toward the the instrument panel. by your warranty. Always put
driver door. Push upward on the The convertible top will lower into an automatic transmission in
front edge. The windows will the rear of the vehicle. A chime will P (Park) or a manual transmission
automatically lower. sound when the convertible top has in Neutral before raising or
4. Return the convertible top front lowered completely. If the radio is lowering the convertible top.
latch to the closed position. on the sound may be muted for 1. Park on a level surface. Start
a brief time due to a new audio the engine. Shift an automatic
system equalization being loaded. transmission into P (Park) and
set the parking brake. Shift
a manual transmission into
N (Neutral) and set the parking
brake.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-31
2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed, If the vehicle has lost power, the
the rear trunk partition in the rear convertible top can still be raised by
storage area is in the fastened releasing pressure on the hydraulic
upright position, and no objects pump, located under the passenger
are forward of the divider. See side of the tonneau cover, using the
“Rear Trunk Partition” under following steps. The carpet liner on
Rear Storage on page 4‑1. the passenger side must be pulled
3. Push and hold the top of the back to access the hydraulic pump.
convertible top switch. The Never attempt to open or close the
convertible top will raise and the convertible top manually without
windows will lower if they were releasing pressure first.
in the raised position. A chime Manual operation of the convertible
will sound when the convertible 5. Pull the convertible top top cannot be attempted for
top is raised completely. front latch down and turn it five minutes after the last time the
4. After the convertible top is counterclockwise to lock the convertible top switch was pressed
completely raised, release the convertible top. if the convertible top was not
convertible top switch. If the radio is on the sound may be opened completely and the tonneau
muted for a brief time due to a new cover latched or closed completely
audio system equalization being with the front latch locked in place
loaded. at the time the convertible top
switch was released.
2-32 Keys, Doors and Windows
Be careful when opening the 4. Use the wrench, located in the
tonneau cover by hand. If the console, and turn the pressure
tonneau cover is opened quickly, release bolt counterclockwise
damage can occur to the hinging one revolution, to relieve
mechanism, which can prevent pressure to the hydraulic pump.
proper operation of the This will allow you to manually
convertible top. raise the convertible top.
2. Pull back the carpet liner on the 5. Then follow the steps under
passenger side to access the raising the manual convertible
hydraulic pump. top. See “Manual Operation” or
“Power Operation” in this
section.
1. Open the tonneau cover by When power is restored to the
pulling the emergency release vehicle, the hydraulic bolt must be
cable. tightened, by turning it clockwise.
The tonneau cover emergency The convertible top switch can then
release cable is located behind be used to lower or raise the
the passenger seat head convertible top.
restraint, on the underside If the convertible top is operated
forward edge of the tonneau multiple times, the engine should
cover. Also, see Hatch on be running to prevent drain on the
page 2‑10 for information on the vehicle's battery. Under certain
emergency trunk release handle. conditions, the Driver Information
3. Locate the pressure release Center (DIC) may display a
bolt on the front side of the message regarding the convertible
hydraulic pump. top. See Convertible Top Messages
on page 5‑37 for more information.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-33
If the battery has been Wet the entire vehicle and wash the
disconnected, the power windows top evenly to avoid spots or rings.
must be initialized for the power top Let the soap remain on the fabric
to operate. See Power Windows on for a few minutes. When the top is
page 2‑18 for more information. really dirty, use a mild foam-type
cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire
Cleaning the Convertible Top vehicle, then let the top dry in direct
The convertible top should be sunlight.
cleaned often. However, high To protect the convertible top:
pressure car washes may cause
water to enter the vehicle.
. After washing the vehicle,
make sure the convertible top is
When hand washing the convertible completely dry before lowering it.
top, do it in partial shade. Use a
mild soap, lukewarm water, and a
. Do not get any cleaner on the
soft sponge. A chamois or cloth may vehicle's painted finish; it could
leave lint on the top, and a brush leave streaks.
can chafe the threads in the top . If go through an automatic car
fabric. Do not use detergents, harsh wash, ask the manager if the
cleaners, solvents, or bleaching equipment could damage the
agents. convertible top.
2-34 Keys, Doors and Windows
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-21
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41
Airbag System Lower Anchors and Tethers
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 for Children (LATCH System)
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-24 (Coupe and Convertible
Front Seats When Should an Airbag Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3 What Makes an Airbag for Children (LATCH System)
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 (ZO6 and ZR1
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 How Does an Airbag Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Replacing LATCH System
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 What Will You See After an Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Securing Child Restraints . . . . 3-48
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Adding Equipment to the
Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-35
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-36
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Front Seats
The vehicle's front seats have head
restraints in the outboard seating Seat Adjustment
positions that cannot be adjusted.
The front seat outboard head { WARNING
restraints are not designed to be
You can lose control of the
removed.
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
To adjust the seat:
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Lift the bar under the front edge
the vehicle is not moving. of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Seats and Restraints 3-3
Power Seat Adjustment Memory Seat, Mirrors, and The numbers on the back of
Steering Wheel the remote keyless entry (RKE)
transmitters correspond to the
numbers on the memory buttons.
Storing Memory Positions
To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, both
outside mirrors, and the
telescopic steering column,
if equipped.
2. Press and hold “1” until
two beeps sound.
3. Repeat for a second driver
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: position using “2.”
On vehicles with the memory
. Move the seat forward or
feature, the controls on the driver
rearward by sliding the control
door are used to program and recall
forward or rearward.
memory settings for the driver seat,
. Raise or lower the front or rear outside mirrors, and the telescopic
part of the seat cushion by steering column, if equipped.
moving the front or rear of the
control up or down.
3-4 Seats and Restraints
To recall a memory position: Memory Remote Recall (Automatic To stop recall movement, press one
. On vehicles with an automatic Transmission) of the power seat controls, power
transmission, press and release This feature can recall the driver mirror or memory buttons, or the
“1” or “2.” seat, outside mirrors, and telescopic telescopic steering column switch.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), a steering column, if equipped, to If something has blocked the
single beep sounds and the stored positions when entering the driver seat while recalling a
memory position is recalled vehicle. memory position, the recall may
after a brief delay. To activate, enter the vehicle and stop. Remove the obstruction; then
start the engine. The driver seat, press and hold the appropriate
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), manual control for the memory item
three beeps sound and the outside mirrors, and telescopic
steering column will move to the that is not recalling for two seconds.
memory position is not recalled. Try recalling the memory position
memory position associated with
. On vehicles with a manual the transmitter used to unlock the again by pressing the appropriate
transmission, when the vehicle vehicle. memory button. If the memory
is on, the parking brake must be position is still not recalling, see
set to recall a memory position. This feature is turned on or off using your dealer for service.
Press and release “1” or “2.” the vehicle personalization menu.
See “Auto Memory Recall” under
A single beep sounds and the Vehicle Personalization on
memory position is recalled page 5‑55 for more information.
after a brief delay.
If the vehicle is on and the
parking brake is not set,
three beeps sound and the
memory position is not recalled.
Seats and Restraints 3-5
Easy Exit Driver Seat To recall, press and release B. If something has blocked the driver
This feature can move the seat The vehicle must be in P (Park) for seat while recalling the exit position,
rearward and the telescopic steering an automatic transmission or the the recall may stop. Remove the
column, if equipped, out of the way parking brake must be set for a obstruction; then press and hold
to allow extra room to exit the manual transmission. A single beep the power seat control rearward for
vehicle. sounds. The seat and telescopic two seconds. Try recalling the exit
steering column will move to the position again. If the exit position is
B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press position previously stored for the still not recalling, see your dealer for
to save and recall the easy exit seat identified driver. service.
position.
If the easy exit seat feature is See “Auto Exit Recall” under Vehicle
To save into memory: programmed on in the vehicle Personalization on page 5‑55 for
1. Recall the desired driving personalization menu, automatic more information.
position by pressing “1.” recall occurs when one of the
following conditions is met:
2. Adjust the seat and the
telescopic steering column to
. The vehicle is turned off, in
the desired exit position. Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) or accessory
3. Press and hold B until mode, and the driver door is
two beeps sound. opened.
4. Repeat for a second driver . The vehicle is turned off, or in
position using “2.” RAP, and the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter is pressed.
3-6 Seats and Restraints
Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks
Power Lumbar and Side
Bolsters { WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
A. Lumbar Support Control
{ WARNING desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
B. Side Bolster Support Control If either seatback is not locked, seatback in place.
it could move forward in a sudden 3. Push and pull on the seatback
To adjust the support, if equipped: stop or crash. That could cause to make sure it is locked.
. Move control (A) forward or injury to the person sitting there.
rearward to adjust lumbar Always push and pull on the
support. seatbacks to be sure they are
. Move control (B) up or down to locked.
adjust the side bolsters.
Seats and Restraints 3-7
To return the seatback to the upright
position: WARNING (Continued)
1. Lift the lever fully without The lap belt cannot do its job
applying pressure to the either. In a crash, the belt could
seatback, and the seatback will go up over your abdomen. The
return to the upright position. belt forces would be there, not at
2. Push and pull on the seatback your pelvic bones. This could
to make sure it is locked. cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
{ WARNING vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
Sitting in a reclined position when
back in the seat and wear the Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is in motion can be
safety belt properly. the vehicle is moving.
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
(Continued)
3-8 Seats and Restraints
Seatback Latches Heated Front Seats
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it { WARNING
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause If you cannot feel temperature
injury to the person sitting there. change or pain to the skin, the
Always push and pull on the seat heater may cause burns
seatbacks to be sure they are even at low temperatures. To
locked. reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
To return a seatback to the especially for long periods of
sitting position, lift up on the latch, time. Do not place anything on
raise the seatback, and push the
the seat that insulates against
seatback rearward. Push and pull
To fold a seatback forward, lift the heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
on the seatback to make sure it is
latch on top of the backside of the cover, or similar item. This
locked in place.
seat. The seatback locks when may cause the seat heater to
folded down. overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
Seats and Restraints 3-9
Safety Belts { WARNING
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
{ WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
Do not let anyone ride where in any area of your vehicle that
a safety belt cannot be worn is not equipped with seats and
properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in
passenger(s) are not wearing the vehicle is in a seat and using
If available, the buttons are on the
safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly.
center console.
much worse. You can hit things
The ignition must be on for this inside the vehicle harder or be
feature to work. This vehicle has indicators as a
ejected from the vehicle. You reminder to buckle the safety belts.
L (Heated Seat): Press to turn the and your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on
heated seat on at the high setting. seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑16 for additional information.
Press again to switch to the low same crash, you might not be,
setting. if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
9 (Off): Press to turn the heated that your passenger(s) are
seat off. restrained properly too.
3-10 Seats and Restraints
In most states and in all Canadian Why Safety Belts Work
provinces, the law requires wearing
When you ride in or on anything,
safety belts. Here is why:
you go as fast as it goes.
You never know if you will be in a
crash. If you do have a crash, you
do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and Put someone on it.
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. it is just a seat on wheels.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Seats and Restraints 3-11
Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until or the instrument panel...
vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
3-12 Seats and Restraints
Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I
Safety Belts never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts?
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt? A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
A: You could be — whether you are one that is not your fault — you
wearing a safety belt or not. But and your passenger(s) can be
your chance of being conscious hurt. Being a good driver does
during and after an accident, so not protect you from things
you can unbuckle and get out, is beyond your control, such as
much greater if you are belted. bad drivers.
And you can unbuckle a safety
or the safety belts! Most accidents occur within
belt, even if you are
With safety belts, you slow down upside down. 40 km (25 mi) of home. And
as the vehicle does. You get more the greatest number of serious
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why injuries and deaths occur
time to stop. You stop over more
should I have to wear safety at speeds of less than
distance, and your strongest bones
belts? 65 km/h (40 mph).
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense. A: Airbags are supplemental Safety belts are for everyone.
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true
not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other
collisions.
Seats and Restraints 3-13
How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your applies force to the strong pelvic
passenger(s) wear a safety belt, bones and you would be less likely
Properly there is important information you to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
This section is only for people of should know. under it, the belt would apply force
adult size. on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
Be aware that there are special
shoulder belt should go over the
things to know about safety belts
shoulder and across the chest.
and children. And there are different
These parts of the body are best
rules for smaller children and
able to take belt restraining forces.
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on The shoulder belt locks if there is a
page 3‑37 or Infants and Young sudden stop or crash.
Children on page 3‑39. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are Sit up straight and always keep
wearing safety belts. your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
Occupants who are not buckled up worn low and snug on the hips, just
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a touching the thighs. In a crash, this
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
3-14 Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
It will not give as much not give nearly as much
protection this way. protection this way.
Seats and Restraints 3-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the You can be seriously injured if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash, belt is buckled in the wrong place
you could slide under the lap like this. In a crash, the belt would
belt and apply force on your go up over your abdomen. The
abdomen. This could cause belt forces would be there, not
serious or even fatal injuries. on the pelvic bones. This could
The lap belt should be worn low cause serious internal injuries.
and snug on the hips, just Always buckle the belt into the
touching the thighs. buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
3-16 Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the
belt goes over an armrest like
this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest. A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Seats and Restraints 3-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured You can be seriously injured
if you wear the shoulder belt by not wearing the lap-shoulder
under your arm. In a crash, your belt properly. In a crash, you
body would move too far forward, would not be restrained by the
which would increase the chance shoulder belt. Your body could
of head and neck injury. Also, move too far forward increasing
the belt would apply too much the chance of head and neck
force to the ribs, which are not injury. You might also slide under
as strong as shoulder bones. You the lap belt. The belt force would
could also severely injure internal then be applied right on the
organs like your liver or spleen. abdomen. That could cause
The shoulder belt should go over A: The belt is behind the body. serious or fatal injuries. The
the shoulder and across the shoulder belt should go over the
chest. shoulder and across the chest.
3-18 Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this? Lap-Shoulder Belt
{ WARNING
All seating positions in the vehicle
You can be seriously injured by a have a lap-shoulder belt.
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
The following instructions explain
not have the full width of the belt
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt properly.
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
dealer to fix it. adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
A: The belt is twisted across get twisted.
the body. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
Seats and Restraints 3-19
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out
all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint
locking feature in the right front
seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑30 for more information.
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. To make the lap part tight, pull
buckle until it clicks. up on the shoulder belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to It may be necessary to pull
make sure it is secure. If the belt stitching on the safety belt
is not long enough, see Safety through the latch plate to fully
Belt Extender on page 3‑21. tighten the lap belt on smaller
Position the release button on occupants.
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
3-20 Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Pretensioners Safety Belt Use During
This vehicle has safety belt Pregnancy
pretensioners for the front outboard
Safety belts work for everyone,
occupants. Although the safety belt
including pregnant women. Like all
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
occupants, they are more likely to
are part of the safety belt assembly.
be seriously injured if they do not
They can help tighten the safety
wear safety belts.
belts during the early stages of
a moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, for vehicles
To unlatch the belt, push the button with side impact airbags, safety belt
on the buckle. The belt should pretensioners can help tighten the
return to its stowed position. safety belts in a side crash.
Before a door is closed, be sure Pretensioners work only once. If the
the safety belt is out of the way. If pretensioners activate in a crash,
a door is slammed against a safety they will need to be replaced, and
belt, damage can occur to both the probably other new parts for the
safety belt and the vehicle. vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
After a Crash on page 3‑22. A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
Seats and Restraints 3-21
The best way to protect the fetus is has been designed for adults. Never Make sure the safety belt reminder
to protect the mother. When a safety use it for securing child seats. To light is working. See Safety Belt
belt is worn properly, it is more likely wear it, attach it to the regular safety Reminders on page 5‑16 for more
that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt. For more information, see the information.
crash. For pregnant women, as for instruction sheet that comes with Keep safety belts clean and dry.
anyone, the key to making safety the extender. See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑21.
belts effective is wearing them
properly. Safety System Check Safety Belt Care
Now and then, check that the safety
Safety Belt Extender belt reminder light, safety belts,
Keep belts clean and dry.
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
around you, you should use it. anchorages are working properly. { WARNING
But if a safety belt is not long Look for any other loose or
Do not bleach or dye safety
enough, your dealer will order you damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system belts. It may severely weaken
an extender. When you go in to them. In a crash, they might not
order it, take the heaviest coat you from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed be able to provide adequate
will wear, so the extender will be protection. Clean safety belts
long enough for you. To help avoid safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under only with mild soap and lukewarm
personal injury, do not let someone water.
else use it, and use it only for the impact forces. If a belt is torn or
seat it is made to fit. The extender frayed, get a new one right away.
3-22 Seats and Restraints
Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System
safety belts may not be necessary.
System Parts After a But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following
Crash were used during any crash may airbags:
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the right front
A crash can damage the safety replaced. passenger.
belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be . A seat-mounted side impact
A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt airbag for the driver.
may not properly protect the system was not being used at the . A seat-mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in time of the crash. airbag for the right front
serious injury or even death in passenger.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
a crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a All of the airbags in the vehicle will
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light have the word AIRBAG embossed
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary in the trim or on an attached label
or while you are driving. See Airbag near the deployment opening.
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑16.
possible. For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
Seats and Restraints 3-23
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce Wearing your safety belt during a close to the airbag, as you would
the risk of injury from the force of an crash helps reduce your chance be if you were sitting on the edge
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate of hitting things inside the vehicle of your seat or leaning forward.
very quickly to do their job. or being ejected from it. Airbags Safety belts help keep you in
are “supplemental restraints” to position before and during a
Here are the most important things the safety belts. Everyone in your
to know about the airbag system: crash. Always wear your safety
vehicle should wear a safety belt belt, even with airbags. The driver
properly — whether or not there is
{ WARNING an airbag for that person.
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
You can be severely injured or the vehicle.
killed in a crash if you are not Occupants should not lean on
wearing your safety belt — even { WARNING or sleep against the door or side
if you have airbags. Airbags are windows in seating positions with
designed to work with safety Airbags inflate with great force, seat-mounted airbags.
belts, but do not replace them. faster than the blink of an eye.
Also, airbags are not designed to Anyone who is up against, or
deploy in every crash. In some very close to, any airbag when it
crashes safety belts are your only inflates can be seriously injured
restraint. See When Should an or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑26. (Continued)
(Continued)
3-24 Seats and Restraints
Where Are the Airbags?
{ WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel, which
for adults and older children, but
shows the airbag symbol.
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle safety belt The system checks the airbag
system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions.
designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an
children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag
protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for
system can provide. Always more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the
secure children properly in the middle of the steering wheel.
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑37 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑39.
Seats and Restraints 3-25
{ WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
Driver Side Shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put
The right front passenger frontal
Side Similar anything on the steering wheel
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side. hub or on or near any other
The seat-mounted side impact airbag covering.
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the Do not use seat accessories
seatbacks closest to the door. that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
3-26 Seats and Restraints
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at Thresholds can also vary with
different crash speeds. For specific vehicle design.
Inflate? example: Frontal airbags are not intended to
Frontal airbags are designed to . If the vehicle hits a stationary inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate impacts, or in many side impacts.
or near-frontal crashes to help at a different crash speed than if
reduce the potential for severe In addition, your vehicle has
the vehicle hits a moving object. dual-stage frontal airbags.
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that Dual-stage airbags adjust the
However, they are only designed deforms, the airbags could restraint according to crash severity.
to inflate if the impact exceeds inflate at a different crash speed Your vehicle has electronic frontal
a predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object sensors, which help the sensing
threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform. system distinguish between a
are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object moderate frontal impact and a more
crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could severe frontal impact. For moderate
airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide inflate at a level less than full
object (like a wall). deployment. For more severe frontal
Whether the frontal airbags will impacts, full deployment occurs.
or should deploy is not based on . If the vehicle goes into an object
how fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could
It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed
the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight
quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object.
Seats and Restraints 3-27
Your vehicle may have one or two Seat-mounted side impact airbags What Makes an Airbag
seat position sensors, depending will inflate if the crash severity is
on what model you have. The above the system's designed
Inflate?
seat position sensor(s) enable threshold level. The threshold level In a deployment event, the sensing
the sensing system to monitor can vary with specific vehicle system sends an electrical signal
the position of the driver seat design. triggering a release of gas from the
(all models except ZO6 and ZR1) Seat-mounted side impact airbags inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
and the right front passenger seat are not intended to inflate in frontal airbag causing the bag to break out
(all models). Seat position sensor(s) impacts, near-frontal impacts, of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
provide information that is used to rollovers, or rear impacts. the airbag, and related hardware are
determine if the airbags should A seat-mounted side impact airbag all part of the airbag module.
deploy at a reduced level or at full is intended to deploy on the side of Frontal airbag modules are located
deployment. the vehicle that is struck. inside the steering wheel and
Your vehicle may or may not have In any particular crash, no one instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags. can say whether an airbag should seat-mounted side impact airbags,
See Airbag System on page 3‑22. have inflated simply because of the there are airbag modules in the side
Seat-mounted side impact airbags damage to a vehicle or because of the front seatbacks closest to
are intended to inflate in moderate of what the repair costs were. For the door.
to severe side crashes. seat-mounted side impact airbags,
deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side
impact.
3-28 Seats and Restraints
How Does an Airbag Airbags should never be regarded
Restrain? as anything more than a supplement { WARNING
to safety belts.
In moderate to severe frontal or When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
near frontal collisions, even belted What Will You See After could cause breathing problems
occupants can contact the steering an Airbag Inflates?
wheel or the instrument panel. In for people with a history of
moderate to severe side collisions, After the frontal and seat-mounted asthma or other breathing trouble.
even belted occupants can contact side impact airbags inflate, they To avoid this, everyone in the
the inside of the vehicle. quickly deflate, so quickly that some vehicle should get out as soon
people may not even realize the as it is safe to do so. If you have
Airbags supplement the protection
airbags inflated. Some components breathing problems but cannot
provided by safety belts. Frontal
of the airbag module may be hot for get out of the vehicle after an
airbags distribute the force of
several minutes. For location of the airbag inflates, then get fresh air
the impact more evenly over the
airbag modules, see What Makes by opening a window or a door.
occupant's upper body, stopping
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑27. If you experience breathing
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags The parts of the airbag that come problems following an airbag
distribute the force of the impact into contact with you may be warm, deployment, you should seek
more evenly over the occupant's but not too hot to touch. There may medical attention.
upper body. be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
But airbags would not help in The vehicle has a feature that may
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
many types of collisions, primarily automatically unlock the doors, turn
prevent the driver from seeing out
because the occupant's motion is the interior lamps on, turn on the
of the windshield or being able to
not toward those airbags. See When hazard warning flashers, and shut
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent
Should an Airbag Inflate? on off the fuel system after the airbags
people from leaving the vehicle.
page 3‑26 for more information. inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
Seats and Restraints 3-29
the interior lamps off, and turn the In many crashes severe enough
. The vehicle has a crash sensing
hazard warning flashers off by using to inflate the airbag, windshields and diagnostic module which
the controls for those features. are broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a
Additional windshield breakage may crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
{ WARNING also occur from the right front
passenger airbag. page 13‑17 and Event Data
A crash severe enough to inflate Recorders on page 13‑17.
. Airbags are designed to inflate
the airbags may have also only once. After an airbag
. Let only qualified technicians
damaged important functions inflates, you will need some work on the airbag system.
in the vehicle, such as the fuel new parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that
system, brake and steering If you do not get them, the the airbag system will not work
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer for
appears to be drivable after a to help protect you in another service.
moderate crash, there may be crash. A new system will include
concealed damage that could airbag modules and possibly
make it difficult to safely operate other parts. The service manual
the vehicle. for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
3-30 Seats and Restraints
Passenger Sensing word ON or OFF, or the symbol rear-facing child restraints not be
for on or off, will be visible. See transported in the vehicle, even if
System Passenger Airbag Status Indicator the airbags are off.
The vehicle has a passenger on page 5‑17. A label on the sun visor says,
sensing system for the right front The passenger sensing system will “Never put a rear-facing child seat
passenger position. The passenger turn off the right front passenger in the front.” This is because the risk
airbag status indicator will be visible frontal airbag and seat-mounted to the rear-facing child is so great,
in the rearview mirror when the side impact airbag under certain if the airbag deploys.
vehicle is started. conditions. The driver airbags are
not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
{ WARNING
The passenger sensing system A child in a rear-facing child
works with sensors that are part of restraint can be seriously
the right front passenger seat. The injured or killed if the right front
sensors are designed to detect the passenger airbag inflates. This
United States presence of a properly-seated is because the back of the
occupant and determine if the right rear-facing child restraint would
front passenger frontal airbag and be very close to the inflating
seat-mounted side impact airbag airbag. A child in a forward-facing
should be enabled (may inflate) child restraint can be seriously
or not. injured or killed if the right front
According to accident statistics, passenger airbag inflates and the
children are safer when properly passenger seat is in a forward
Canada and Mexico
secured in a rear seat in the correct position.
The words ON and OFF, or the child restraint for their weight and (Continued)
symbol for on and off, will be visible size. We recommend that
during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the
Seats and Restraints 3-31
The passenger sensing system is When the passenger sensing
WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front system has turned off the right
passenger frontal airbag and front passenger frontal airbag and
Even if the passenger sensing seat-mounted side impact airbag if: seat-mounted side impact airbag,
system has turned off the right the off indicator will light and stay lit
. The right front passenger seat is
front passenger frontal airbag to remind you that the airbag(s) are
and seat-mounted side impact unoccupied.
off. See Passenger Airbag Status
airbag (if equipped), no system is . The system determines that an Indicator on page 5‑17.
fail-safe. No one can guarantee infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat. The passenger sensing system
that an airbag will not deploy
is designed to turn on (may inflate)
under some unusual . The system determines that a the right front passenger frontal
circumstance, even though small child is present in a child airbag and seat-mounted side
the airbag(s) are off. restraint. impact airbag anytime the system
Secure rear-facing child restraints . The system determines that a senses that a person of adult size
in a rear seat, even if the small child is present in a is sitting properly in the right front
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a booster seat. passenger seat.
forward-facing child restraint in . When the passenger sensing
A right front passenger takes
the right front seat, always move his/her weight off of the seat for system has allowed the airbag(s) to
the front passenger seat as far a period of time. be enabled, the on indicator will light
back as it will go. It is better to and stay lit to remind you that the
secure the child restraint in a
. The right front passenger seat airbag or airbags are active.
rear seat. is occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
. Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
3-32 Seats and Restraints
For some children who have If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child
outgrown child restraints and for Child Restraint restraint and restarting the
very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is still
sensing system may or may not turn If a child restraint has been installed lit, turn the vehicle off. Then
off the right front passenger frontal and the on indicator is lit: slightly recline the vehicle
airbag and seat-mounted side 1. Turn the vehicle off. seatback and adjust the seat
impact airbag, depending upon cushion, if adjustable, to make
2. Remove the child restraint from
the person's seating posture and sure that the vehicle seatback is
the vehicle.
body build. Everyone in the vehicle not pushing the child restraint
who has outgrown child restraints 3. Remove any additional items into the seat cushion.
should wear a safety belt from the seat such as blankets,
6. Restart the vehicle.
properly — whether or not there cushions, seat covers, seat
is an airbag for that person. heaters, or seat massagers. If the on indicator is still lit, do
not install a child restraint in this
4. Reinstall the child restraint
{ WARNING following the directions
vehicle and check with your
dealer.
provided by the child restraint
If the airbag readiness light ever manufacturer and refer to
comes on and stays on, it means Securing Child Restraints on
that something may be wrong page 3‑48.
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑16 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Seats and Restraints 3-33
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an system to detect that person and Additional Factors Affecting
Adult-Size Occupant enable the right front passenger System Operation
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag: Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
1. Turn the vehicle off. during vehicle maneuvers and
2. Remove any additional material braking, which helps the passenger
from the seat, such as blankets, sensing system maintain the
cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status. See
heaters, or seat massagers. “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
3. Place the seatback in the fully information about the importance
upright position. of proper restraint use.
4. Have the person sit upright in If the shoulder portion of the belt
the seat, centered on the seat is pulled out all the way, the child
cushion, with legs comfortably restraint locking feature will be
If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended. engaged. This may unintentionally
the right front passenger seat, but 5. Restart the vehicle and have the cause the passenger sensing
the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for system to turn the airbag(s) off for
because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the on some adult size occupants. If this
properly in the seat. If this happens, indicator is lit. happens, let the belt go back all the
use the following steps to allow the way and start again.
3-34 Seats and Restraints
A thick layer of additional material, Servicing the
such as a blanket or cushion,
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
{ WARNING
or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters, and Airbags affect how the vehicle For up to 10 seconds after the
seat massagers can affect how should be serviced. There are parts ignition is turned off and the
well the passenger sensing system of the airbag system in several battery is disconnected, an airbag
operates. We recommend that places around the vehicle. Your can still inflate during improper
you not use seat covers or other dealer and the service manual have service. You can be injured if you
aftermarket equipment except when information about servicing the are close to an airbag when it
approved by GM for your specific vehicle and the airbag system. To inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to purchase a service manual, see They are probably part of the
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on Service Publications Ordering airbag system. Be sure to follow
page 3‑35 for more information Information on page 13‑15. proper service procedures, and
about modifications that can affect make sure the person performing
how the system operates. work for you is qualified to do so.
{ WARNING
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Seats and Restraints 3-35
Adding Equipment to the seat. The passenger sensing Customer Assistance are in
system may not operate properly Step Two of the Customer
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle if the original seat trim is Satisfaction Procedure in
Q: Is there anything I might add replaced with non-GM covers, this manual. See Customer
to or change about the vehicle upholstery or trim, or with Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
that could keep the airbags GM covers, upholstery or trim Canada) on page 13‑1 or
from working properly? designed for a different vehicle. Customer Satisfaction
Any object, such as an Procedure (Mexico) on
A: Yes. If you add things that
aftermarket seat heater or a page 13‑3.
change the vehicle's frame,
comfort enhancing pad or Q: Because I have a disability,
bumper system, height, front end
device, installed under or on I have to get my vehicle
or side sheet metal, they may
top of the seat fabric, could also modified. How can I find out
keep the airbag system from
interfere with the operation of whether this will affect my
working properly. Changing or
the passenger sensing system. airbag system?
moving any parts of the front
This could either prevent proper
seats, safety belts, the airbag A: If you have questions, call
deployment of the passenger
sensing and diagnostic module, Customer Assistance. The
airbag(s) or prevent the
steering wheel, instrument phone numbers and addresses
passenger sensing system
panel, the inside rear mirror, for Customer Assistance are
from properly turning off the
front sensors, or airbag wiring in Step Two of the Customer
passenger airbag(s). See
can affect the operation of the Satisfaction Procedure in this
Passenger Sensing System on
airbag system. manual. See Customer
page 3‑30.
In addition, the vehicle has Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
If you have any questions
a passenger sensing system Canada) on page 13‑1 or
about this, you should contact
for the right front passenger Customer Satisfaction
Customer Assistance before you
position, which includes sensors Procedure (Mexico) on
modify your vehicle. The phone
that are part of the passenger page 13‑3.
numbers and addresses for
3-36 Seats and Restraints
Your dealer and the service manual Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
have information about the location replace airbag system parts. See
of the airbag sensors, sensing and
Parts After a Crash your dealer for service.
diagnostic module and airbag If the airbag readiness light stays on
wiring. { WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
Airbag System Check system may not work properly.
airbag systems in the vehicle.
The airbag system does not need A damaged airbag system Have the vehicle serviced right
regularly scheduled maintenance or away. See Airbag Readiness Light
may not work properly and
replacement. Make sure the airbag on page 5‑16 for more information.
may not protect you and your
readiness light is working. See passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
Airbag Readiness Light on in serious injury or even death.
page 5‑16 for more information. To help make sure the airbag
Notice: If an airbag covering systems are working properly
is damaged, opened, or broken, after a crash, have them
the airbag may not work properly. inspected and any necessary
Do not open or break the airbag replacements made as soon as
coverings. If there are any possible.
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑27. See your
dealer for service.
Seats and Restraints 3-37
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
the weight and height limitations for
Older Children that booster. Use a booster seat
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
with a lap-shoulder belt until the additional restraint a shoulder
child passes the below fit test: belt can provide. The shoulder
. Sit all the way back on the seat. belt should not cross the face
Do the knees bend at the seat or neck. The lap belt should fit
edge? If yes, continue. If no, snugly below the hips, just
return to the booster seat. touching the top of the thighs.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. This applies belt force to the
Does the shoulder belt rest on child's pelvic bones in a crash.
the shoulder? If yes, continue. It should never be worn over the
If no, then return to the abdomen, which could cause
booster seat. severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
. Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the According to accident statistics,
Older children who have outgrown
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, children and infants are safer
booster seats should wear the
return to the booster seat. when properly restrained in a child
vehicle's safety belts.
restraint system or infant restraint
. Can proper safety belt fit be system secured in a rear seating
maintained for the length of position.
the trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
3-38 Seats and Restraints
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people WARNING (Continued)
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older might also slide under the lap
children need to use safety belts belt. The belt force would then
properly. be applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
{ WARNING go over the shoulder and across
Never do this. the chest.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
{ WARNING
children can be crushed together Never do this.
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one Never allow a child to wear the
person at a time. safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In
a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
Seats and Restraints 3-39
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts
WARNING (Continued)
offer protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only
protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the arms. An infant should be
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate secured in an appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the (Continued)
safety belts.
3-40 Seats and Restraints
For most basic types of child
{ WARNING restraints, there are many
different models available. When
Never do this. purchasing a child restraint, be
Children who are up against, sure it is designed to be used
or very close to, any airbag when in a motor vehicle. If it is, the
it inflates can be seriously injured restraint will have a label saying
or killed. Never put a rear-facing that it meets federal motor
child restraint in the right front vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child The restraint manufacturer's
restraint in a rear seat. It is also instructions that come with the
better to secure a forward-facing restraint state the weight and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there
child restraint in the right front are many kinds of restraints
A: Add-on child restraints, which
seat, always move the front available for children with
are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back as it special needs.
owner, are available in four basic
will go. types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Seats and Restraints 3-41
Child Restraint Systems
{ WARNING { WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. This is safety belt may not remain low
because an infant's neck is not on the hip bones, as it should.
fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around
weighs so much compared with the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the rest of its body. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a
an infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by
restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone
so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal
distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of
part of an infant's body, the back serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
and shoulders. Infants should crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
child restraints. child restraints. surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
3-42 Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's restraint designed to improve the fit in this manual.
body with the harness. of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) (Coupe and
Convertible Models Only) on
page 3‑43 or Lower Anchors and
Seats and Restraints 3-43
Tethers for Children (LATCH In some areas of the United States Lower Anchors and
System) (ZO6 and ZR1 Models and Canada, Certified Child
Only) on page 3‑44 for more Passenger Safety Technicians
Tethers for Children
information. Children can be (CPSTs) are available to inspect (LATCH System) (Coupe
endangered in a crash if the child and demonstrate how to correctly and Convertible
restraint is not properly secured in use and install child restraints. In
the vehicle. the U.S., refer to the National
Models Only)
When securing an add-on child Highway Traffic Safety Some child restraints have a LATCH
restraint, refer to the instructions Administration (NHTSA) website system. As part of the LATCH
that come with the restraint which to locate the nearest child safety system, your child restraint may
may be on the restraint itself or in a seat inspection station. For CPST have lower attachments and/or a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. availability in Canada, check with top tether. The LATCH system can
The child restraint instructions are Transport Canada or the Provincial help hold the child restraint in place
important, so if they are not Ministry of Transportation office. during driving or in a crash. Some
available, obtain a replacement vehicles have lower and/or top
Securing the Child Within the tether anchors designed to secure
copy from the manufacturer. Child Restraint a child restraint with lower
Keep in mind that an unsecured attachments and/or a top tether.
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
{ WARNING Some child restraints with a top
people in the vehicle. Be sure to A child can be seriously injured tether are designed to be used
properly secure any child restraint in whether the top tether is anchored
or killed in a crash if the child
the vehicle — even when no child is or not. Other child restraints require
is not properly secured in the
in it. that the top tether be anchored.
child restraint. Secure the child A national or local law may require
properly following the instructions that the top tether be anchored.
that came with that child restraint.
3-44 Seats and Restraints
In Canada, the law requires that Lower Anchors and child restraint has a top tether,
forward-facing child restraints have make sure your child restraint is
a top tether, and that the tether be
Tethers for Children properly installed using the top
attached. (LATCH System) tether anchor and the vehicle's
Your vehicle does not have lower (ZO6 and ZR1 safety belt. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the
anchors or top tether anchors to Models Only) top tether and anchor. Refer to
secure a child restraint with the
LATCH system. If a national or Some child restraints have a LATCH your child restraint instructions and
local law requires that your top system. As part of the LATCH see Securing Child Restraints on
tether be anchored, do not use a system, your child restraint may page 3‑48 for instructions on
child restraint in this vehicle have lower attachments and/or a securing your child restraint using
because a top tether cannot be top tether. The LATCH system can the vehicle's safety belts.
properly anchored. You must use help hold the child restraint in place In order to use the top tether
the safety belts to secure your child during driving or in a crash. Some anchors in your vehicle, you
restraint in this vehicle, unless a vehicles have lower and/or top need a child restraint equipped
national or local law requires that tether anchors designed to secure with a top tether. The child restraint
the top tether be anchored. Refer to a child restraint with lower manufacturer will provide you with
the child restraint instructions and attachments and/or a top tether. instructions on how to use the child
instructions in this manual for Your vehicle does not have lower restraint and its top tether. The
securing a child restraint using the anchors to accommodate lower following explains how to attach a
vehicle's safety belts. See Securing attachments. Your vehicle does child restraint with the top tether in
Child Restraints on page 3‑48. have a top tether anchor. If your your vehicle.
Seats and Restraints 3-45
Your child restraint may have Top Tether Anchor Locations
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some top tether-equipped child
restraints are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top tether always to be attached.
of the child restraint to the vehicle. In Canada, the law requires that
A top tether anchor is built into the forward-facing child restraints have
vehicle. The top tether a top tether, and that the tether be
attachment (B) on the child restraint attached. Be sure to read and follow
connects to the top tether anchor in the instructions for your child
the vehicle in order to reduce the
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
restraint. positions with top tether anchors.
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in According to accident statistics,
a crash. children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the trim cover.
3-46 Seats and Restraints
Securing a Child Restraint with
a Top Tether WARNING (Continued)
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
{ WARNING belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
the shoulder belt all the way out
not attached to anchors, the child
of the retractor to set the lock,
restraint will not be able to protect
if the vehicle has one, after the
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child restraint has been installed.
child could be seriously injured
or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the Notice: Do not let the LATCH
The top tether anchor is located anchors, or use the vehicle safety attachments rub against the
under the cover behind the belts to secure the restraint, vehicle’s safety belts. This may
passenger seat. following the instructions that damage these parts. If necessary,
came with the child restraint and move buckled safety belts to
the instructions in this manual. avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
{ WARNING could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
Children can be seriously injured safety belt to its stowed position,
or strangled if a shoulder belt is before folding the seat.
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
(Continued)
Seats and Restraints 3-47
Do not secure a child restraint in a 2.3. Route, attach and tighten
position without a top tether anchor the top tether according
if a national or local law requires to your child restraint
that the top tether be attached, or if instructions and the
the instructions that come with the following instructions:
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
1. Secure the child restraint using
the vehicle's safety belt. See
Securing Child Restraints on If the position you are using
page 3‑48. has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
2. If the child restraint manufacturer using a dual tether, route
recommends that the top tether the tether around the
be attached, attach and tighten headrest or head restraint.
the top tether to the top tether If the position you are using
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the 3. Before placing a child in the
has a fixed headrest or child restraint, make sure it
child restraint instructions and head restraint and you are
the following steps: is securely held in place. To
using a single tether, route check, grasp the child restraint
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. the tether over the headrest at the LATCH path and attempt
or head restraint. to move it side‐to‐side and
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the
trim cover to open the cover back‐and‐forth. There should
and expose the anchor. be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
3-48 Seats and Restraints
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash
{ WARNING
This vehicle has airbags. In
addition, the vehicle has a A child in a rear-facing
{ WARNING passenger sensing system which
is designed to turn off the right
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
A crash can damage the front passenger frontal airbag front passenger airbag inflates.
LATCH system in the vehicle. and seat-mounted side impact This is because the back of the
A damaged LATCH system may airbag (if equipped) under certain rear-facing child restraint would
not properly secure the child conditions. See Passenger Sensing be very close to the inflating
restraint, resulting in serious System on page 3‑30 and airbag. A child in a forward-facing
injury or even death in a crash. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator child restraint can be seriously
To help make sure the LATCH on page 5‑17 for more information, injured or killed if the right front
system is working properly after including important safety passenger airbag inflates and the
a crash, see your dealer to have information. passenger seat is in a forward
the system inspected and any A label on the sun visor says, position.
necessary replacements made “Never put a rear-facing child seat
Even if the passenger sensing
as soon as possible. in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great, system has turned off the right
if the airbag deploys. front passenger frontal airbag,
If the vehicle has the LATCH system no system is fail-safe. No one
and it was being used during a can guarantee that an airbag will
crash, new LATCH system parts not deploy under some unusual
may be needed. circumstance, even though it is
New parts and repairs may be turned off.
necessary even if the LATCH (Continued)
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Seats and Restraints 3-49
how and where to install the child You will be using the lap-shoulder
WARNING (Continued) restraint using LATCH. If a child belt to secure the child restraint in
restraint is secured using a safety this position. Follow the instructions
Secure rear-facing child belt and it uses a top tether, see that came with the child restraint.
restraints in a rear seat, even if Lower Anchors and Tethers for 1. Move the seat as far back as
the airbag is off. If you secure a Children (LATCH System) (Coupe it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint in and Convertible Models Only) on forward-facing child restraint.
the right front seat, always move page 3‑43 or Lower Anchors and
the front passenger seat as far Tethers for Children (LATCH When the passenger sensing
System) (ZO6 and ZR1 Models system has turned off the right
back as it will go. It is better to
Only) on page 3‑44 for top tether front passenger frontal airbag
secure the child restraint in a
anchor locations. and seat-mounted side impact
rear seat. airbag (if equipped), the off
Do not secure a child seat in a indicator on the passenger
See Passenger Sensing System
position without a top tether anchor airbag status indicator should
on page 3‑30 for additional
if a national or local law requires light and stay lit when you start
information. that the top tether be anchored, or the vehicle. See Passenger
if the instructions that come with Airbag Status Indicator on
Rear-facing child restraints should the child restraint say that the top page 5‑17.
not be installed in the vehicle, even strap must be anchored.
if the airbag(s) are off. 2. Put the child restraint on
In Canada, the law requires that the seat.
If the child restraint has the LATCH forward-facing child restraints have
system, see Lower Anchors and a top tether, and that the tether be 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Tethers for Children (LATCH attached. the lap and shoulder portions of
System) (Coupe and Convertible the vehicle’s safety belt through
Models Only) on page 3‑43 or or around the restraint. The child
Lower Anchors and Tethers for restraint instructions will show
Children (LATCH System) (ZO6 and you how.
ZR1 Models Only) on page 3‑44 for
3-50 Seats and Restraints
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
Seats and Restraints 3-51
7. If the child restraint has a top If the airbag or airbags are off, the
tether, follow the child restraint off indicator in the passenger airbag
manufacturer's instructions status indicator will come on and
regarding the use of the top stay on when the vehicle is started.
tether. See Lower Anchors and If a child restraint has been
Tethers for Children (LATCH installed and the on indicator is lit,
System) (Coupe and Convertible see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Models Only) on page 3‑43 or Child Restraint ” under Passenger
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Sensing System on page 3‑30 for
Children (LATCH System) more information.
(ZO6 and ZR1 Models Only) on
page 3‑44 for more information. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
8. Before placing a child in the let it return to the stowed position.
child restraint, make sure it If the top tether is attached to a top
is securely held in place. To tether anchor, disconnect it.
check, grasp the child restraint
at the safety belt path and
attempt to move it side‐to‐side
and back‐and‐forth. When the
child restraint is properly
installed, there should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement.
3-52 Seats and Restraints
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Open the glove box by lifting up on
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 the lever. Use the key to lock and
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 unlock the lighted glove box.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Cupholders
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Two cupholders are located on
the center console next to the shift Convertible Shown, Coupe
lever. Slide the handle from the left Similar
to the right side to access the lid.
To access a storage compartment,
pull up to open the cover. The
Rear Storage covers cannot be removed.
Two rear storage compartments are For ZO6 and ZR1, and Grand Sport
located in the floor of the rear hatch/ Coupe with a manual transmission,
trunk area. the right rear compartment stores
the battery and cannot be used for
storage.
Notice: Do not store heavy or
sharp objects in the rear storage
compartments located in the
hatch/trunk area. The objects
could damage the underbody.
4-2 Storage
Rear Trunk Partition Additional Storage
For vehicles with the power Features
convertible top option only, there is
a trunk partition to keep cargo from
getting in the way of the convertible Cargo Cover
top. The trunk partition must be in For vehicles with this feature,
place for the convertible top to the security shade can provide
move. If the trunk partition is not hidden storage in the rear area
properly in place, the ATTACH of the vehicle. The shade is also
TRUNK PARTITION message helpful in blocking the glare from
displays. See Convertible Top the removable roof when it is stored
Messages on page 5‑37 for more in the rear compartment.
information. Pull the divider up and snap it onto
The trunk partition is a flat carpeted the snaps on both sides of the trunk.
board with a horizontal flap that can
be attached to the top of the trunk to Center Console Storage
divide the storage compartment or it To use this storage area, pull the
stores flat when not in use. cover up on the driver side front
edge of the console and swing it
to the passenger side.
Some vehicles might also have
input jacks for auxiliary audio
devices. See Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑17.
Storage 4-3
Using the Cargo Cover
3. Grasp the loop at the rear center 4. Push the loop to the top of the
of the shade and wrap it around striker (base plate).
1. Hook the elastic loops on the the striker assembly.
front corners (A) of the shade to Convenience Net
the T-nuts located on the front
corners of the rear hatch frame. Use the convenience net, located in
the rear, to store small loads as far
2. Hook the elastic loops on the forward as possible. The net should
rear corners (B) of the shade to not be used to store heavy loads.
the hooks recessed inside the
rear hatch frame, near the rear
corners.
4-4 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Boost Gauge (ZR1) . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Engine Oil Pressure
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Engine Coolant Temperature
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-31
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Vehicle Messages
Controls Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16 Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-36
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Convertible Top Messages . . . 5-37
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-38
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Cooling System
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-40
Warning Lights, Gauges, and One-to-Four Shift Light Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-41
Indicators (Manual Transmission) . . . . . 5-22 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-41
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Active Handling System Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-42
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Traction Control System Ride Control System
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 (TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-23 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-49
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Anti-Theft Alarm System
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-50
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Starting the Vehicle Controls Telescopic Steering Column
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-53 Steering Wheel
Vehicle Reminder Adjustment
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-54
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-55
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-64
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Universal Remote System
For vehicles with this feature, the
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
telescopic steering column control
is located on the right side of the
steering column.
The lever is located on the left side
To adjust the telescopic steering
of the steering column.
column:
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Push the switch forward to move
1. Pull the lever toward you. the wheel away from you.
2. Move the steering wheel up 2. Pull the switch toward you to
or down. move the wheel closer to you.
3. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Instruments and Controls 5-3
The telescopic steering column b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press To change radio stations:
position can be stored with your to silence the vehicle speakers only.
memory settings. See “Memory
. Press w or x to go to the next
Press again to turn the sound on.
Seat, Mirrors, and Steering Wheel” or to the previous radio station
under Power Seat Adjustment on For vehicles with Bluetooth or and stay there. The radio only
page 3‑3 for more information. OnStar® systems press and seeks stations with a strong
hold b g for longer than signal that are in the
Steering Wheel Controls two seconds to interact with selected band.
those systems. See Bluetooth on . Press and hold w or x for
page 7‑18 and the OnStar Owner's
two seconds until SCAN displays
Guide for more information.
and a beep sounds to scan
c (Phone On Hook): Press to stations. The radio goes to a
reject an incoming call, or end a station, plays for a few seconds,
current call. then goes to the next station.
w x (Next/Previous): Press to Press again to stop scanning.
change radio stations or select . Press and hold w or x for
tracks on a CD. four seconds until PRESET
SCAN displays and a beep
sounds to scan presets. The
radio goes to a station, plays for
a few seconds, then goes to the
For vehicles with steering wheel next station. Press again to stop
controls, some audio controls can scanning.
be adjusted at the steering wheel.
5-4 Instruments and Controls
To select tracks on a CD: Horn Move the lever to the following
positions:
. Press w or x to go to the next Press near or on the horn symbols
or to the previous track when a on the steering wheel pad to sound 1 (High Speed): Use for fast
CD is playing. the horn. wipes.
. Press and hold w or x for
6 (Low Speed): Use for
more than two seconds to scan
Windshield Wiper/Washer slow wipes.
the current CD. The CD goes to & (Delay): Use to set a delay
the next track, plays the first between wipes.
10 seconds, then goes to the x (Delay Adjustment): Use for
next track. Press again to stop a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the
scanning. intermittent adjust band down for
. Press and hold w or x for a longer delay or up for a shorter
delay. The wiper speed can only be
more than four seconds to scan The windshield wiper lever is manually adjusted when the lever is
all of the CDs loaded. The CD located on the right side of the in this position.
goes to the next CD, plays the steering column.
first 10 seconds of each track, 9 (Off): Use to turn off the
then goes to the next CD. Press windshield wipers.
again to stop scanning. 8 (Mist): Move all the way down
+ e − e (Volume): Press to to mist and release for a single
increase or to decrease the radio wiping cycle. The windshield wipers
volume. will stop after one wipe. Hold the
band on mist longer for more wipes.
1 to 6 (Preset Pushbuttons):
Press to play stations that are
programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons.
Instruments and Controls 5-5
Heavy snow or ice can overload Compass
the wipers. If this occurs, a circuit { WARNING
breaker will stop the wipers until the Compass Operation
motor cools. Clear all ice and snow In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield is With the compass feature on,
from the wiper blades before using each time the vehicle is started, the
them. If frozen to the windshield, warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the compass will take a few seconds
carefully loosen them or thaw them. to adjust and display the current
Damaged wiper blades should be windshield, blocking your vision.
compass heading. For example,
replaced. See Wiper Blade NE is displayed for north-east.
Replacement on page 10‑46. If the fluid in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir is low, the message Compass Calibration
Windshield Washer
CHECK WASHER FLUID will Press P once to turn the compass
The lever on the right side of appear on the Driver Information
the steering column also controls display on or off.
Center (DIC) display. It will take
the windshield washer. There is 15 seconds after the bottle is refilled If after several seconds the display
a button at the end of the lever. for this message to turn off. For does not show a compass heading,
To spray washer fluid on the information on the correct washer there may be a strong magnetic
windshield, press the button and fluid to use, see Washer Fluid on field interfering with the compass.
hold it. The washer will spray until page 10‑37 and Recommended Interference can be caused by a
you release the button. The wipers Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑6. magnetic antenna mount, note pad
will continue to clear the window for holder, or similar object. If the
about six seconds after the button is letter C or CAL appears in the
released and then stop or return to compass window, the compass
your preset speed. needs calibration.
5-6 Instruments and Controls
Depending on the mirror, in order to To adjust for compass variance: Clock
calibrate, CAL must be displayed in 1. Find your current location and
the mirror compass windows. If CAL To set the clock:
variance zone number on the
is not displayed, press P for zone map that follows. 1. Press and hold H until the
several seconds or until CAL is correct hour displays.
displayed. 2. Press and hold M until the
If the compass has map lamps, it correct minute displays.
can be placed in calibration mode The clock mode automatically times
by pressing and holding the left map out with the changed display format
light button until a C appears on the set as the current default setting.
compass display.
The mirror compass can be Power Outlets
calibrated by driving the vehicle in
The accessory power outlet can be
circles at 8 km/h (5 mph) or less until
used to plug in electrical equipment,
the display reads a direction.
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Compass Variance The accessory power outlet is
The mirror is set to zone eight. 2. Press and hold P until a Z and located inside the center console
If you do not live in zone eight or a zone number displays. The storage compartment, on the
drive out of the area, the compass compass is now in zone mode. forward left side.
variance needs to be changed to Remove the cover to access and
3. Once the zone number displays,
the appropriate zone. replace when not in use.
press P repeatedly until you
reach the correct zone number.
Stop pressing P and the mirror
returns to normal operation.
Instruments and Controls 5-7
Certain electrical accessories Cigarette Lighter
{ WARNING may not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could To use the cigarette lighter, push it
Power is always supplied to the overload vehicle or adapter fuses. in all the way and let go. When it is
outlets. Do not leave electrical If a problem is experienced, see ready, it will pop back out by itself.
equipment plugged in when the your dealer. Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
vehicle is not in use because the in while it is heating does not let
vehicle could catch fire and cause When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper the lighter back away from the
injury or death. heating element when it is hot.
installation instructions included
with the equipment. See Add-On Damage from overheating can
Notice: Leaving electrical Electrical Equipment on page 9‑55. occur to the lighter or heating
equipment plugged in for an element, or a fuse could be
It is recommended that a qualified blown. Do not hold a cigarette
extended period of time while
technician or dealer be seen for lighter in while it is heating.
the vehicle is off will drain the
the proper installation of your
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment.
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that Notice: Hanging heavy
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere equipment from the power outlet
rating. can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty. The
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.
5-8 Instruments and Controls
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
located on the instrument panel, in lights work together to indicate a
front of the shift lever. To use the Indicators problem with the vehicle.
ashtray, press on the indentation at Warning lights and gauges can
the top of the door. When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
Notice: If papers, pins, or other before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
flammable items are put in the to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other replacement. Paying attention to check the section that explains what
smoking materials could ignite the warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
them and possibly damage the prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
vehicle. Never put flammable Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
items in the ashtray. could be a problem with a vehicle
Loose objects, such as paper clips, function. Some warning lights come
can lodge behind and beneath the on briefly when the engine is started
ashtray lid and prevent movement to indicate they are working.
of the lid. You should avoid putting
small, loose objects near the
ashtray.
Instruments and Controls 5-9
Instrument Cluster
English Coupe and Convertible Shown, Metric Similar
5-10 Instruments and Controls
ZR1 – English Shown, ZO6, and Metric Similar
Instruments and Controls 5-11
Speedometer Tachometer Fuel Gauge
The speedometer shows the speed The tachometer displays the engine
in either kilometers per hour (km/h) speed in thousands of revolutions
or miles per hour (mph). For more per minute (rpm).
information see “Personal Options” Notice: Fuel shuts off at about
under Vehicle Personalization on 6500 rpm for the base model,
page 5‑55. 7000 rpm for the ZO6 model, and
6600 rpm for the ZR1 model. If the
Odometer vehicle continues to be driven at
To read the odometer with the the fuel shut off rpm, the engine
ignition off, turn on the parking could be damaged. Be sure to
lamps. operate the vehicle below the
fuel shut off rpm or reduce the
If the vehicle needs a new odometer vehicle's rpm quickly when the
installed, the mileage total of the fuel shuts off. The fuel gauge shows how much
new odometer will be set to the fuel the vehicle has left while the
original kilometers (miles) of the old engine is on.
odometer. See your dealer if the
odometer must be replaced in the An arrow on the fuel gauge
vehicle. indicates the side of the vehicle
the fuel door is on.
5-12 Instruments and Controls
. It takes a little more or less
When the needle approaches the
fuel to fill up than the gauge
Boost Gauge (ZR1)
low fuel symbol, a chime sounds
and LOW FUEL appears on the indicated. For example, the
Driver Information Center (DIC) gauge may have indicated half
display. There is still a little fuel full, but it took a little more or
left, but the vehicle's fuel tank less than half of the tank's
should be filled soon. capacity to fill the tank.
Press the RESET button to
. The gauge pointer may move
acknowledge a DIC message(s). while cornering, braking or
Pressing the RESET button also speeding up.
turns off a DIC message but the . The gauge may not indicate the
LOW FUEL message comes on tank is empty when the ignition
again in 10 minutes if fuel is not is turned off.
added to the vehicle. . The gauge reading may change English
Here are five things that some slightly within the first several
owners ask about. All these things minutes after starting the
are normal and do not indicate that vehicle.
anything is wrong with the fuel
gauge. See “DIC Operation and Displays”
in Driver Information Center (DIC)
. At the service station, the gas on page 5‑25 for more information.
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads the full.
Metric
Instruments and Controls 5-13
For vehicles that have this gauge, it Engine Oil Pressure
is located near the instrument panel
cluster.
Gauge
This gauge indicates vacuum during
light to moderate throttle and boost
under heavier throttle.
It displays the air pressure level in
the intake manifold before it enters
the engine's combustion chamber.
The gauge is automatically centered
at zero every time the engine is
started. Actual vacuum or boost Metric
is displayed from this zero point.
Changes in ambient pressure,
such as driving in mountains and English
changing weather, will slightly
change the zero reading.
English— ZO6 and ZR1 Models
5-14 Instruments and Controls
Oil pressure should be 140 to
{ WARNING 550 kPa (20 to 80 psi). In certain
situations such as long, extended
Do not keep driving if the oil idles on hot days, it could read as
pressure is low. The engine can low as 40 kPa (6 psi) and still be
become so hot that it catches fire. considered normal. Oil pressure
Someone could be burned. Check may exceed 689 kPa (100 psi)
the oil as soon as possible and when first started or when
have the vehicle serviced. accelerating. It may vary with
engine speed, outside temperature
Notice: Lack of proper engine and oil viscosity, but readings above
oil maintenance can damage the the shaded area show the normal
Metric — ZO6 and ZR1 Models engine. The repairs would not be operating range. Readings in the
covered by the vehicle warranty. shaded area tell you that the engine
Always follow the maintenance is low on oil, or that you might have
schedule for changing engine oil. some other oil problem. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑15.
The engine oil pressure gauge
shows the engine oil pressure The engine oil pressure can also
in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds be displayed using the GAGES
per square inch) when the engine is button on the Driver Information
running. Center (DIC). See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
Instruments and Controls 5-15
Engine Coolant Voltmeter Gauge
Temperature Gauge
Metric
This gauge shows the engine Base and ZO6, English and Metric
coolant temperature. If the gauge
English The voltmeter shows the voltage
pointer moves into the shaded area,
the engine is too hot. output of the battery. It shows the
voltage output of the charging
This means that the engine coolant system while the engine is running.
has overheated. If the vehicle has
been operating under normal driving The reading changes as the rate
conditions, pull off the road, stop the of charge changes (with engine
vehicle and turn off the engine as speed, for example), but if the
soon as possible. voltmeter reads at 9 volts or below,
the instrument panel cluster and
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑34 for more information.
5-16 Instruments and Controls
other systems may shut down. The Airbag Readiness Light
Driver Information Center (DIC)
reads BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW The system checks the airbag's
when the vehicle is at 10 volts or electrical system for possible
below. Have it checked right away. malfunctions. If the light stays on
Driving with the voltmeter reading at it indicates there is an electrical
10 volts or below could drain the problem. The system check
The safety belt light comes on and includes the airbag sensor, the
battery and disable the vehicle. stays on for several seconds, then pretensioners, the airbag modules,
flashes for several more. the wiring, and the crash sensing
Safety Belt Reminders and diagnostic module. For more
This chime and light are repeated
Safety Belt Reminder Light if the driver remains unbuckled information on the airbag system,
and the vehicle is in motion. If the see Airbag System on page 3‑22.
When the engine is started, a chime driver safety belt is already buckled,
sounds for several seconds to neither the chime nor the light
remind a driver to fasten the safety comes on.
belt, unless the driver safety belt is
already buckled.
Instruments and Controls 5-17
If there is a problem with the airbag
system, an airbag Driver Information
Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑35 for more information.
The airbag readiness light flashes Passenger Airbag Status Canada and Mexico
for a few seconds when the engine Indicator When the vehicle is started, the
is started. If the light does not come
The vehicle has the passenger passenger airbag status indicator
on then, have it fixed immediately.
sensing system. See Passenger will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
Sensing System on page 3‑30 for for on and off, for several seconds
{ WARNING important safety information. The as a system check. Then, after
rearview mirror has a passenger several more seconds, the status
If the airbag readiness light stays indicator will light either ON or OFF,
airbag status indicator.
on after the vehicle is started or or either the on or off symbol, to let
comes on while driving, it means you know the status of the right front
the airbag system might not be passenger frontal and seat-mounted
working properly. The airbags in side impact airbags (if equipped).
the vehicle might not inflate in a
If the word ON or the on symbol is
crash, or they could even inflate
lit on the passenger airbag status
without a crash. To help avoid
United States indicator, it means that the right
injury, have the vehicle serviced front passenger frontal airbag and
right away. seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) are enabled (may
inflate).
5-18 Instruments and Controls
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag { WARNING
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has If the airbag readiness light ever
turned off the right front passenger comes on and stays on, it means
frontal airbag and seat-mounted that something may be wrong
side impact airbag (if equipped). with the airbag system. To help
This comes on briefly while starting
See Passenger Sensing System on avoid injury to yourself or others,
the engine. If it does not come on,
page 3‑30 for more on this, have the vehicle serviced right
have the vehicle serviced by your
including important safety away. See Airbag Readiness dealer.
information. Light on page 5‑16 for more
information, including important If the malfunction indicator lamp
If, after several seconds, both status comes on and stays on, while the
indicator lights remain on, or if there safety information.
engine is running, this indicates that
are no lights at all, there may be there is an OBD II problem and
a problem with the lights or the Malfunction service is required.
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service. Indicator Lamp Malfunctions often are indicated by
A computer system called OBD II the system before any problem is
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second apparent. Being aware of the light
Generation) monitors operation of can prevent more serious damage
the fuel, ignition, and emission to the vehicle. This system assists
control systems. It makes sure that the service technician in correctly
emissions are at acceptable levels diagnosing any malfunction.
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
Instruments and Controls 5-19
Notice: If the vehicle is This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission
continually driven with this light malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has
on, after a while, the emission Light Flashing: A misfire condition been detected on the vehicle.
controls might not work as well, has been detected. A misfire Diagnosis and service might be
the vehicle fuel economy might increases vehicle emissions and required.
not be as good, and the engine could damage the emission control the following may correct an
might not run as smoothly. This system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emission system malfunction:
could lead to costly repairs that and service might be required.
might not be covered by the . Make sure the fuel cap is fully
vehicle warranty. The following can prevent more installed. See Filling the Tank on
serious damage to the vehicle: page 9‑52. The diagnostic
Notice: Modifications made to the system can determine if the
engine, transmission, exhaust, . Reduce vehicle speed.
fuel cap has been left off or
intake, or fuel system of the . Avoid hard accelerations. improperly installed. A loose or
vehicle or the replacement of missing fuel cap allows fuel to
the original tires with other
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
evaporate into the atmosphere.
than those of the same Tire If the light continues to flash, when A few driving trips with the cap
Performance Criteria (TPC) can it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. properly installed should turn the
affect the vehicle's emission Find a safe place to park the light off.
controls and can cause this light vehicle. Turn off the vehicle, wait
to come on. Modifications to at least 10 seconds, and restart the
. Make sure the electrical system
these systems could lead to engine. If the light is still flashing, is not wet. The system could
costly repairs not covered by follow the previous steps and see be wet if the vehicle was driven
the vehicle warranty. This could your dealer for service as soon as through a deep puddle of water.
also result in a failure to pass a possible. The condition is usually
required Emission Inspection/ corrected when the electrical
Maintenance test. See system dries out. A few driving
Accessories and Modifications on trips should turn the light off.
page 10‑4.
5-20 Instruments and Controls
. Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and The vehicle may not pass
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs inspection if:
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may Some state and local governments . the check engine light is on with
cause: stalling after start-up, may have programs to inspect the engine running, or if the light
stalling when the vehicle is the on-vehicle emission control does not come on when the
changed into gear, misfiring, equipment For the inspection, the ignition is in ON/RUN while the
hesitation on acceleration, emission system test equipment is engine is off.
or stumbling on acceleration. connected to the vehicle’s Data Link . the critical emission control
These conditions might go away Connector (DLC). systems have not been
once the engine is warmed up. completely diagnosed by the
If one or more of these system. This can happen if
conditions occurs, change the the battery has recently been
fuel brand used. It will require at replaced or if the battery has run
least one full tank of the proper down. The diagnostic system
fuel to turn the light off. evaluates critical emission
control systems during normal
See Recommended Fuel on driving. This can take
page 9‑49. The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering several days of routine driving.
If none of the above have made wheel. See your dealer if assistance If this has been done and the
the light turn off, your dealer can is needed. vehicle still does not pass the
check the vehicle. The dealer inspection , your dealer can
has the proper test equipment prepare the vehicle for
and diagnostic tools to fix any inspection.
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
Instruments and Controls 5-21
Brake System Warning If the light comes on while driving
Light
{ WARNING and a CHECK BRAKE FLUID
message shows on the DIC, pull
The vehicle brake system consists The brake system might not be off the road and stop carefully. The
of two hydraulic circuits. If one working properly if the brake pedal may be harder to push or the
circuit is not working, the remaining system warning light is on. pedal may go closer to the floor.
circuit can still work to stop the Driving with the brake system It may take longer to stop. If the
vehicle. For normal braking warning light on can lead to a light is still on, have the vehicle
performance, both circuits need crash. If the light is still on after towed for service. See Towing the
to be working. the vehicle has been pulled off Vehicle on page 10‑86 and Brake
the road and carefully stopped, System Messages on page 5‑36 for
have the vehicle towed for more information.
service.
If this warning light stays on after
the engine is started, the parking
English Metric
brake may still be set or there
This light comes on briefly while could be a brake problem. Refer
starting the engine. If it does not to Parking Brake on page 9‑35 to
come on, have it fixed so it is ready see if it is set. If the parking brake
to warn if there is a problem. is not set, have the brake system
inspected right away.
5-22 Instruments and Controls
Antilock Brake System If the regular brake system warning The shift must be completed into
light is not on, the vehicle still has 4 (Fourth) to turn off this feature.
(ABS) Warning Light brakes, but not antilock brakes. This helps the vehicle get the best
If the regular brake system warning possible fuel economy.
light is also on, the vehicle does not After shifting to 4 (Fourth), the
have antilock brakes and there is a vehicle can be downshifted to a
problem with the regular brakes. lower gear.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑21. Notice: Forcing the shift lever
into any gear except 4 (Fourth)
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake One-to-Four Shift Light when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light
System (ABS), this light comes on comes on may damage the
briefly when the engine is started.
(Manual Transmission) transmission. Shift only from
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when the
If it does not, have the vehicle light comes on.
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the This light comes on when:
indicator light then goes off. . The engine coolant temperature
If the ABS light stays on, turn the is higher than 76°C (169°F).
ignition off. If the light comes on . The vehicle is going 24 to
while driving, stop as soon as it is When this light comes on, the 31 km/h (15 to 19 mph).
safely possible and turn the ignition vehicle can only be shifted from
off. Then start the engine again to 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) instead of
. The vehicle is at 21 percent
reset the system. If the ABS light 1 (First) to 2 (Second). throttle or less.
stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
Instruments and Controls 5-23
Active Handling System For the ZR1 this light comes on Traction Control System
when Performance Traction mode is
Light activated, along with DIC messages
(TCS) Warning Light
for the five traction modes.
When the Active Handling System
is turned off, the light comes on, a
chime sounds, and the TRACTION
SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING
– OFF message displays in the DIC.
The Traction Control System is off
The Active Handling System light and the Active Handling System The Traction Control System (TCS)
comes on briefly as the engine is does not assist with controlling the warning light comes on briefly when
started. If the light does not, have vehicle. the engine is started.
the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the light does not, have the
If the system is working normally the When the Active Handling System
is turned back on, the light turns vehicle serviced by your dealer.
light goes off. If the system is working normally
off, a chime sounds, and the
If the light stays on or comes on TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE the light then goes off.
while driving, a chime sounds and HANDLING – ON message displays If the light stays on, or comes on
a SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING in the DIC. while driving and a SERVICE
SYSTEM message appears on the TRACTION SYSTEM message
DIC and the vehicle need service. See Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑44 for more information. displays in the Driver Information
This light also comes on while the Center (DIC), the vehicle needs
vehicle is in the Competitive service.
Driving Mode.
5-24 Instruments and Controls
When the TCS is turned off, this Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and
light comes on and a TRACTION Then is On Steady
SYSTEM OFF message displays This indicates that there may be a
on the DIC. When this light is on, problem with the TPMS. The light
the TCS system does not limit flashes for about a minute and
wheel spin. stays on steady for the remainder
When the TCS is turned back on, of the ignition cycle. This sequence
this light turns off and a TRACTION repeats with every ignition cycle.
SYSTEM ON message displays on For vehicles with the Tire Pressure See Tire Pressure Monitor
the DIC Monitor System (TPMS), this light Operation on page 10‑69 for more
This light also comes on while the comes on briefly when the engine information.
vehicle is in the Competitive is started. It provides information
Driving Mode. about tire pressures and the TPMS. Security Light
See Traction Control System (TCS) When the Light is On Steady
on page 9‑36 and Ride Control This indicates that one or more
System Messages on page 5‑44 for of the tires are significantly
more information. underinflated.
See Active Handling System on A tire pressure message can
page 9‑37 for more information on accompany the light. See Tire
Competitive Driving Mode and Messages on page 5‑51 for more For information regarding this light
Performance Traction Mode. information. Stop as soon as and the vehicle's security system,
possible, and inflate the tires to see Anti-Theft Alarm System on
the pressure value shown on the page 2‑13.
Tire and Loading Information label.
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑66
for more information.
Instruments and Controls 5-25
High-Beam On Light The lights go out when the fog Information Displays
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
information. Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Lamps On Reminder The Driver Information Center (DIC)
display is located on the instrument
panel cluster and shows driver
This light comes on when the personalization features and
high-beam headlamps are in use. warning/status messages.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam The DIC comes on when the ignition
Changer on page 6‑2 for more is turned on. After displaying
information. CORVETTE BY CHEVROLET, the
This light comes on whenever the DIC shows the information that was
parking lamps are on. last displayed before the engine
Front Fog Lamp Light
See Exterior Lamps Off Reminder was turned off.
on page 6‑2 for more information. If a problem is detected, a warning
message appears on the DIC
display. See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑35 for more information.
The fog lamp lights come on when
the fog lamps are in use.
5-26 Instruments and Controls
DIC Operation and Displays TRIP: Press this button to display
your total and trip distance driven,
Depending on the features on the
the elapsed time function, your
vehicle, the drive gear may display
average speed, and the engine
on the DIC. See “Manual Paddle
oil life.
Shift” under Automatic Transmission
on page 9‑28 and Head-Up Display OPTION: Press this button to
(HUD) on page 5‑31 for more choose personal options that
information. are available on your vehicle,
depending on the options your
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
vehicle is equipped with, such as
has different modes which can be
door locks, easy entry seats, and
accessed by pressing the following
language.
buttons located on the instrument
panel, to the right of the instrument RESET: Press this button, used
. 4 (Fuel): Press this button to along with the other buttons, to
panel cluster. display fuel information such as fuel
economy and range. reset system functions, select
personal options, and turn off or
2 (Gauges): Press this button to acknowledge messages on the DIC.
display gauge information like oil
pressure and temperature, coolant
temperature, automatic transmission
fluid temperature, if equipped,
battery voltage, and front/rear tire
pressures.
Instruments and Controls 5-27
Fuel Button Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Press the fuel button again to
Instantaneous fuel economy reflects display the range, such as:
The fuel button displays average
only the fuel economy that the . RANGE 48 km or
fuel economy and instantaneous
vehicle has right now and will
fuel economy, calculated for your . RANGE 30 MI
change frequently as driving
specific driving conditions, and
conditions change. Unlike average If the LOW FUEL warning is
range information.
fuel economy, this menu item displayed or if RANGE is less than
Average Fuel Economy: The cannot be reset. 64 km (40 miles), the display will
average fuel economy is viewed as read RANGE LOW.
Press the fuel button again to
a long-term approximation of your
display instantaneous fuel economy, The fuel economy data used to
overall driving conditions. You
such as: determine fuel range is an average
should reset the average fuel
economy display every time you . INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY of recent driving conditions. As your
refuel. If you press the RESET 11.7 L/100 km or driving conditions change, this data
button in this mode while you are is gradually updated automatically.
. INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY
driving, the system will reset this 20.1 MPG If the vehicle has been idling for
display and begin figuring fuel a long time, the range displayed
economy from that point in time. Fuel Range: The range calculates on the DIC could be abnormally
the remaining distance you can low. The vehicle must be driven
Press the fuel button to display drive without refueling. It is based
average fuel economy, such as: 8 to 16 km (5 to 10 miles) to get
on fuel economy and the fuel an accurate reading.
. AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY remaining in the tank.
11.7 L/100 km or
. AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
20.1 MPG
5-28 Instruments and Controls
Gauges Button If the oil temperature is low, Transmission Fluid
the display will show OIL Temperature: If you have an
The gauges button displays
TEMPERATURE LOW. If the oil automatic transmission vehicle,
oil pressure, oil temperature,
temperature is high, the display will this display shows the automatic
coolant temperature, transmission
show OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH. transmission fluid temperature.
fluid temperature for automatic
transmission vehicles only, battery Coolant Temperature: This display Press the gauges button again to
voltage, and tire pressure shows the engine coolant display the automatic transmission
information. temperature. fluid temperature, such as:
Oil Pressure: This display shows Press the gauges button again to . TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C or
the oil pressure. display the coolant temperature, . TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F
such as:
Press the gauges button to display If the transmission fluid temperature
the oil pressure, such as: . COOLANT is low, the display will show
TEMPERATURE 51°C or TRANS FLUID TEMP LOW. If the
. OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa or
. COOLANT transmission fluid temperature is
. OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI
TEMPERATURE 123°F high, the display will show TRANS
Oil Temperature: This display FLUID TEMP HIGH.
If the coolant temperature is low,
shows the oil temperature.
the display will show COOLANT
Press the gauges button again to TEMPERATURE LOW. If the
display the oil temperature, such as: coolant temperature is high, the
. OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C or display will show COOLANT
TEMPERATURE HIGH.
. OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F
Instruments and Controls 5-29
Battery Voltage: This display TRIP Button Both of the trip odometers can
shows the current battery voltage. be used simultaneously. The trip
The TRIP button displays the
Press the gauges button again to odometers can be reset by pressing
odometer, trip distance, elapsed
display the battery voltage, such as: the RESET button on the DIC.
time, average speed, and oil life
. BATTERY VOLTAGE remaining information. There is also a miles since last
13.5 VOLTS ignition feature that displays the
Odometer: The odometer shows
number of kilometers (miles) driven
Tire Pressure: This display shows how far your vehicle has been
since you last started the vehicle.
the tire pressure for each tire. driven in either kilometers or miles.
Press and hold the RESET button
Press the TRIP button to display
Press the gauges button again to for three seconds, then release it.
odometer readings, such as:
display the tire pressure for the front The kilometers (miles) since the last
tires, such as:
. ODOMETER 20008 km or ignition cycle will be set into the trip
. ODOMETER 12345 MI odometer.
. FRONT TIRE PRESSURES
L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or You can also display the odometer Elapsed Timer: Press the
by turning on the parking lamps. TRIP button until ELAPSED
. FRONT TIRE PRESSURES TIMER is displayed, such as
L 34 PSI R 33 PSI Trip Odometers: There are two trip ELAPSED TIMER .00.
Press the gauges button again to odometers. Press the TRIP button
to display TRIP ODOMETER A When the ignition is in on, the DIC
display the tire pressure for the rear can be used as a stopwatch. The
tires, such as: readings and press the button again
to display TRIP ODOMETER B display can show hours, minutes,
. REAR TIRE PRESSURES readings, such as: and seconds. The elapsed time
L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or indicator will record up to 23 hours,
. TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km or 59 minutes, and 59 seconds, then
. REAR TIRE PRESSURES . it will reset to zero and continue
L 34 PSI R 33 PSI TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI
counting. The display appears as
. TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km or ELAPSED TIMER .00 in the elapsed
. TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI time function.
5-30 Instruments and Controls
You can start or stop the elapsed Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIP See Scheduled Maintenance on
time by pressing the RESET button. button until the engine oil life is page 11‑2 and Engine Oil on
To reset the elapsed time to zero, displayed, such as OIL LIFE page 10‑15 for more information.
press the RESET button for REMAINING 89%.
three seconds while the timer is OPTION Button
This is an estimate of the engine
displayed. oil's remaining useful life. It will The OPTION button allows you
Pressing and holding the RESET show 100% when the system is to access the PERSONAL
button for at least 10 seconds will reset after an oil change. It will alert OPTIONS menu and customize
reset the timer display to the time you to change the oil on a schedule the personalization settings on your
since last ignition cycle. consistent with your driving vehicle. See Vehicle Personalization
conditions. on page 5‑55 for more information.
Average Speed: Press the TRIP
button until the average speed is When the remaining oil life is low, RESET Button
displayed, such as: the system will alert you with the The RESET button, used along
. AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h or message CHANGE ENGINE OIL. with other buttons, will reset
Remember, you must reset the system functions and turn off or
. AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH
engine oil life system yourself acknowledge messages on the DIC.
Press and hold the RESET button to after each oil change. It will not
reset to 0.0 km/h (mph). reset itself. To reset the system,
see Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑22. Be careful not to
reset the engine oil life system
accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change.
Instruments and Controls 5-31
Head-Up Display (HUD) The information may be displayed in transmission into the next
English or metric units and appears higher gear. An arrow pointing
as an image focused out toward up will light up on the display
{ WARNING the front of the vehicle. The HUD just prior to reaching the engine
If the HUD image is too bright, consists of the following information: fuel cut-off mode. This cut-off
. Speedometer is about 6,500 rpm for the
or too high in your field of view, it
LS3 engine, 6,600 rpm for
may take you more time to see . Turn Signal Indicators the LS9 & ZR1 engines, and
things you need to see when it is 7,000 rpm for the LS7 engine.
dark outside. Be sure to keep the
. High-Beam Indicator Symbol
HUD image dim and placed low in . Tachometer
. Check Gauges Warning
your field of view. . Manual Paddle Shift Gear
. Engine Coolant Temperature
Indicator (If Equipped) Gauge
For vehicles with the Head-Up These displays on the HUD are
. Transmission Fluid Temperature
Display (HUD), you can see some for use when using the manual Gauge, (Automatic Transmission
of the driver information that paddle shift controls to shift the Vehicles Only)
appears on the instrument panel transmission. See “Manual . Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
cluster. Paddle Shift” in Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑28.
. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
. Shift Light
. G-Force Gauge
This light is used for
. Boost Gauge (If Equipped)
performance driving to . Audio Functions, Street
indicate that the vehicle's Mode Only
best performance level has . Navigation, Only with Navigation
been reached to shift the Radio, Turn-by-Turn Guidance
5-32 Instruments and Controls
There are three HUD modes that
can be viewed in the HUD display.
Press the MODE button to scroll
through these modes in the
following order:
English English
English
Metric Metric
Track Mode 1 supports the G-Force Track Mode 2 supports G-Force
gauge and minor gauges with a gauges, boost gauge w/ZR1, and
circular tachometer. minor gauges with a linear
tachometer.
Metric
When the desired HUD display has
Street Mode supports audio and been selected, release the MODE
navigation functions with your button.
choice of tachometer settings.
Instruments and Controls 5-33
Within each mode, the display, can (X.XX G) and corresponding you may miss something important,
be further customized by pressing G gauge bar will overwrite the such as a warning light. Under
the PAGE button. Pressing this current G value. important warning conditions, the
button in each mode will turn off and CHECK GAGES warning will
on the following: illuminate in the HUD. View your
. Street Mode — No tachometer, Driver Information Center (DIC) for
circular tachometer, and linear more information.
tachometer.
. Track Modes 1 and 2 — No
minor gauge, coolant English
temperature, transmission oil
temperature, engine oil
temperature, engine oil
pressure, and boost gauge.
While in Track Mode 1 or 2, the
maximum G value achieved
during the current ignition cycle Metric
can be displayed by pressing
and holding the PAGE button. Be sure to continue scanning the
The maximum G display will be displays, controls, and driving
environment just as you would in a The HUD controls are located to the
shown until the PAGE button is left of the steering wheel.
released. The maximum G value vehicle without HUD. If you never
display will be identical to the look at the instrument panel cluster,
normal G value display, except
the maximum G gauge digits
5-34 Instruments and Controls
To adjust the HUD so it can be seen 2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable The HUD information can be
properly, do the following: driving position. If your seat displayed in one of six languages
1. Start the engine and press the position changes, the HUD may including English, Spanish, French,
HUD dimmer control all the way need to be re-adjusted. German, Italian, or Japanese. The
up by pressing the (+) button. 3. Press the up or down arrows speedometer can be displayed in
to center the HUD image in either English or metric units.
The brightness of the HUD
image is determined by the light your view. To change the language and unit
conditions in the direction the The HUD image can only be selections, see “Entering the
vehicle is facing and where you adjusted up and down, not side Personal Options Menu” under
have the HUD dimmer control to side. Vehicle Personalization on
set. If you are facing a dark page 5‑55.
4. Press the dimmer control
object or a heavily shaded area, downward until the HUD image Clean the inside of the windshield
the HUD may anticipate that you is no brighter than necessary. as needed to remove any dirt or film
are entering a dark area and that reduces the sharpness or clarity
may begin to dim. To turn HUD off, press and hold the of the HUD image.
(–) button until the HUD display
It is possible for sunlight to turns off. To clean the HUD, spray household
enter the HUD making it difficult glass cleaner on a soft, clean cloth.
to see the image. The display If the sun comes out or it becomes Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
will return to normal when the cloudy, the HUD brightness may it. Do not spray cleaner directly on
sunlight is no longer entering need to be adjusted again using the lens because the cleaner could
the HUD. the dimmer control. Polarized leak into the unit.
sunglasses could make the HUD
image harder to see.
Instruments and Controls 5-35
If the ignition is on and the HUD Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and
image cannot be seen, check to
see if: Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages
indicate the status of the vehicle BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
. Something is covering the
or some action may be needed
HUD unit. This message displays when the
to correct a condition. Multiple
. The HUD dimmer control is messages may appear one after vehicle has detected that the battery
adjusted properly. another. voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable point. The battery saver
. The HUD image is adjusted The messages that do not system starts reducing certain
to the proper height. require immediate action can be features of the vehicle that you may
. Ambient light is low, in the acknowledged and cleared by be able to notice. At the point that
direction the vehicle is facing. pressing the RESET button. features are disabled, this message
. A fuse is blown. See Fuses and The messages that require is displayed. It means that the
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑51. immediate action cannot be cleared vehicle is trying to save the charge
until that action is performed. All in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
Keep in mind that the windshield is messages should be taken seriously accessories to allow the battery to
part of the HUD system. See and clearing the messages does not recharge.
Windshield Replacement on correct the problem.
page 10‑47. BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑15.
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑15.
5-36 Instruments and Controls
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM Brake System Messages CHECK BRAKE FLUID
If this message displays while you ABS (Antilock Brake System) This message displays, a sound
are driving, there may be a problem will be heard, and the brake system
with the electrical charging system.
ACTIVE warning light on the instrument
It could mean that there is a loose This message displays when the panel cluster turns on if the ignition
or broken drive belt or that there is Antilock Brake System (ABS) is is on to inform the driver that the
another electrical problem. Have the adjusting brake pressure to help brake fluid level is low. See Brake
vehicle checked right away by your avoid a braking skid. System Warning Light on
dealer. Driving while this message is Slippery road conditions may exist page 5‑21. Have the brake system
on could drain the battery. if this message is displayed, so serviced by your dealer as soon as
If you must drive a short distance adjust your driving accordingly. possible. See Brakes on
with the message on, be certain to The message stays on for a few page 10‑38.
turn off the vehicle's accessories, seconds after the system stops SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES
such as the radio and air adjusting brake pressure. See
conditioner. Antilock Brake System (ABS) on If this message displays while
page 9‑34 for more information. you are driving, stop as soon as
Multiple chimes sound when this possible and turn the ignition off.
message is displayed. CHANGE BRAKE PADS Then start the engine again to reset
To acknowledge the message, press On vehicles with electronic brake the system. If the message stays
the RESET button. The message pad wear sensors, this message will on, or comes back on again while
reappears every 10 minutes until be displayed when the pads are you are driving, the vehicle is in
this condition changes. worn. See your dealer for service. need of service. See your dealer.
If the antilock brake system (ABS)
warning light is on and the regular
brake system warning light is not
Instruments and Controls 5-37
on, you still have brakes, but do Convertible Top SET PARK BRAKE TO
not have ABS. If the regular brake MOVE TOP
system warning light is also on, you
Messages
do not have ABS and there is a If the vehicle has a manual
ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION transmission, this message displays
problem with the brakes. See
Antilock Brake System (ABS) If the vehicle has a power and a sound will be heard if you
Warning Light on page 5‑22 and convertible top, this message try to operate the power convertible
Brake System Warning Light on displays and a sound will be heard top without first setting the parking
page 5‑21. if the trunk partition is not in place. brake. Set the parking brake
Open the hatch/trunk and make before trying to operate the power
If this message is displayed, the sure the trunk partition is secure convertible top. See Convertible Top
Traction Control System (TCS) and no objects are on the trunk on page 2‑23 for more information.
and the Active Handling System partition. See Rear Storage on
will also be disabled. The DIC will page 4‑1 for more information. SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARK
scroll three messages: SERVICE BRAKE FOR TOP
ANTILOCK BRAKES, SERVICE CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOP If the vehicle has an automatic
TRACTION SYSTEM, and This message displays and a transmission, this message displays
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING, and sound will be heard if the trunk is and a sound will be heard if you try
the instrument panel cluster lights open while you are trying to operate to operate the power convertible top
will come on along with a sound. the convertible top. Make sure the without first shifting into P (Park) or
When the service message is trunk is closed before operating the setting the parking brake. Either
displayed, the computer controlled convertible top. See Convertible Top shift the vehicle into P (Park) or set
systems will not assist the driver. on page 2‑23. the parking brake before trying to
Have the system repaired by your operate the power convertible top.
dealer as soon as possible. Adjust See Convertible Top on page 2‑23
your driving accordingly. for more information.
To acknowledge these messages,
press the RESET button.
5-38 Instruments and Controls
TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP TOP NOT SECURE Cruise Control Messages
This message displays and a This message displays and a CRUISE DISENGAGED
sound will be heard when the sound will be heard when the
power convertible top button is power convertible top button is This message displays briefly when
pressed and the power convertible released before the top open or you disengage the cruise control
top pump motor temperature is close operation is complete or if the system by stepping on the brake on
below −20°C (−4°F). Wait for the top is closed without the header an automatic transmission vehicle or
power convertible top pump motor latch engaged. Press and hold the the clutch on a manual transmission
to warm up before using the power convertible top button to fully open vehicle, or by turning off the cruise
convertible top. or close the top, and make sure that control switch. See Cruise Control
the header latch is engaged after on page 9‑45 for more information.
TOP MOTOR OVER the top is closed.
TEMPERATURE CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH
UNLATCH HEADER TO (XXX km/h)
This message displays and a
sound will be heard when the
MOVE TOP See Cruise Control on page 9‑45.
power convertible top button is This message displays and a
pressed and the power convertible sound will be heard if you try to
top pump motor temperature is over lower the convertible top without
105°C (221°F). Wait for the power first unlocking the top. Move
convertible top pump motor to cool the latch handle to unlock the
down before using the power convertible top. See Convertible Top
convertible top. on page 2‑23.
Instruments and Controls 5-39
Door Ajar Messages TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible) COOLANT OVER
This message displays when TEMPERATURE
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
the convertible top is not closed This message displays and a sound
This message displays if the driver completely. Make sure that the will be heard if the engine coolant
door is not closed properly. Make top is closed completely. See exceeds 124°C (255°F). If you have
sure that the door is closed Convertible Top on page 2‑23 for been operating the vehicle under
completely. more information. normal driving conditions, pull off
HATCH AJAR (Coupe) the road, stop the vehicle, and turn
TRUNK AJAR (Convertible) off the engine as soon as possible.
This message displays when the This message displays when the
hatch is not closed completely. You can monitor the coolant
trunk is not closed completely. temperature with the gauges
Make sure that the hatch is closed Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Hatch on page 2‑10 button on the DIC or the engine
completely. See Hatch on page 2‑10 coolant temperature gauge on
for more information. for more information. the instrument panel cluster. See
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Engine Overheating on page 10‑34,
Engine Cooling System Driver Information Center (DIC) on
This message displays if the
passenger door is not closed
Messages page 5‑25, and Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 5‑15.
properly. Make sure that the door CHECK COOLANT LEVEL
is closed completely. To acknowledge the message, press
This message displays when the the RESET button. The message
engine coolant level is low. Have and sound will come back on until
the cooling system serviced by your this condition changes. If you do
dealer as soon as possible. See not press the RESET button, the
Engine Coolant on page 10‑29. message remains on until the
condition changes.
5-40 Instruments and Controls
ENGINE OVERHEATED – HOT ENGINE AIR See “Engine Oil Life” under Driver
STOP ENGINE CONDITIONING OFF Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25. Also, see Engine Oil on
This message displays and a This message displays when page 10‑15 and Engine Oil Life
sound will be heard when the the engine coolant becomes System on page 10‑22 for more
engine has overheated. Stop and hotter than the normal operating information.
turn the engine off immediately to temperature. To avoid added strain
avoid severe engine damage. See on a hot engine, the air conditioning CHECK OIL LEVEL
Engine Overheating on page 10‑34. compressor is automatically turned
On some vehicles, this message
off. When the coolant temperature
ENGINE PROTECTION displays and two chimes sound if
returns to normal, the A/C operation
REDUCE ENGINE RPM the oil level in the vehicle is low.
automatically resumes. You can
Once the vehicle senses a change
This message displays if the engine continue to drive the vehicle. If this
in the engine oil level, the light
oil temperature exceeds 160°C message continues to appear, have
remains off.
(320°F). Check the engine coolant the system repaired by your dealer
temperature and engine oil level. as soon as possible to avoid If this message appears after
If the engine is too hot, see Engine compressor damage. starting the engine, the engine oil
Overheating on page 10‑34. The level may be too low. You may need
vehicle may need service, so see Engine Oil Messages to add oil. See Engine Overheating
your dealer. on page 10‑34.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL To acknowledge the message, press
You can monitor the oil temperature
with the gauges button on the DIC. This message displays when the the RESET button. The message
See Driver Information Center (DIC) life of the engine oil has expired. reappears every 10 minutes until
on page 5‑25. See Scheduled Maintenance on this condition changes.
page 11‑2. After an oil change, the
Multiple chimes sound when engine oil life system must be reset.
this message is displayed. This
message remains displayed and
active until the issue is resolved.
Instruments and Controls 5-41
LOW OIL PRESSURE REDUCED ENGINE POWER To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. The message
This message displays if low oil If this message displays and the
reappears every five minutes until
pressure levels occur. If this check engine light comes on, a
this condition changes.
message appears while the engine noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
is running, stop the engine and do performance may occur. If the If the REDUCED ENGINE
not operate it until the cause of low REDUCED ENGINE POWER POWER message is displayed in
oil pressure is corrected. Severe message is displayed, but there combination with the COOLANT
damage to the engine can result. is no reduction in performance, OVER TEMPERATURE message,
A sound will be heard when this proceed to your destination. The see Engine Overheating on
message is displayed. See Engine performance may be reduced the page 10‑34.
Oil on page 10‑15. next time the vehicle is driven.
The vehicle may be driven at a Fuel System Messages
Engine Power Messages reduced speed while the REDUCED CHECK GAS CAP
ENGINE DRAG CONTROL ENGINE POWER message is
displayed, but acceleration and This message displays if the fuel
ACTIVE speed may be reduced. Anytime cap has not been fully tightened.
This message displays when the check engine light stays on, Check the fuel cap to make sure
engine drag control is active. the vehicle should be taken to that it is on properly. Once
When driving in a lower gear in your dealer as soon as possible tightened, it takes at least one
rainy, snowy, or icy conditions and for diagnosis and repair. See overnight park to reset or clear this
then letting up on the accelerator Malfunction Indicator Lamp on message. If both the CHECK GAS
or downshifting, the rear wheels page 5‑18 for more information. CAP message and the malfunction
may begin to slip and this message indicator lamp in the instrument
Multiple chimes sound when this panel cluster are on, you may need
displays. This message stays on for message is displayed.
a few seconds following the engine to see your dealer for service. See
drag control event. Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑18 for more information.
5-42 Instruments and Controls
LOW FUEL Key and Lock Messages NO FOBS DETECTED
This message displays when the FOB AUTOLEARN WAIT This message displays if the
fuel tank is less than 10 percent vehicle does not detect the
full and the display is turned off.
XX MINUTES presence of a Remote Keyless
A sound will be heard when this See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Entry (RKE) transmitter when you
message is displayed. Refill the fuel Your Vehicle” under Remote have attempted to start the vehicle
tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Keyless Entry (RKE) System or a vehicle door has just closed.
Gauge on page 5‑11. Operation on page 2‑3. The following conditions may cause
this message to appear.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM FOB BATTERY LOW
. Driver-added equipment plugged
This message displays if the See “Battery Replacement” under into the accessory power outlet
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) on the center console is causing
has detected a problem within System Operation on page 2‑3. interference. Examples of these
the fuel system. Have the vehicle devices are cell phones and cell
serviced by your dealer. This KNOWN FOB
phone chargers, two-way radios,
message also displays when the See “Matching Transmitter(s) to power inverters, or similar items.
cluster is not getting fuel information Your Vehicle” under Remote Try moving the RKE transmitter
from the PCM. Keyless Entry (RKE) System away from these devices when
Operation on page 2‑3. starting the vehicle. In addition,
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS PDA devices and remote garage
and gate openers may also
LEARNED
generate Electromagnetic
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Interference (EMI) that may
Your Vehicle” under Remote interfere with the RKE
Keyless Entry (RKE) System transmitter. Do not carry the
Operation on page 2‑3. RKE transmitter in the same
pocket or bag as these devices.
Instruments and Controls 5-43
. The vehicle is experiencing . The vehicle's battery voltage OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN
Electromagnetic is low. The battery voltage must
Interference (EMI). Some be above 10 volts for the RKE See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
locations, such as airports, transmitter to be detected Your Vehicle” under Remote
automatic toll booths, and some properly. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
gas stations have EMI fields Operation on page 2‑3.
which may interfere with the NO FOB - OFF OR RUN?
READY FOR FOB #X
RKE transmitter. This message displays when the
RKE transmitter is not detected See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
inside the vehicle while you are Your Vehicle” under Remote
trying to turn the ignition off. The Keyless Entry (RKE) System
vehicle may be near a strong radio Operation on page 2‑3.
antenna signal causing the RKE
system to be jammed. The vehicle
will remain in ACCESSORY until the
vehicle is turned off or is restarted,
or five minutes has expired. If you
turn the ignition off and you cannot
find the RKE transmitter, you will not
be able to restart the vehicle. The
RKE transmitter needs to be inside
the vehicle in order for the vehicle to
If moving the transmitter to
start. See Starting the Engine on
different locations within the
page 9‑21 for more information.
vehicle does not help, place the
transmitter in the glove box
transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing to the right and
then press the START button.
5-44 Instruments and Controls
Lamp Messages Ride Control System COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED Messages This message displays and a
sound will be heard when the
This message displays if it is dark ACTIVE HANDLING Competitive Driving mode is
enough outside and the headlamps This message displays when selected. The instrument panel
and the Twilight Sentinel® controls the Active Handling System is cluster light will be on when the
are off. This message informs the operating. The Active Handling Competitive Driving mode is
driver that turning on the exterior System is a computer controlled selected. If your vehicle is equipped
lamps is recommended. It has system that assists the driver in with a manual transmission, Launch
become dark enough outside to controlling the vehicle in difficult Control is available when this mode
require the headlamps and/or other driving conditions. You may feel or is selected. The Traction Control
exterior lamps. hear the system working and see System (TCS) will not be operating
the ACTIVE HANDLING message while in the Competitive Driving
TURN SIGNAL ON mode. Adjust your driving
displayed in the DIC. This message
This message displays and a stays on for a few seconds following accordingly. This system is available
sound will be heard if a turn signal the active handling event. This on all models except ZR1. See
is left on for 1.2 km (three-quarters is normal when the system is Competitive Driving Mode on
of a mile). Move the turn signal/ operating. See Active Handling page 9‑39, including the “Launch
multifunction lever to the off System on page 9‑37 and Braking Control” information.
position. on page 9‑3.
To acknowledge this message, ACTIVE HANDLING READY
press the RESET button.
This message displays when
the functional check of the Active
Handling System has been
completed. See Active Handling
System on page 9‑37 for more
information.
Instruments and Controls 5-45
MAXIMUM SPEED 129 km/h PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVE PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVE
(80 MPH) HANDLING ON HANDLING ON
This message displays when a This message displays and a sound This message displays and a sound
malfunction is present in the will be heard when this Performance will be heard when this Performance
Selective Ride Control system. The Traction Management mode is Traction Management mode is
vehicle speed will be limited to a selected. The instrument panel selected. The instrument panel
value determined by the vehicle cluster light will also be on when cluster light will also be on when
when the shock absorber system this mode is selected. Launch this mode is selected. Launch
has failed and the shocks are in Control is available when this Control is available when this
their full soft mode. Have the vehicle mode is selected. In this mode mode is selected. In this mode
serviced by your dealer as soon as the Traction Control and Active the Traction Control and Active
possible. Handling System are available Handling System are available
To acknowledge the message, press but intended for use on wet race but intended for use on dry race
the RESET button. The message track conditions. Adjust your track conditions. Adjust your
reappears every 10 minutes until driving accordingly. This system driving accordingly. This system
this condition changes. is available only on ZR1 models. is available only on ZR1 models.
See “Performance Traction See “Performance Traction
Management” and “Launch Control” Management” and “Launch Control”
under Competitive Driving Mode on under Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑39 for more information page 9‑39 for more information
about the use of this mode. about the use of this mode.
5-46 Instruments and Controls
PERF TRAC 3 – SPORT PERF TRAC 4 – SPORT PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVE
ACTIVE HANDLING ON ACTIVE HANDLING OFF HANDLING OFF
This message displays and a sound This message displays and a sound This message displays and a sound
will be heard when this Performance will be heard when this Performance will be heard when this Performance
Traction Management mode is Traction Management mode is Traction Management mode is
selected. The instrument panel selected. The instrument panel selected. The instrument panel
cluster light will also be on when cluster light will also be on when cluster light will also be on when
this mode is selected. Launch this mode is selected. Launch this mode is selected. Launch
Control is available when this Control is available when this mode Control is available when this mode
mode is selected. In this mode is selected. In this mode the is selected. In this mode the
the Traction Control and Active Traction Control is available but Traction Control is available but
Handling System are available intended for use on dry race track intended for use on dry race track
but intended for use on dry race conditions. The Active Handling conditions. The Active Handling
track conditions. Adjust your System is disabled when this mode System is disabled when this mode
driving accordingly. This system is selected. This mode will require is selected. This mode will require
is available only on ZR1 models. more driver skill than modes 1-3. more driver skill than modes 1-4.
See “Performance Traction Adjust your driving accordingly. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Management” and “Launch Control” This system is available only on This system is available only on
under Competitive Driving Mode on ZR1 models. See “Performance ZR1 models. See “Performance
page 9‑39 for more information Traction Management” and “Launch Traction Management” and “Launch
about the use of this mode. Control” under Competitive Driving Control” under Competitive Driving
Mode on page 9‑39 for more Mode on page 9‑39 for more
information about the use of information about the use of
this mode. this mode.
Instruments and Controls 5-47
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING SERVICE RIDE CONTROL SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
SYSTEM This message displays when the If this message displays when you
This message displays if there is a Selective Ride Control system are driving, there is a problem with
problem with the Active Handling has detected a malfunction and the Traction Control System (TCS)
System and the vehicle needs the system must be serviced. and the vehicle is in need of
service. The active handling system See your dealer. If a fault is service. See your dealer. When this
light on the instrument panel cluster present in the Selective Ride message is displayed, the system
also turns on and a sound will be Control system which causes will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
heard. See your dealer. When this the shocks to be in their full soft driving accordingly.
message is displayed, the system is condition, the messages SERVICE The traction control system (TCS)
not working. Adjust your driving RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS warning light on the instrument
accordingly. See Active Handling INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM panel cluster will also turn on and
System on page 9‑37 for more SPEED 129 km/h (80 MPH) will a sound will be heard.
information. display together. See Selective Ride
Control on page 9‑43 for more When this message is displayed,
information. the computer controlled systems will
not assist the driver in controlling
the vehicle. Have the system
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for
more information.
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button.
5-48 Instruments and Controls
SHOCKS INOPERATIVE TRACTION SYSTEM AND TRACTION SYSTEM AND
This message displays when a ACTIVE HANDLING – OFF ACTIVE HANDLING – ON
malfunction is present in the This message displays, the If the Traction Control System (TCS)
Selective Ride Control system instrument panel cluster light turns and Active Handling System are off,
which is causing the shocks to be on, and a sound will be heard when this message displays briefly, the
in their full soft mode. This is a the Traction Control System (TCS) instrument panel cluster light turns
warning to the driver that the vehicle and Active Handling System are off, and a sound will be heard when
handling may be affected. Have the turned off by pressing the Active the TCS and Active Handling
vehicle serviced by your dealer as Handling System button on the System are turned on by briefly
soon as possible. console for five seconds. The pressing the Active Handling
To acknowledge the message, press Antilock Brake System (ABS) System button on the console. See
the RESET button . The message remains on with the TCS and Active Traction Control System (TCS) on
reappears every 10 minutes until Handling System off. Adjust your page 9‑36 and Active Handling
this condition changes. driving accordingly. See Traction System on page 9‑37 for more
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑36 information.
TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE and Active Handling System on
This message displays when the page 9‑37 for more information.
Traction Control System (TCS) is To acknowledge this message,
limiting wheel spin. Slippery road press the RESET button.
conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. The message stays on
for a few seconds after the TCS
stops limiting wheel spin. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑36 for more information.
Instruments and Controls 5-49
TRACTION SYSTEM – OFF Safety Belt Messages BUCKLE SEATBELT
This message displays and stays BUCKLE PASSENGER This message reminds you to
on, a sound will be heard, and buckle the driver's safety belt.
the traction control system (TCS) This message reminds you to
buckle the passenger's safety belt. This message displays and a sound
warning light on the instrument will be heard when the ignition is on,
panel cluster turns on when the This message displays and a the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,
TCS is turned off by pressing the sound will be heard when the and the vehicle is in motion. You
Active Handling System button on ignition is on, the driver's safety should buckle your safety belt.
the console. See Traction Control belt is buckled, the passenger's
System (TCS) Warning Light on safety belt is unbuckled with the If the driver remains unbuckled
page 5‑23 and Traction Control passenger airbag enabled, and the when the ignition is on and the
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for vehicle is in motion. You should vehicle is in motion, the reminder
more information. have the passenger buckle their will be repeated. If the driver's
safety belt. safety belt is already buckled, this
To acknowledge the message, press message will not come on.
the RESET button. The reminder will be repeated if
the ignition is on, the vehicle is in This message is an additional
TRACTION SYSTEM – ON reminder to the safety belt reminder
motion, the driver is buckled, the
This message displays and a sound passenger is still unbuckled, and the light in the instrument panel cluster.
will be heard when the Traction passenger airbag is enabled. If the See Safety Belt Reminders on
Control System (TCS) is turned on passenger's safety belt is already page 5‑16 for more information.
by pressing the Active Handling buckled, this message will not
System button on the console. This come on.
message automatically clears from
the DIC display on its own. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑36 for more information.
5-50 Instruments and Controls
Anti-Theft Alarm System SERVICE ELECTRICAL Starting the Vehicle
Messages SYSTEM Messages
This message displays if an
INTRUSION SENSOR OFF electrical problem has occurred PRESS BRAKE TO START
This message may display when the within the Powertrain Control ENGINE (Automatic
anti-theft alarm has been disarmed. Module (PCM). Have the vehicle Transmission Only)
serviced by your dealer. This message displays if you try
INTRUSION SENSOR ON
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON to start the engine by pressing the
This message may display when the keyless ignition start button without
anti-theft alarm has been armed. This message displays and a sound having the brake pressed. The
will be heard when there may be an brake needs to be pressed when
Service Vehicle Messages electrical or another system problem starting the engine. See Ignition
with the vehicle. Have your vehicle Positions on page 9‑20 for more
SERVICE AIR CONDITIONING checked by your dealer if this information.
This message displays when the message keeps appearing.
electronic sensors that control
the air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer if you
notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
Instruments and Controls 5-51
Tire Messages To acknowledge the message,
WARNING (Continued)
press the RESET button.
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE A message reappears every
10 minutes until the condition is message is displayed. Drive
This message may be displayed cautiously and check your tire
when one or more of the tires is corrected.
pressures as soon as you can.
overinflated. This message also LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE
displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT This message displays when one or
REAR to indicate which tire is more of the tires is underinflated.
affected. You can receive more than { WARNING This message also displays LEFT
one tire pressure message at a FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
When the LOW TIRE REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
time. To read other messages that
PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT which tire is affected. Multiple
may have been sent at the same
time, press the RESET button . If a message is displayed on the chimes sound and the tire pressure
tire pressure message appears on Driver Information Center, your light on the instrument panel cluster
the DIC, stop as soon as you can. vehicle's handling capabilities turns on when this message is
Have the tire pressures checked will be reduced during severe displayed. See Tire Pressure Light
and set to those shown on the Tire maneuvers. The active handling on page 5‑24. You can receive more
and Loading Information label. See system will be affected. See than one tire pressure message at a
Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑59, Active Handling System on time. To read other messages that
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14, page 9‑37. If you drive too fast, may have been sent at the same
Tire Pressure on page 10‑66, and you could lose control of your time, press the RESET button. If a
Tire Pressure Monitor System on vehicle. You or others could be tire pressure message appears on
page 10‑68. The DIC also shows injured. Do not drive over 90 km/h the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
the tire pressure values. See Driver (55 mph) when the LOW TIRE
Information Center (DIC) on PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
page 5‑25.
(Continued)
5-52 Instruments and Controls
Have the tire pressures checked page 10‑69 for more information. This message displays when
and set to those shown on the Tire If the warning comes on and stays one or more of the tires is flat.
and Loading Information label. See on, there may be a problem with the This message also displays LEFT
Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑59, TPMS. See your dealer. FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14, REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
Tire Pressure on page 10‑66, and TIRE FLAT which tire is affected. Multiple
Tire Pressure Monitor System on chimes sound and the tire pressure
page 10‑68. The DIC also shows { WARNING light on the instrument panel cluster
the tire pressure values. See Driver comes on when this message is
Information Center (DIC) on When the LOW TIRE displayed. See Tire Pressure Light
page 5‑25. PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT on page 5‑24.
message is displayed on the
To acknowledge the message, This message is followed by
Driver Information Center, your
press the RESET button. the MAXIMUM SPEED 90 km/h
vehicle's handling capabilities
A message reappears every (55 MPH) message, and then by
10 minutes until the condition is will be reduced during severe the REDUCED HANDLING
corrected. maneuvers. If you drive too fast, message. The Active Handling
you could lose control of your System will intervene more quickly
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR vehicle. You or others could be when a flat tire has been detected.
This message displays if a part injured. Do not drive over 55 mph Adjust your driving accordingly.
on the Tire Pressure Monitor (90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE
System (TPMS) is not working PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
properly. The tire pressure light message is displayed. Drive
also flashes and then remains on cautiously and check your tire
during the same ignition cycle. See pressures as soon as you can.
Tire Pressure Light on page 5‑24.
Several conditions may cause this
message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
Instruments and Controls 5-53
You can receive more than one tire Transmission Messages TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
pressure message at a time. To ENGINE
read other messages that may have SERVICE TRANSMISSION
been sent at the same time, press This message displays and four
This message displays when there chimes sound if the transmission
the RESET button. If a tire pressure is a problem with the transmission.
message appears on the DIC, stop fluid temperature rises above
See your dealer for service. 132°C (270°F) or rises rapidly.
as soon as you can. Have the tire
pressures checked and set to those SHIFT TO PARK The transmission may shift gears or
shown on the Tire and Loading apply the torque converter clutch to
If the vehicle has an automatic reduce the fluid temperature. Driving
Information label. See Run-Flat
transmission, this message displays aggressively or driving on long hills
Tires on page 10‑59, Vehicle Load
if the vehicle is not in P (Park) when can cause the transmission fluid
Limits on page 9‑14, Tire Pressure
the engine is being turned off. The temperature to be higher than
on page 10‑66, and Tire Pressure
vehicle will be in ACCESSORY. normal. If this message appears,
Monitor System on page 10‑68. The
Once the shift lever is moved to you may continue to drive at a
DIC also shows the tire pressure
P (Park), the vehicle will turn off. slower speed. Monitor the
values. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25. The vehicle will remain in transmission fluid temperature
ACCESSORY, without the 20 minute and allow it to cool to at least
To acknowledge the message, 110°C (230°F). The transmission
time-out period, until the shift lever
press the RESET button. fluid temperature can be monitored
is moved to P (Park) or until the
A message reappears every with the gauges button on the DIC.
driver presses the pushbutton to
10 minutes until the condition is See “DIC Operation and Displays”
restart the vehicle. See Ignition
corrected. under Driver Information Center
Positions on page 9‑20 for more
information. (DIC) on page 5‑25 and Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 10‑23.
Also check the engine coolant
temperature. If it is also hot, see
Engine Overheating on page 10‑34.
5-54 Instruments and Controls
If this message is displayed during Vehicle Reminder set to the default states. See
normal vehicle operation on flat Vehicle Personalization on
roads, the vehicle may need
Messages page 5‑55 for more information.
service. See your dealer for an ACCESSORY MODE ON
inspection. SET PARK BRAKE FOR SEAT
This message displays when the RECALL
If driving in a performance or vehicle is in accessory mode.
competitive manner, the use of If the vehicle has a manual
(S) Sport Automatic Mode or ICE POSSIBLE transmission, this message displays
(S) Sport Manual Paddle Shift if you try to recall the memory
This message displays when positions when the ignition is on
gear selection is recommended. the outside air temperature is
See Automatic Transmission on and the parking brake is not set.
cold enough to create icy road If the vehicle is on, you must set
page 9‑28 for more information. conditions. Adjust your driving the parking brake in order for the
To acknowledge the message, press accordingly. memory positions to recall. See
the RESET button. The message “Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
reappears every 10 minutes until OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE
Wheel” under Power Seat
this condition changes. If you do This message displays for a few Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
not press the RESET button, the seconds if a RKE transmitter that is information.
message remains on the display not labeled 1 or 2 is used and you
until the condition changes. try to personalize the features on
the vehicle by pressing the OPTION
Washer Fluid Messages
UPSHIFT NOW button. The personalization system CHECK WASHER FLUID
See Manual Transmission on will not recognize the transmitter
page 9‑32. and the DIC will not display the See Washer Fluid on page 10‑37.
current driver number or the menus
used to set personalizations. The
personalization features will then be
Instruments and Controls 5-55
. The Head-Up Display (HUD) . A valid RKE transmitter is
Vehicle position and dimming level, detected upon opening the
Personalization if your vehicle has this feature. driver door.
Many features on your vehicle
. The instrument panel cluster If more than one valid RKE
can be personalized. This means dimming level and last selected transmitter is detected upon
that the operation of these features DIC display. opening the driver door, the driver
can be set to operate differently Separate personalization settings preferences for the lowest driver
depending on who is driving the are saved for two different drivers. number will be recalled.
vehicle. See “Personal Options” One of the Remote Keyless Entry If an RKE transmitter that is
later in this section for the features (RKE) transmitters is assigned to not labelled 1 or 2 is used, the
that you can personalize. driver 1. The other is assigned to personalization system will not
The personalization settings for driver 2. The backs of the RKE recognize the transmitter. The Driver
other features are automatically transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 to Information Center (DIC) will not
updated and saved as the driver correspond to each driver. display a current driver number
adjusts them. These include the The current driver's preferences are and the features that are normally
following settings and presets: recalled when one of the following programmed through the DIC will be
occurs: set to the default states. Also, if the
. The radio presets, tone, volume, OPTION button is pressed, the DIC
fade, balance, equalization (EQ) . The lock or unlock button on the does not display the menus used to
settings, and source (radio RKE transmitter, labelled 1 or 2, set personalizations, but instead
or CD). is pressed. displays OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE
. The last climate control setting. . The appropriate memory for a few seconds.
button, 1 or 2, located on the
driver door is pressed. See
“Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Steering Wheel” under Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3 for
more information.
5-56 Instruments and Controls
Entering the Personal 2. Press the OPTION button and Personal Options
Options Menu you will enter the PERSONAL The following options are available
To enter the personal options menu, OPTIONS menu. for programming:
use the following steps: The DIC will display the current Display Units: This option allows
1. If you have an automatic driver number (1 or 2) for a few you to choose the measurement
transmission vehicle, turn the seconds and then will display units.
vehicle on with the shift lever instructions on which buttons
to use for setting the Press the OPTION button until
in P (Park). DISPLAY UNITS appears on the
personalizations. The RESET
If you have a manual button is used to select a setting display, then press the RESET
transmission vehicle, turn the for a particular feature. The button to scroll through the following
vehicle on with the parking OPTION button is used to move modes:
brake set. to the next feature. . ENGLISH (default)
To avoid excessive drain on the 3. Press the OPTION button . METRIC
battery, it is recommended that while the instruction screen is
the headlamps are turned off. displayed to enter the first If you choose ENGLISH, all
personalization menu item. information will be displayed in
English units.
4. Once you have cycled through
all of the personal options, If you choose METRIC, all
pressing the OPTION button information will be displayed in
a final time exits the personal metric units.
options menu. In addition, if When the mode you want is
no button is pressed within selected, press the OPTION button
45 seconds, the DIC will exit to set your choice and advance to
the personal options menu. the next personal option.
Instruments and Controls 5-57
Auto Memory Recall (Automatic When the mode you want is Press the OPTION button until
Transmission only): If your selected, press the OPTION button AUTO EXIT RECALL appears on
automatic transmission vehicle has to set your choice and advance to the display, then press the RESET
the memory package, you may have the next personal option. button to scroll through the following
this option. This option allows the Auto Exit Recall: If your vehicle modes:
driver seat, the telescopic steering has the memory package, you may . YES
column, if your vehicle has this have this option. This option allows
feature, and the outside rearview . NO (default)
the driver seat and telescopic
mirrors to automatically move to the steering column, if your vehicle has If you choose YES, when you turn
current driver's set position when this feature, to automatically move the ignition off and open the driver
the engine starts. to the current driver's exit position door or press the unlock button on
Press the OPTION button until when one of the following occurs: the RKE transmitter, the seat and
AUTO MEMORY RECALL appears the telescopic steering wheel, if your
. The vehicle is turned off or in vehicle has this feature, will return
on the display, then press the Retained Accessory Power
RESET button to scroll through the to their stored exit positions for an
(RAP) or accessory mode and easy exit or an easy entrance when
following modes: the driver door is opened. returning to the vehicle.
. YES . The vehicle is turned off or in The seat and steering wheel will
. NO (default) RAP and the unlock button on only return to the stored driving
If you choose YES, the driver seat, the RKE transmitter is pressed. position if you press the appropriate
the outside rearview mirrors and the In order for the Auto Exit Recall memory button or activate the Auto
telescopic steering column, if your feature to work on an automatic Memory Recall feature.
vehicle has this feature, positions transmission vehicle, the vehicle If you choose NO, this option will
are recalled when you turn the must be in P (Park). On a manual turn off.
ignition on. transmission vehicle, the parking
If you choose NO, this option will brake must be set.
turn off.
5-58 Instruments and Controls
When the mode you want is If you choose ON, the parking When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button lamps, the high-beam headlamps, selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to and the back-up lamps will come to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option. on for 20 seconds during low light the next personal option.
Approach Lights: This option periods when all of the following Twilight Delay: This option
briefly turns on the parking lamps, occur: allows you to set the amount of time
the high-beam headlamps, and the . You press the unlock button on you want the parking lamps and
back-up lamps during low light the RKE transmitter. high-beam headlamps to remain on
periods when the RKE transmitter . Both of the doors are closed. after you exit the vehicle. This will
is used to unlock the vehicle. occur when the vehicle is off or in
. The vehicle is off or in RAP. RAP and the headlamps are on due
Press the OPTION button until
APPROACH LIGHTS appears on The lamps remain on for 20 seconds to the automatic headlamp system.
the display, then press the RESET or until a door is opened, the lock The parking lamps and high-beam
button to scroll through the following button on the RKE transmitter is headlamps will remain on until the
modes: pressed, or the vehicle is no longer driver selected time expires, the
off or in RAP. exterior lamp control is activated,
. OFF or the vehicle is no longer off or
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) in RAP.
. ON (default) System on page 2‑3 for more
If you choose OFF, this option will information.
turn off.
Instruments and Controls 5-59
Press the OPTION button until Flash at Unlock: This option Flash at Lock: This option
TWILIGHT DELAY appears on the activates the front and rear turn activates the front and rear turn
display, then press the RESET signals for two short flashes when signals for one long flash when the
button to scroll through the following the unlock or hatch/trunk button on lock button on the RKE transmitter
modes: the RKE transmitter is pressed. This is pressed. This will only occur
. OFF will only occur when the vehicle when the vehicle is off. If the lock
is off. button on the RKE transmitter is
. 15 S pressed again within five seconds,
Press the OPTION button until
. 30 S (default) FLASH AT UNLOCK appears on the horn will sound regardless of
the display, then press the RESET which setting you have selected.
. 90 S
button to scroll through the following Press the OPTION button until
If you choose OFF, this option will modes: FLASH AT LOCK appears on the
turn off. display, then press the RESET
. YES (default)
If you choose 15 S, the twilight button to scroll through the following
delay time will be set to 15 seconds.
. NO modes:
If you choose 30 S, the twilight If you choose YES, the front and . YES (default)
delay time will be set to 30 seconds. rear turn signals will flash twice
when you press the unlock button or
. NO
If you choose 90 S, the twilight the hatch/trunk button on the RKE If you choose YES, the front and
delay time will be set to 90 seconds. transmitter. rear turn signals will flash once
When the mode you want is If you choose NO, this option will when you press the lock button on
selected, press the OPTION button turn off. the RKE transmitter.
to set your choice and advance to If you choose NO, this option will
the next personal option. When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button turn off.
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
5-60 Instruments and Controls
When the mode you want is When the mode you want is an authorized RKE transmitter,
selected, press the OPTION button selected, press the OPTION button however, will not be able to open
to set your choice and advance to to set your choice and advance to the door, even with a transmitter in
the next personal option. the next personal option. the vehicle.
FOB Reminder: This option Passive Door Locking: This You may temporarily disable the
sounds the horn three times when option allows you to select whether passive door locking feature by
the driver door is closed and there is the doors automatically lock during pressing the door unlock switch for
a RKE transmitter inside the interior normal vehicle exit. When the three seconds on an open door.
of the vehicle. This will only occur ignition is turned off and all doors Passive door locking will then
when the vehicle is off. become closed, the vehicle will remain disabled until a door lock
Press the OPTION button until FOB determine how many RKE switch is pressed or until the power
REMINDER appears on the display, transmitters remain in the vehicle mode transitions from the off
then press the RESET button to interior. If at least one RKE power mode.
scroll through the following modes: transmitter has been removed from Press the OPTION button until
the interior of the vehicle, the doors PASSIVE DOOR LOCKING appears
. YES will lock after a short delay. on the display, then press the
. NO (default) For example, if there are two RKE RESET button to scroll through the
If you choose YES, the horn will transmitters in the vehicle and one following modes:
sound three times when a RKE is removed, the other will be locked . OFF (default)
transmitter is inside of the vehicle in. The RKE transmitter locked in
while the ignition is turned off the vehicle can still be used to start . SILENT
and the driver door is closed. the vehicle or unlock the doors, . HORN
if needed. A person approaching the
If you choose NO, this option will outside of the locked vehicle without If you choose OFF, this option will
turn off. turn off.
Instruments and Controls 5-61
If you choose SILENT, the doors will Passive Door Unlock: This option Auto Unlock: This option allows
automatically lock a short time after allows you to select which doors you to select whether the driver
you remove a RKE transmitter from will automatically unlock when you door, both doors, or neither door
the interior of the vehicle and close approach and open the driver door automatically unlocks when the shift
both doors. with the RKE transmitter. See Door lever is moved into P (Park) for
If you choose HORN, the doors will Locks on page 2‑8 for more automatic transmission vehicles or
automatically lock and the horn will information. when the ignition is turned off or is
sound a short time after you remove Press the OPTION button until in RAP for manual transmission
a RKE transmitter from the interior PASSIVE DOOR UNLOCK appears vehicles.
of the vehicle and close both doors. on the display, then press the Press the OPTION button until
If you are parking in a quiet area RESET button to scroll through the AUTO UNLOCK appears on the
and do not want the horn to sound following modes: display, then press the RESET
when the doors lock, press the lock . DRIVER button to scroll through the following
button on the RKE transmitter modes:
. BOTH (default)
immediately after removing it from . OFF
the interior and closing the doors. If you choose DRIVER, only the .
driver door will automatically unlock DRIVER
This will lock the doors and cancel
the passive locking for this ignition when you approach and open the . BOTH (default)
cycle. driver door with the RKE transmitter. If you choose OFF, this option will
When the mode you want is If you choose BOTH, both doors will turn off.
selected, press the OPTION button automatically unlock when you
to set your choice and advance to approach and open the driver door
the next personal option. with the RKE transmitter.
5-62 Instruments and Controls
If you choose DRIVER, on For example, English will be When the mode you want is
automatic transmission vehicles, the displayed as ENGLISH, Spanish as selected, press the OPTION button
driver door will automatically unlock ESPANOL, etc. If your vehicle has to set your choice and advance to
when the shift lever is moved into the navigation system, you will not the next personal option.
P (Park). On manual transmission have the Japanese language mode. Personalize Name: This option
vehicles, the driver door will Press the OPTION button until allows you to type in a name or
automatically unlock when the LANGUAGE appears on the display, greeting that will appear on the DIC
ignition is turned off or is in RAP. then press the RESET button to display whenever the corresponding
If you choose BOTH, on automatic scroll through the following modes: RKE transmitter (1 or 2) is used or
transmission vehicles, both doors . ENGLISH (default) one of the memory buttons (1 or 2)
will automatically unlock when the located on the driver door is
shift lever is moved into P (Park). . DEUTSCH (German) pressed.
On manual transmission vehicles, . FRANCAIS (French) Press the OPTION button until
both doors will automatically unlock PERSONALIZE NAME appears on
when the ignition is turned off or is
. ITALIANO (Italian)
the display, then press the RESET
in RAP. . ESPANOL (Spanish) button to scroll through the following
When the mode you want is If you choose a language that modes:
selected, press the OPTION button you do not understand, press the . YES
to set your choice and advance to OPTION and RESET buttons for
the next personal option. five seconds. The DIC will begin
. NO (default)
Language: This option allows you displaying all of the various If you choose YES, you can type in
to select the language the DIC, the languages one by one for as long a name that will appear on the DIC
Head-Up Display (HUD), if your as the buttons are pressed. When display.
vehicle has this feature, and the the desired language is displayed,
radio uses to display messages. release the buttons and the DIC will
Each language mode will be set to this language.
displayed in its own language.
Instruments and Controls 5-63
To program a name, use the There are alpha/numeric greeting is complete, keep
following procedure: characters and a blank space pressing the RESET button until
1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONS available. the display turns blank and
menu and select the driver 6. Press the RESET button to exits out of this option. You can
number (1 or 2) that you would select the letter of your choice program up to 20 characters.
like to program by following the and proceed on to the next If you choose NO, this option will
instructions listed previously space to the right. turn off.
under “Entering the Personal If you make a mistake and would If a customized name or greeting
Options Menu”. like to clear or replace a letter, is not programmed, the DIC display
2. Press the OPTION button until perform the following steps: will show Driver 1 or Driver 2
the PERSONALIZE NAME 6.1. Press the RESET button to to correspond with either the
option appears on the display. reach the letter you would number on the back of the RKE
3. Select YES under like to change. transmitter (1 or 2) being used or to
PERSONALIZE NAME by the memory button (1 or 2) that is
6.2. Press the OPTION button pressed.
pressing the RESET button. to scroll through the letter
4. Press the OPTION button and choices. PERSONALIZE NAME is the
a cursor will display where last option available to program in
6.3. Press the RESET button the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
you can insert a letter. to select the letter and Pressing the OPTION button after
5. Press the OPTION button proceed on to the next this setting will exit you from the
again until the letter you want space to the right. PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
is displayed. To scroll through 7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the The last item you were in prior to
the letters faster and without name or greeting you want is entering PERSONAL OPTIONS will
a beeping noise, keep the complete. After the name or then display on the DIC.
OPTIONS button depressed.
5-64 Instruments and Controls
Universal Remote Universal Remote System Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
System Programming transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have
See Radio Frequency Statement on
another person assist with
page 13‑19 for information
programming the transmitter.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Be sure to keep the original remote
rules and Industry Canada control transmitter for use in other
Standards RSS-210/220/310. vehicles, as well as for future
programming. Only the original
The FCC Grant of Equipment
remote control transmitter is needed
Authorization Certificate number is
for Fixed Code programming. The
KOBFTE05A.
programmed buttons should be
The Canadian Registration erased when the vehicle is sold
ID number is 3521A-FTE05A. or the lease ends. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons”
This system provides a way to in this section.
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate Park the vehicle outside of the
devices such as garage door garage when programming a garage
openers, security systems, and door. Be sure that people and
home automation devices. objects are clear of the garage door
or gate being programmed.
Do not use this system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.
Instruments and Controls 5-65
Programming Universal Home To program up to three devices:
Remote — Rolling Code 1. Press START or put the vehicle
For questions or help programming in accessory mode. See Ignition
the Universal Home Remote Positions on page 9‑20 for
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or additional information.
go to www.learcar2u.com. Programming can only occur
Most garage door openers sold when the vehicle is running or in
after 1996 are Rolling Code units. accessory mode.
Programming a garage door opener 3. Locate in the garage, the
involves time-sensitive actions, so garage door opener receiver
read the entire procedure before (motor-head unit). Locate the
starting. Otherwise, the device will “Learn” or “Smart” button. It
time out and the procedure will have can usually be found where
to be repeated. the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit
and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing
this button, complete the
following steps in less than
30 seconds.
2. From inside the vehicle,
press the two outside buttons
at the same time for one to
two seconds, and immediately
release them.
5-66 Instruments and Controls
4. Immediately return to the To program another Rolling Code Most garage door openers sold
vehicle. Press and hold the device such as an additional garage before 1996 are Fixed Code units.
Universal Home Remote button door opener, a security device, Programming a garage door opener
that will be used to control the or home automation device, repeat involves time-sensitive actions, so
garage door until the garage Steps 1 through 6, choosing a read the entire procedure before
door moves. The indicator light, different function button in Step 4 starting. Otherwise, the device will
above the selected button, than what was used for the garage time out and the procedure will have
should slowly blink. This button door opener. to be repeated.
may need to be held for up to If these instructions do not work, the
20 seconds. To program up to three devices:
garage door opener is probably a
5. Immediately, within one second, Fixed Code unit. Follow the 1. Press START or put the vehicle
release the button when the programming instructions that follow in accessory mode. See Ignition
garage door moves. The for a Fixed Code garage door Positions on page 9‑20 for
indicator light blinks rapidly until opener. additional information.
programming is complete. Programming can only occur
Programming Universal Home
6. Press and release the same when the vehicle is running or in
Remote — Fixed Code
button again. The garage door accessory mode.
should move, confirming that For questions or help programming
programming is successful and the Universal Home Remote
complete. System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
Instruments and Controls 5-67
The hand-held transmitter
can have between eight and
12 dip switches depending on
the brand of transmitter.
The garage door opener receiver
(motor head unit) could also
have a row of dip switches that Example of Eight Dip Switches
can be used when programming with Two Positions
the Universal Home Remote.
If the total number of switches
on the motor head and
hand-held transmitter is different,
2. To verify that the garage door or if the dip switch settings are
opener is a Fixed Code unit, different, use the dip switch
remove the battery cover on the settings on the motor head unit
hand-held transmitter supplied to program the Universal Home Example of Eight Dip Switches
by the manufacturer of the Remote. The motor head dip with Three Positions
garage door opener motor. switch settings can also be used The panel of switches might not
If there is a row of dip switches when the original hand-held appear exactly as they do in the
similar to the graphic above, transmitter is not available. examples above, but they
the garage door opener is a should be similar.
Fixed Code unit. If you do not
see a row of dip switches,
return to the previous section,
“Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.”
5-68 Instruments and Controls
The switch positions on the
. If a switch is set between
hand-held transmitter could be the up and down position,
labeled as follows: write “Middle.”
. A switch in the up position The switch settings written
could be labeled as “Up,” down in Step 3 now
“+,” or “On.” become the button strokes
to be entered into the
. A switch in the down Universal Home Remote in
position could be labeled as Step 5. Be sure to enter the
“Down,” “−,” or “Off.” switch settings written down
. A switch in the middle in Step 3, in order from left
position could be labeled as to right, into the Universal
“Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.” Home Remote, when A. Left Button (Up, +, or On)
completing Step 5.
3. Write down the eight to 12 switch B. Middle Button (Middle, 0,
settings from left to right as 4. From inside the vehicle, first or Neutral)
follows: firmly press all three buttons
C. Right Button (Down, -, or Off)
. at the same time for about
When a switch is in the up
three seconds. Release the 5. The indicator lights blink slowly.
position, write “Left.”
buttons to put the Universal Enter each switch setting
. When a switch is in the Home Remote into from Step 3 into the vehicle's
down position, write “Right.” programming mode. Universal Home Remote. You
have two and one-half minutes to
complete Step 5. Now press one
button on the Universal Home
Remote for each switch setting
as follows:
Instruments and Controls 5-69
. If you wrote “Left,” press
the left button (A) in the
7. Press and hold the button Universal Remote System
that will be used to control the
vehicle. garage door until the garage
Operation
. If you wrote “Right,” press door moves. The indicator light Press and hold the appropriate
the right button (C) in the above the selected button button for at least one-half second.
vehicle. should slowly blink. This button The indicator light comes on while
may need to be held for up to the signal is being transmitted.
. If you wrote “Middle,” press 55 seconds.
the middle button (B) in the Operation can occur:
vehicle. 8. Immediately release the button . If the vehicle is in
when the garage door moves.
6. After entering all of the switch accessory mode.
The indicator light blinks rapidly
positions, again, firmly press and until programming is complete. . If the vehicle is running.
release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights 9. Press and release the same . If the vehicle is in Retained
turn on. button again. The garage door Accessory Mode (RAP). See
should move, confirming that Retained Accessory Power
programming is successful and (RAP) on page 9‑23 for more
complete. information.
To program another Fixed Code . Up to an additional 10 minutes
device such as an additional garage after RAP finishes.
door opener, a security device, . Up to 10 minutes after any door
or home automation device, repeat is opened.
Steps 1 through 9, choosing a
different button in Step 7 than what
was used for the garage door
opener.
5-70 Instruments and Controls
Reprogramming Universal 2. Once the indicator lights begin to
Home Remote Buttons blink, release both buttons. The
codes from all buttons are
Any of the three buttons can be erased.
reprogrammed by repeating the
instructions. For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
Erasing Universal Home call the customer assistance phone
Remote Buttons number under Customer Assistance
The programmed buttons should be Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
erased when the vehicle is sold or page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
the lease ends. Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
To erase either Rolling Code or
Fixed Code on the Universal Home
Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons at the same time for
approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located
directly above the buttons, begin
to blink rapidly.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting To override AUTO mode, turn the
control to off.
Exterior Lamp Controls To reset to AUTO mode, turn the
Exterior Lighting control to exterior lamps and then
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 back to AUTO. Automatic mode also
Exterior Lamps Off resets when the vehicle is turned off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 and then back on again if the control
Headlamp High/Low-Beam is left in the AUTO position.
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 parking lamps together with the
Daytime Running following:
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 The exterior lamp control is located
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 to the left of the steering wheel on . Sidemarker Lamps
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 the multifunction lever. . Taillamps
Turn and Lane-Change Signals O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn
(Auto Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
. License Plate Lamps
the band with this symbol on it to
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 operate the exterior lamps.
. Instrument Panel Lights
Interior Lighting The exterior lamp band has four The parking brake indicator
Instrument Panel Illumination positions: light comes on and stays on when
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 the parking lamps are on with the
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 O (Off): Turns off all lamps. engine off and the ignition to
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 AUTO (Automatic): Sets the ACC/ACCESSORY.
exterior lamps to automatic mode. 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Lighting Features AUTO mode turns the exterior
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 headlamps, together with the
lamps on and off depending on how previously listed lamps and lights.
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7 much light is available outside the
Exterior Lighting Battery vehicle.
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-2 Lighting
Exterior Lamps Off Flash-to-Pass The DRL system makes the front
turn signal lamps come on when the
Reminder To use the flash-to-pass feature, following conditions are met:
A warning chime will sound if the briefly pull the turn signal lever
toward you. The high-beam
. It is still daylight and the ignition
exterior lamp control is left on in is on.
either the headlamp or parking lamp indicator flashes to indicate to the
position and the driver door is other driver that you intend to pass. . The exterior lamp control is in
opened with the ignition off. If the low-beam headlamps are off the AUTO position.
and the fog lamps are on, the fog
lamps flash.
. The transmission is not in
Headlamp High/ P (Park) or the parking brake
Low-Beam Changer is off.
Daytime Running
. The parking brake is off or the
To change the headlamps from low Lamps (DRL) vehicle speed is greater than
beam to high, push the turn signal
lever all the way forward. To change Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can 13 km/h (8 mph).
from high to low beam, pull the lever make it easier for others to see the When DRL are on, only the front
rearward. front of your vehicle during the day. turn signal lamps will be on. The
Fully functional daytime running parking lamps, taillamps, instrument
lamps are required on all vehicles panel lights, or other exterior lamps
first sold in Canada. will not be on when the DRL are
being used.
While the high beams are on, this
light on the instrument cluster will
also be lit.
Lighting 6-3
When it is dark enough outside, the If it is dark enough outside and Twilight Sentinel
front turn signal lamps turn off and the exterior lamp control is off, a
the normal low-beam headlamps HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED Twilight Sentinel® is an automatic
turn on. message will display on the Driver headlamp system. When activated,
Information Center (DIC). See Lamp this feature turns your headlamps
When it is bright enough outside, and parking lamps on and off by
the regular lamps go off, and the Messages on page 5‑44.
sensing how dark it is outside.
front turn signal lamps will take over. Turning the exterior lamp control
If the vehicle is started in a dark to off a second time, or turning on Be sure not to cover the light sensor
garage, the automatic headlamp the headlamps will remove the on the top of the instrument panel.
system comes on immediately. HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED AUTO: Activates the system.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage, message in the DIC. If the parking
it takes approximately one minute lamps or the fog lamps were turned If the band is already in the AUTO
for the automatic headlamp system on instead, the HEADLAMPS position when you start your vehicle,
to change to DRL if it is light SUGGESTED message will Twilight Sentinel is automatically
outside. During that delay, the continue to be displayed. enabled.
instrument panel cluster may not The regular headlamp system If it is dark outside, your vehicle
be as bright as usual. Make sure should be turned on when needed. headlamps and parking lamps will
the instrument panel brightness turn on automatically.
knob is in the full bright position. To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior
lamp control to the off position or Once it is bright enough outside, the
See Instrument Panel Illumination headlamps and parking lamps will
Control on page 6‑5 for more shift into P (Park). The DRL will stay
off until the control is toggled again automatically turn back off.
information.
or the vehicle is shifted out of Twilight Sentinel may also turn on
P (Park). when you drive through a dimly
This procedure applies only to lit area.
vehicles first sold in the United Once you leave the dimly lit area, it
States. may take about one minute before
the Twilight Sentinel turns off.
6-4 Lighting
During this brief delay, the See “Personal Options” under Turn and Lane-Change
instrument cluster may not be as Vehicle Personalization on
bright as usual. Make sure the page 5‑55.
Signals (Auto Signal)
instrument panel dimmer is set to The regular headlamp system
full brightness. See Instrument should be turned on when needed.
Panel Illumination Control on
page 6‑5.
Hazard Warning Flashers
To temporarily disable Twilight
The hazard warning flashers warn
Sentinel, turn the band to O. others that you have a problem. The
To turn Twilight Sentinel back on, button is located near the center of An arrow on the instrument panel
turn the band to O again, then the instrument panel. cluster flashes in the direction of the
release it. | : Press to make the front and turn or lane change.
If the Twilight Sentinel has the rear turn signal lamps flash on and Move the lever all the way up or
headlamps turned on and you turn off. Press again to turn the down to signal a turn.
the ignition off, the headlamps will flashers off.
Raise or lower the lever until the
stay on for a period of time while The hazard warning flashers work arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
you leave the vehicle. no matter what mode the ignition is change. Release the lever and the
Use the Driver Information Center to in, even if the ignition is turned off. turn signal automatically flashes
turn Twilight Sentinel on or off and When the hazard warning flashers three times. If more flashes are
to increase or decrease the length are on, the turn signals will desired, continue to hold the lever.
of the delayed illumination period. not work.
Lighting 6-5
The lever returns to its starting Fog Lamps Interior Lighting
position when it is released.
Use fog lamps for better vision in
If after signaling a turn or lane foggy or misty conditions. Instrument Panel
change the arrows flash rapidly or
do not come on, a signal bulb may The fog lamps control is located on Illumination Control
be burned out. the multifunction lever next to the
exterior lamp control.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse. # (Fog Lamps): Turning the band
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on to this position will turn the fog
page 10‑51. lamps on.
Turn Signal on Chime When you turn the fog lamps on,
the fog lamp light will appear on the
A chime sounds if the turn signal instrument panel cluster to indicate
has been on for more than 1.2 km that the fog lamps and the parking
(0.75 miles) of driving. lamps are on.
If you need to leave the turn If you turn the high-beam
signal on for more than 1.2 km headlamps on, the fog lamps will
(0.75 miles), turn off the signal and turn off. They will turn on again The knob for this feature is located
then turn it back on. when you switch to low-beam on the left side of the instrument
headlamps. panel.
The ignition must be on for the fog Push the knob in to turn on the
lamps to operate. interior lights.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
6-6 Lighting
Turn and hold the knob Courtesy Lamps Lighting Features
clockwise to brighten the lights
or counterclockwise to dim them. When any door or the hatch/trunk
During the day, this knob will adjust lid is opened, the interior lamps will Entry/Exit Lighting
the instrument panel brightness and go on unless it is bright outside. With entry lighting, the interior
at night will adjust all interior You can also turn the courtesy lamps will come on when entering
lighting. lamps on and off by pressing the the vehicle. To illuminate your exit,
Be sure not to have this knob instrument panel brightness knob. the interior lamps come on for about
turned all the way down with the 20 seconds when the engine is
lamps on during the day. The Driver Reading Lamps turned off .
Information Center (DIC) may not be The inside rearview mirror includes To turn the entry and exit lighting off,
visible. two reading lamps. The lamps will quickly turn the courtesy lamps on
go on when a door is opened. When and off by pressing the instrument
the doors are closed, press each panel brightness knob.
lamp switch to turn them on
individually.
Lighting 6-7
Battery Power Protection Exterior Lighting Battery
This vehicle has a feature to help Saver
prevent the battery from being If the manual parking lamps or
drained in case any of the following headlamps have been left on, the
lamps are left on: the underhood exterior lamps will turn off as soon
lamp, if your vehicle has this as the ignition is turned off or
feature, vanity mirror lamps, cargo Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
lamps, reading lamps, console, active. This protects against
or glove box lamps. If any of these draining the battery in case you
lamps are left on, they will have accidentally left the headlamps
automatically time-out after about or parking lamps on. The battery
10 minutes. To reset it, all of the saver does not work if the
above lamps must be turned off or headlamps are turned on after the
the ignition key on. ignition switch is turned to off.
If you need to leave the lamps on,
use the exterior lamp control to turn
the lamps back on.
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Introduction To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
System Infotainment
while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
Determine which radio the vehicle operation and controls of the
Introduction has and read the following pages to audio system.
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 become familiar with its features.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 { WARNING stations.
Radio Taking your eyes off the road For more information, see Defensive
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 for extended periods could Driving on page 9‑2.
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 cause a crash resulting in injury
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Notice: Contact your dealer
or death to you or others. Do before adding any equipment.
Diversity Antenna System . . . . 7-11
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-11 not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving. Adding audio or communication
Audio Players equipment could interfere with
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 the operation of the engine, radio,
This system provides access to or other systems, and could
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
many audio and non‐audio listings. damage them. Follow federal
Phone rules covering mobile radio and
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
7-2 Infotainment System
See Retained Accessory Power Operation
(RAP) on page 9‑23 for more
information.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System Manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate and
LOCKED displays if the radio is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
When the when the ignition is in
the off position, a blinking red light Single CD Radio Shown, Six-Disc CD Radio Similar
on the upper left side of the radio
indicates that TheftLock® is armed. The vehicle has one of these radios deterrent feature is set. For more
as its audio system. information, see Theft-Deterrent
An indicator light on the upper left Feature on page 7‑2.
side of the radio flashes when the
ignition is off, to indicate the theft
Infotainment System 7-3
Playing the Radio For XM™: . Press and hold the O / e knob
until the level changes to the
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press Press 4 to retrieve four different middle position.
to turn the system on and off. Turn categories of information related
to increase or decrease the volume. to the current song or channel: Adjusting the Speakers
MUTE: Press to silence the Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, (Balance/Fade)
system. Press again to turn the or Channel Number/Channel Name.
O / e (Balance/Fade): To adjust
sound on. Audio Settings the Balance:
This button is not available on the
Press and hold O / e when no Press and release O / e until
Six-Disc CD Radio.
tone or speaker control is displayed BALANCE displays.
4 (Information): Press until the to adjust all tone and speaker
desired display is shown, then hold . Turn the O / e knob to move
controls to the middle position.
for two seconds until the radio AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED the sound toward the right or the
beeps once to change the default displays. left speakers.
display. The selected display is now
the default. Adjusting the Tone
. Press and hold the O / e knob
(Bass/Treble) until the level changes to the
For RDS: middle position.
Press 4 to change the display. The
O / e (Bass/Treble): To adjust
the bass or treble:
display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY, and Press and release O / e until
the name of the program (if BASS or TREBLE displays.
available).
. Turn the O / e knob to
increase or to decrease the
level.
7-4 Infotainment System
To adjust the Fade: For vehicles with the Bose sound or AUTO VOLUME MAX
system: (maximum). Each higher
Press and release O / e until setting provides more volume
FADE displays
. Press AUTO EQ to select
equalization settings from EQ1 compensation at faster vehicle
. Turn the O / e knob to move through EQ6. speeds.
the sound toward the front or the . Selecting CUSTOM or changing 3. Press AUTO n until AUTO
rear speakers. bass or treble, returns the EQ to VOLUME OFF displays to turn
. Press and hold the O / e knob the manual bass and treble automatic volume off.
until the level changes to the settings. For vehicles with the Bose sound
middle position. AUTO n (Automatic Volume): system:
AUTO EQ (Automatic Automatic volume automatically Vehicles with the Bose sound
Equalization): The radio saves adjusts the audio system to make system include Bose AudioPilot®
separate AUTO EQ settings for up for road and wind noise, by noise compensation technology.
each preset and source. increasing the volume as vehicle AudioPilot continuously adjusts
speed increases. the audio system equalization to
For vehicles without the Bose sound
For vehicles without the Bose sound compensate for background noise.
system:
system: This feature is most effective at
. Press AUTO EQ to select lower radio volume settings where
equalization settings designed 1. Set the volume at the desired background noise can affect how
for CLASSICAL, POP, ROCK, level. well the audio is heard. At higher
JAZZ, TALK, and COUNTRY. volume settings, there may be little
2. Press AUTO n to select
. Selecting CUSTOM or changing or no adjustments by AudioPilot. For
AUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum), additional information on AudioPilot,
bass or treble, returns the EQ to AUTO VOLUME MED (medium),
the manual bass and treble visit bose.com/audiopilot.
settings.
Infotainment System 7-5
To use AudioPilot: Radio With RDS, the radio can:
1. Set the volume at the desired . Seek to stations broadcasting
level. AM-FM Radio the selected type of
programming.
2. Press AUTO n until AUTO Radio Data System (RDS) . Receive announcements
VOLUME ON displays.
RDS features are available for use concerning local and national
3. Press AUTO n until AUTO only on FM stations that broadcast emergencies.
VOLUME OFF displays to turn RDS information. The station name . Display messages from radio
off AudioPilot. or call letters display while the radio
stations.
is tuned to an RDS station.
Radio Messages . Seek to stations with traffic
This system relies upon receiving
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): announcements.
specific information from these
Displays if the radio is no longer stations and works only when the . Provide the time of day.
configured properly for the vehicle. information is available. In rare
The vehicle must be returned to
. Provide a program type (PTY)
cases, a radio station can broadcast for current programming.
your dealer for service. incorrect information that causes the
LOC (Locked): Displays when the radio features to work improperly.
. Provide the name of the program
TheftLock system has locked up. If this happens, contact the radio being broadcast.
The vehicle must be returned to station.
your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
cannot be corrected, contact your
dealer.
7-6 Infotainment System
RDS Messages 4 (Information): If the current TRAF (Traffic): TA (traffic) displays
station has a message, INFO when the station broadcasts traffic
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or
announcements.
national emergencies. When an displays. Press 4 to see the
alert announcement comes on the message. The message can display Press TRAF and the radio seeks
current radio station, ALERT! the artist, song title, call in phone to a station that broadcasts traffic
displays. The announcement is numbers, etc. announcements. When a station is
heard, even if the volume is low found, the radio stops seeking and
If the entire message is not
or a CD is playing. If a CD is TA displays. NO TRAFFIC INFO
displayed, parts of the message
playing, play stops during the displays if a station that broadcasts
appears every three seconds. To
announcement. Alert traffic announcements cannot be
scroll through the message, press
announcements cannot be found.
turned off. and release 4. A new group of
words displays after every press Press TRAF to turn off the traffic
ALERT! is not affected by tests of of the button. Once the complete announcements if TA is on the
the emergency broadcast system. message has displayed, INFO display.
This feature is not supported by all disappears from the display until The radio plays the traffic
RDS stations. another new message is received. announcement even if the volume
The last message can be displayed is low. The radio interrupts the play
by pressing this button. The last of a CD if the last tuned station
message is displayed until a new broadcasts traffic announcements.
message is received or the radio is
This function does not apply to XM
tuned to a different station.
Satellite Radio Service.
NO INFO displays when a message
is not available from a station.
Infotainment System 7-7
Finding a Station To scan preset stations: Storing Radio Stations
BAND: Press to switch between Press and hold © or ¨ for Drivers are encouraged to store
FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2. four seconds until PRESET SCAN radio station while the vehicle is
O /e (Tune): Turn to select radio displays. The radio goes to the parked. See Defensive Driving on
stations. next preset station, plays for a few page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
seconds, then goes to the next stations using the presets, favorites
© SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the preset station. Press © or ¨ again button, and steering wheel controls,
previous or to the next station and if the vehicle has this feature.
stay there. or press one of the pushbuttons to
stop scanning presets. Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,
The radio only stops at stations with and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2),
a strong signal. The radio only scans stations with
and equalization settings for each
a strong signal.
© SCAN ¨ : Press and hold © or ¨ station can be programmed on the
for two seconds until FREQUENCY 1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): six numbered pushbuttons.
SCAN displays. The radio goes to Press to play stations that are
To set presets:
a station, plays for a few seconds, programmed to the radio preset
then goes on to the next station. pushbuttons. 1. Tune to a radio station.
Press © or ¨ again to stop scanning. 2. Press AUTO EQ to select the
equalization.
3. Press and hold one of the six
numbered pushbuttons until the
radio beeps once.
4. Repeat the steps for each
pushbutton.
7-8 Infotainment System
Satellite Radio t SEEK u : Press to go to the Finding a Category (CAT)
previous or to the next XM channel. Station
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
t SCAN u : Press and hold t or To select an XM station by category:
XM is a satellite radio service based u for two seconds until
in the 48 contiguous United States 1. Press the CAT button. The last
FREQUENCY SCAN displays. The selected category displays.
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM radio goes to a channel, plays for
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of a few seconds, then goes on to the 2. Turn the O / e knob to select
programming and commercial-free
next station. Press t or u again a category.
music, coast to coast, and in
to stop scanning.
digital-quality sound. A service fee 3. Press t or u to go to a
is required to receive the XM To scan preset stations: category's station. SEEKING
service. If XM Service needs to be CATEGORY displays.
reactivated, the radio will display Press and hold t or u for
four seconds until PRESET SCAN 4. To go to another station within
"No Subscription Please Renew" on
displays. The radio goes to the that category, press the CAT
channel XM1. For more information,
next preset station, plays for a few button to display the category,
contact XM at www.xmradio.com or
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., and seconds, then goes to the next then press t or u to go to
www.xmradio.ca or preset station. Press t or u again another station.
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. or press one of the pushbuttons to If the radio cannot find the desired
stop scanning presets. category, NONE displays and the
Finding an XM Channel
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): radio returns to the last station
BAND: Press to switch between Press to play channels that are tuned.
FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2. programmed to the radio preset
O /e (Tune): Turn to manually pushbuttons.
select an XM channel.
Infotainment System 7-9
SCAN: To scan the stations within Storing XM Channels XM Radio Messages
a category:
Drivers are encouraged to store XL (Explicit Language
1. Press CAT. The last selected XM channels while the vehicle is Channels): These channels, or any
category displays. parked. See Defensive Driving on others, can be blocked by calling
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
2. Turn the O / e knob to select stations using the presets, favorites 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
a category. button, and steering wheel controls, Updating: The encryption code in
3. Press and hold t or u until a if the vehicle has this feature. the receiver is being updated, and
beep sounds and SCAN Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, no action is required. This process
CATEGORY displays. The radio and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2), should take no longer than
begins scanning the stations in and equalization settings for each 30 seconds.
the category. station can be programmed on the No Signal: The system is
six numbered pushbuttons.
4. Press t or u to stop scanning. functioning correctly, but the vehicle
To set presets: is in a location that is blocking the
1. Tune to a channel. XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal
2. Press AUTO EQ to select the should return.
equalization.
Loading XM: The audio system is
3. Press and hold one of the six acquiring and processing audio and
numbered pushbuttons until text data. No action is needed. This
the radio beeps once. message should disappear shortly.
4. Repeat the steps for each CH Off Air: This channel is not
pushbutton. currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
7-10 Infotainment System
CH Unauth: This channel is XM Locked: The XM receiver in Radio Reception
blocked or cannot be received with the vehicle may have previously
your XM Subscription package. been in another vehicle. For security Frequency interference and static
purposes, XM receivers cannot be can occur during normal radio
CH Unavail: This previously reception if items such as cell phone
assigned channel is no longer swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having chargers, vehicle convenience
assigned. Tune to another station. accessories, and external electronic
If this station was one of the the vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer. devices are plugged into the
presets, choose another station accessory power outlet. If there is
for that preset button. Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this interference or static, unplug the
No Info: No artist, song title, message will alternate with the XM item from the accessory power
category, or text information is Radio eight‐digit radio ID label. This outlet.
available at this time on this label is needed to activate the
channel. The system is working service. AM
properly. Unknown: If this message is The range for most AM stations
received when tuned to channel 0, is greater than for FM, especially
No Subscription Please Renew:
there may be a receiver fault. at night. The longer range can
XM subscription needs to be
reactivated. Contact XM at Consult with your dealer. cause station frequencies to
interfere with each other. For better
www.xmradio.com or call Chk XMRcvr: If this message does
radio reception, most AM radio
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. not clear within a short period of
and www.xmradio.ca or call time, the receiver may have a fault. stations boost the power levels
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. Consult with your dealer. during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static
Not Found: There are no channels can also occur when things like
available for the selected category. storms and power lines interfere
The system is working properly. with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on
the radio.
Infotainment System 7-11
FM Stereo This interference may occur when Audio Players
making or receiving phone calls,
FM signals only reach about
charging the phone's battery,
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although
or simply having the phone on. This CD Player
the radio has a built-in electronic
interference causes an increased Care of the CD Player
circuit that automatically works to
level of static while listening to the
reduce interference, some static Do not add labels to a CD; it could
radio. If static is received while
can occur, especially around tall get caught in the CD player. Use a
listening to the radio, unplug the
buildings or hills, causing the sound marking pen to write on the top of
cellular phone and turn it off.
to fade in and out. the CD if a description is needed.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service Diversity Antenna System Do not use CD lens cleaners, they
XM Satellite Radio Service gives The AM-FM antenna is a hidden could damage the CD player.
digital radio reception from coast to self‐tuning system. It optimizes the Notice: If a label is added to a
coast in the 48 contiguous United AM and FM signals relative to the CD, more than one CD is inserted
States, and in Canada. Just as vehicle's position and radio station into the slot at a time, or an
with FM, tall buildings or hills can source. No maintenance or attempt is made to play scratched
interfere with satellite radio signals, adjustments are needed. or damaged CDs, the CD player
causing the sound to fade in and could be damaged. While using
out. In addition, traveling or standing Satellite Radio Antenna the CD player, use only CDs in
under heavy foliage, bridges, good condition without any label,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss For vehicles with XM Satellite Radio load one CD at a time, and keep
of the XM signal for a period of time. Service, the antenna is located on the CD player and the loading slot
the roof or on the trunk lid of the free of foreign materials, liquids,
Cellular Phone Usage vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of and debris.
Cellular phone usage may cause obstructions for clear radio
reception. If an error displays, see “CD
interference with the vehicle's radio. Messages” later in this section.
7-12 Infotainment System
Care of CDs Using the CD Player Six-Disc CD Radio:
Store CDs in their original cases or The CD player can play smaller If more than one CD has been
other protective cases and away 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an loaded, a number for each CD
from direct sunlight and dust. The adapter ring. displays.
CD player scans the bottom of A CD in the player stays in the M (Load): Press to load CDs into
the disc. If the bottom of a CD is player when the ignition is turned the CD player.
damaged it may not play properly or off. When the ignition or radio is
at all. Do not touch the bottom of a To insert one CD:
turned on, the CD starts to play
CD while handling it. Pick up CDs where it stopped, if it was the last 1. Press M.
by grasping the outer edges or the selected audio source.
edge of the hole and the outer edge. 2. Load a CD and insert the CD
Loading a CD partway into the slot, label side
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take
up when INSERT CD # displays.
a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen a Single CD Radio:
The player pulls the CD in.
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral Insert the CD partway into the slot,
detergent solution mixed with water, To insert multiple CDs:
label side up, until the player pulls
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the CD in. The CD begins playing 1. Press and hold M for
automatically. two seconds. Two beeps sound
the edge.
The CD symbol displays when a CD and LOAD ALL DISCS displays.
is inserted, and the track number 2. Load a CD and insert the CD
displays when each new track starts partway into the slot, label side
to play. up when INSERT CD # displays.
The player pulls the CD in.
3. Wait for INSERT CD # to display
after the previous CD is loaded,
then load the next CD. The CD
player takes up to six CDs.
Infotainment System 7-13
To load more than one CD but © SCAN ¨ : To scan one CD, CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
less than six, complete Steps 1 press and hold either arrow for a CD when listening to the radio.
through 3. When finished loading more than two seconds until SCAN CD displays when a CD is in the
CDs, press M to cancel the loading displays and a beep sounds. The player. If your system has a remote
function. The radio begins to play radio goes to the next track, plays playback device, pressing this
the last CD loaded. for 10 seconds, then goes to the button a second time allows the
next track. Press either arrow again remote device to play.
Playing a CD to stop scanning. Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD
O /e (Tune): Turn to go to the To scan all loaded CDs, press and from the Single CD Radio and the
next or previous track. hold either arrow for more than Six‐Disc CD Radio.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold to four seconds until SCAN displays Single CD Radio: Press Z to
reverse within the current track. and a beep sounds. Use this feature
eject a CD.
to listen to 10 seconds of the first
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold track of each loaded CD. Press Six-Disc CD Radio:
to fast forward through the current either arrow again to stop scanning.
track. Press Z to eject the CD that is
AUTO EQ (Automatic currently playing.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the left arrow Equalization): Press to select the
to go to the start of the current track equalization setting while playing To eject multiple CDs:
if more than eight seconds have a CD. The equalization is stored
played. Press the right arrow to go 1. Press and hold Z for
when a CD is played. For more two seconds. A beep sounds
to the start of the next track. If either information on AUTO EQ, see
arrow is held or pressed more than and EJECT ALL displays.
“AUTO EQ” listed previously in this
once, the player continues moving section. 2. The ejected CD can be removed
backward or forward through when REMOVE DISC displays.
the CD. BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive To stop ejecting the CDs, press
CD(s) remains inside the radio for M or Z.
future listening.
7-14 Infotainment System
The CD is automatically pulled Six-Disc CD Radio:
. Press and release RDM until
back into the player if the CD is not RANDOM ALL DISCS displays
. Press RPT until REPEAT to play the tracks on all of the
removed after 25 seconds. Pushing displays to repeat a track.
a CD back into the player before the CDs that are loaded in random
25‐second time period is complete . Press RPT until REPEAT ONE order.
causes the player to sense an error, DISC displays to repeat an . Press and release RDM until
the CD player tries to eject the CD entire CD. RANDOM OFF displays to turn
several times before stopping. . Press RPT until REPEAT OFF off random play.
Wait for the timer to expire before displays to turn off repeat. R (Song List): The Song List
pressing Z again. Pressing Z RDM (Random): Press to hear the feature can save 20 track selections.
repeatedly after trying to push a CD tracks in random, rather than To save tracks:
in manually causes the CD player's sequential order, on one CD or all
25-second eject timer to reset. of the loaded CDs. 1. If S-LIST is displayed,
Single CD Radio: press R to turn it off.
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a
track or an entire CD over again. Press and release RDM until 2. Select the desired CD by
Single CD Radio: RANDOM DISC PLAY displays. pressing the numbered
Press and release RDM until pushbutton and then use ¨ or
Press RPT to hear a track over
again; REPEAT displays. Press RANDOM OFF displays to turn off O / e knob to select the track
random play. to be saved.
again to turn off repeat; REPEAT
OFF displays. Six-Disc CD Radio: 3. Press and hold R until a beep
. Press and release RDM until sounds and ADDED SONG
RANDOM DISC PLAY displays displays.
to play the tracks on one CD in 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to save
random order. Once all tracks on other selections.
this disc have played, RANDOM
DISC PLAY will repeat.
Infotainment System 7-15
SONGLIST FULL displays if more To delete the entire song list: Supported File Structure
than 20 selections are stored. Radios with the MP3 feature support
1. Press R to turn song list on.
To play tracks: S-LIST displays. up to:
1. Press R. One beep sounds and
. 50 folders
2. Press and hold R for more than
S-LIST displays. The recorded four seconds. One beep sounds . 11 folders in depth
tracks begin to play in the order and SONGLIST EMPTY displays
they were saved.
. 50 playlists
to confirm that the song list has .
been deleted. 255 files
2. Press © or ¨ to go back or
forward within the saved tracks. If a CD is ejected, and the song list
. 10 sessions
To delete tracks: contains saved tracks from that CD, Root Directory:
those tracks are automatically
The root directory is treated as a
1. Press R to turn song list on. deleted from the song list. Any
folder. Files are stored in the root
S-LIST displays. tracks saved to the song list again
directory when the disc or storage
are added to the bottom of the list.
2. Press © or ¨, and use device does not contain folders.
To end song list mode, Files accessed from the root
the O / e knob to select the
press R. One beep sounds and directory display as F1 ROOT.
desired track to be deleted.
S-LIST is removed from the display. Empty Folder:
3. Press and hold R until SONG
MP3 Format Folders that do not contain files are
REMOVED displays.
Radios with the MP3 feature can skipped, and the player advances to
After a track has been deleted, the the next folder that contains files.
only play CD-R discs. Do not mix
remaining tracks are moved up the
standard audio and MP3 files on the
list. When another track is added to
same disc.
the song list, the track is added to
the end of the list.
7-16 Infotainment System
Supported Bit Rates Playing an MP3 { (Previous Folder): Press to
The following bit rates are Insert a CD partway into the slot, go to the first track in the previous
supported: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, label side up. The player pulls it in, folder. Press and hold to reverse
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, and READING displays. The CD through the current track.
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, should begin playing and the CD | (Next Folder): Press to go to
192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and symbol displays. the first track in the next folder.
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Press and hold to fast forward the
If the ignition or radio is turned off
File Naming with a CD-R in the player, it stays current track.
in the player. When the ignition or RDM (Random): Press to hear
ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags are
radio is turned on, the CD-R starts the tracks in random, rather than
supported. The track name
to play where it stopped, if it was sequential order, on one CD, one
contained in the ID3 tag is shown
the last selected audio source. folder, or all of the loaded CDs.
on the display. The display only
shows up to 32 characters for track As each new track starts to play, Press and release RDM until:
and file names. the track number displays. . RANDOM DISC PLAY displays
If the track name is not contained in Order of Play to play the tracks on the CD in
the ID3 tag, the display shows the random order.
Tracks are played sequentially in
file name without the file extension.
the following order: . RANDOM FOLDER displays to
Playlists 1. Playlists. play the tracks in the folder in
random order.
Playlists that do not have a .m3u 2. Files contained in the root
or .wpl extension may not work. directory.
. RANDOM ALL DISCS displays
to play the tracks on all of the
Preprogrammed playlists created by 3. Files contained in folders. CDs that are loaded in random
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
O /e (Tune): Turn to go to the order.
Jukebox™ software are supported
and cannot be edited using the next or previous track. . RANDOM OFF displays to turn
radio. off random play.
Infotainment System 7-17
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a BAND: Press to listen to the radio Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
track, CD, or folder over again. when a CD is playing. The inactive the radio’s front auxiliary input jack
Press and release RPT until: CD remains inside the radio for to use a portable audio player. The
future listening. radio displays AUX INPUT DEVICE
. REPEAT displays to repeat a when a device is connected and
track. CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
a CD when listening to the radio. begins playing audio from that
. REPEAT ONE DISC displays to The CD symbol displays when a CD device.
repeat a CD. is loaded. Top Knob (Power/Volume): Turn
. REPEAT FOLDER displays to to increase or decrease the volume
repeat a folder. Auxiliary Devices of the portable player. Additional
volume adjustments can be made
. REPEAT OFF displays to turn off Using the Auxiliary Input Jack from the portable device.
repeated play.
The radio system has an auxiliary BAND: Press to listen to the radio
© SEEK ¨ : Press © to go to the input jack located on the right side while a portable audio device is
start of the current track, if more of the faceplate. This is not an audio playing. The portable audio device
than eight seconds have played. output; do not plug the headphone continues playing.
Press ¨ to go to the next track. set into the front auxiliary input jack.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
Press © or ¨ more than once to An external audio device can be
play a CD while a portable audio
continue moving backward or connected to the auxiliary input jack
device is playing. Press again and
forward through the CD. for use as another source for audio
the system begins playing audio
listening.
4 (Information): Press to display from the connected portable audio
the artist name and album contained Drivers are encouraged to set up player. If a portable audio player is
in the ID3 tag. any auxiliary device while the connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE
vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive displays. If a portable audio player
Driving on page 9‑2. is not connected, AUX INPUT
DEVICE does not display.
7-18 Infotainment System
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
Phone The system may not work with can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell
all cell phones. See “Pairing a phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to
Bluetooth Phone” in this section for more make and receive phone calls. The
For vehicles equipped with information. system can be used while the key is
Bluetooth‐capability, the system . If the cell phone has voice in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
can interact with many cell phones, dialing capability, learn to use position. The range of the Bluetooth
allowing: that feature to access the system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
address book or contact list. Not all phones support all functions,
. Placement and receipt of calls and not all phones are guaranteed
in a hands-free mode. See “Voice Pass-Thru” in this
section for more information. to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
. Sharing of the cell phone’s system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
address book or contact list
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone for more information on compatible
with the vehicle. Numbers” in this section for phones.
more information.
To minimize driver distraction, Voice Recognition
before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
{ WARNING The Bluetooth system uses voice
recognition to interpret voice
. Become familiar with the When using a cell phone, it commands to dial phone numbers
features of the cell phone. can be distracting to look too and name tags.
Organize the phone book and long or too often at the screen of
contact lists clearly and delete the phone or the infotainment For additional information say “Help”
duplicate or rarely used entries. (navigation) system. Taking your while you are in a voice
If possible, program speed dial eyes off the road too long or recognition menu.
or other shortcuts. too often could cause a crash
. Review the controls and resulting in injury or death. Focus
operation of the infotainment your attention on driving.
system.
Infotainment System 7-19
Noise: Keep interior noise levels Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information
to a minimum. The system may not . Up to five cell phones can be
Use the buttons located on the
recognize voice commands if there paired to the Bluetooth system.
steering wheel to operate the
is too much background noise.
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See . The pairing process is disabled
When to Speak: A short tone Steering Wheel Controls on when the vehicle is moving.
sounds after the system responds page 5‑3 for more information.
indicating when it is waiting for a . Pairing only needs to be
voice command. Wait until the tone
b g (Push To Talk): Press to completed once, unless the
answer incoming calls, to confirm pairing information on the cell
and then speak.
system information, and to start phone changes or the cell phone
How to Speak: Speak clearly in speech recognition. is deleted from the system.
a calm and natural voice.
c (Phone On Hook): Press to . Only one paired cell phone can
Audio System end a call, reject a call, or cancel be connected to the Bluetooth
an operation. system at a time.
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through the Pairing . If multiple paired cell phones
vehicle's front audio system are within range of the system,
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
speakers and overrides the audio the system connects to the first
paired to the Bluetooth system and
system. Use the audio system available paired cell phone in the
then connected to the vehicle before
volume knob, during a call, to order that they were first paired
it can be used. See your cell phone
change the volume level. The to the system. To link to a
manufacturer's user guide for
adjusted volume level remains in different paired phone, see
Bluetooth functions before pairing
memory for later calls. To prevent “Connecting to a Different
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
missed calls, a minimum volume Phone” later in this section.
is not connected, calls will be made
level is used if the volume is turned
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
down too low.
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
7-20 Infotainment System
Pairing a Phone After the PIN is successfully Deleting a Paired Phone
entered, the system prompts you
1. Press and hold b g for to provide a name for the paired
If the phone name you want to
two seconds. delete is unknown, see “Listing All
cell phone. This name will be Paired and Connected Phones.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.” used to indicate which phones
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
are paired and connected to the 1. Press and hold b g for
vehicle, see “Listing All Paired two seconds.
with instructions and a four‐digit and Connected Phones” later in
Personal Identification Number this section for more information. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
4. Start the pairing process on the additional phones. for which phone to delete.
cell phone that you want to pair. 4. Say the name of the phone you
For help with this process, see Listing All Paired and Connected want to delete.
your cell phone manufacturers Phones
user guide. The system can list all cell phones Connecting to a Different Phone
5. Locate the device named “Your paired to it. If a paired cell phone is To connect to a different cell phone,
Vehicle” in the list on the cell also connected to the vehicle, the the Bluetooth system looks for the
phone. Follow the instructions system responds with “is connected” next available cell phone in the
on the cell phone to enter the after that phone name. order in which all the available cell
PIN that was provided in Step 3. phones were paired. Depending
1. Press and hold b g for on which cell phone you want to
two seconds. connect to, you may have to use
2. Say “Bluetooth.” this command several times.
3. Say “List.” 1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Infotainment System 7-21
3. Say “Change phone.” Digit Store: This command allows Using the “Digit Store” Command
. If another cell phone is a phone number to be stored as a If an unwanted number is
found, the response will be name tag by entering the digits one recognized by the system, say
“<Phone name> is now at a time. “Clear” at any time to clear the last
connected.” Delete: This command is used to number.
. If another cell phone is not delete individual name tags. To hear all of the numbers
found, the original phone Delete All Name Tags: This recognized by the system, say
remains connected. command deletes all stored “Verify” at any time.
name tags in the Hands‐Free
Storing and Deleting Phone Calling Directory and the OnStar 1. Press and hold b g for
Numbers Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory. two seconds.
The system can store up to Using the “Store” Command 2. Say “Digit Store.”
30 phone numbers as name tags 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
in the Hands‐Free Directory that is 1. Press and hold b g for that you want to store. After
shared between the Bluetooth and two seconds. each digit is entered, the system
OnStar systems. repeats back the digit it heard
2. Say “Store.”
The following commands are used followed by a tone. After the
3. Say the phone number or group last digit has been entered, say
delete and store phone numbers.
of numbers you want to store all “Store”, and then follow the
Store: This command will store at once with no pauses, then directions given by the system
a phone number, or a group of follow the directions given by the to save a name tag for this
numbers as a name tag. system to save a name tag for number.
this number.
7-22 Infotainment System
Using the “Delete” Command Using the “List” Command Using the “Dial” or “Call”
Command
1. Press and hold b g for 1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. two seconds. 1. Press and hold b g for
2. Say “Delete.” 2. Say “Directory.” two seconds.
3. Say the name tag you want to 3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.” 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
delete. 4. Say “List.” 3. Say the entire number without
pausing or say the name tag.
Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
Making a Call Once connected, the person called
Calls can be made using the will be heard through the audio
This command deletes all stored speakers.
following commands.
name tags in the Hands‐Free
Calling Directory and the OnStar Dial or Call: The dial or Using the “Digit Dial” Command
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory. call command can be used
The digit dial command allows a
interchangeably to dial a phone
To delete all name tags: phone number to be dialed by
number or a stored name tag.
entering the digits one at a time.
1. Press and hold b g for Digit Dial: This command allows After each digit is entered, the
two seconds. a phone number to be dialed by system repeats back the digit it
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” entering the digits one at a time. heard followed by a tone.
Listing Stored Numbers Re‐dial: This command is used to If an unwanted number is
dial the last number used on the cell recognized by the system, say
The list command will list all the phone. “Clear” at any time to clear the
stored numbers and name tags. last number.
Infotainment System 7-23
To hear all of the numbers Receiving a Call Three‐Way Calling
recognized by the system, say
When an incoming call is received, Three‐way calling must be
“Verify” at any time.
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and
1. Press and hold b g for tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service
two seconds. carrier.
. Press b g to answer the call.
2. Say “Digit Dial.” 1. While on a call, press b g.
. Press i to ignore a call.
3. Say each digit, one at a time, 2. Say “Three‐way call.”
that you want to dial. After each Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to
digit is entered, the system
Call waiting must be supported on dial the number of the third party
repeats back the digit it heard
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called.
followed by a tone. After the last
wireless service carrier.
digit has been entered, 4. Once the call is connected,
say “Dial.” . Press b g to answer an press b g to link all the callers
Once connected, the person called incoming call when another call together.
will be heard through the audio is active. The original call is
placed on hold. Ending a Call
speakers.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command . Press b g again to return to the Press i to end a call.
original call.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
. Press i to disconnect the
Once connected, the person called
current call and switch to the call
will be heard through the audio
on hold.
speakers.
7-24 Infotainment System
Muting a Call To Transfer Audio from the Voice Pass-Thru
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
During a call, all sounds from inside Voice pass‐thru allows access to
the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the the voice recognition commands on
person on the other end of the call vehicle: the cell phone. See your cell phone
cannot hear them. manufacturer's user guide to see if
1. Press b g. the cell phone supports this feature.
To mute a call, press b g and then 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
say “Mute Call.” To access contacts stored in the cell
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth phone:
To cancel mute, press b g and System from a Cell Phone
then say “Un‐mute Call.” 1. Press and hold b g for
During a call with the audio on the two seconds.
Transferring a Call cell phone, press b g. The audio 2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system
Audio can be transferred between transfers to the vehicle. If the audio responds “Bluetooth ready”,
the Bluetooth system and the cell does not transfer to the vehicle, use followed by a tone.
phone. the audio transfer feature on the
cell phone. See your cell phone 3. Say “Voice.” The system
The cell phone must be paired manufacturer's user guide for more responds “OK, accessing
and connected with the Bluetooth information. <phone name>.”
system before a call can be
The cell phone's normal prompt
transferred. The connection process
messages will go through its
can take up to two minutes after the
cycle according to the phone's
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
operating instructions.
Infotainment System 7-25
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System
(DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out
The Bluetooth system can send of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,
numbers and the numbers stored it will be retained indefinitely. This
as name tags during a call. You includes all saved name tags in
can use this feature when calling the phone book and phone pairing
a menu‐driven phone system. information. For information on how
Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see the
stored for use. previous sections on “Deleting a
Paired Phone” and “Storing and
Sending a Number or Name Tag Deleting Phone Numbers.”
During a Call
Other Information
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready”, followed by The Bluetooth® word mark and
a tone. logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
2. Say “Dial.” by General Motors is under license.
3. Say the number or name tag Other trademarks and trade names
to send. are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for FCC information.
7-26 Infotainment System
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
A. Driver Temperature Controls F. Air Conditioning
B. Display G. Fan Control
C. Passenger Temperature Control H. Air Delivery Mode Control
D. AUTO I. Defrost
E. Recirculation J. Rear Window Defogger
8-2 Climate Controls
When the vehicle is first started, After a 10 second display of the vehicle until warmer air is
the display shows the driver's current settings, the word AUTO, available. The system starts out
temperature setting, the outside the driver's temperature setting and blowing air at the floor but may
temperature, the fan speed, and the the outside temperature will be change modes automatically as
air delivery, for about 10 seconds. shown. The system operates to the vehicle warms up to maintain
The outside temperature is shown reach the set temperature as quickly the chosen temperature setting.
in the center of the display. The as possible. The AUTO control The length of time needed for
digital display will show the readings system works best with the windows warm up depends on the outside
in Fahrenheit or Celsius. See up and the removable roof installed temperature and the length of
“Personal Options” under Vehicle or the convertible top up. time that has elapsed since the
Personalization on page 5‑55 for 1. Press the AUTO button. vehicle was last driven.
information on changing your 2. Adjust the temperature to a 3. Wait for the system to regulate.
display. comfortable setting between This may take from 10 to
16°C (60°F) and 32°C (90°F). 30 minutes. Then adjust the
Automatic Operation temperature, if necessary.
Choosing the coldest or warmest
AUTO (Automatic): Press the temperature setting will not Do not cover the solar sensor
AUTO button to place the entire cause the system to heat or cool located in the center of the
system in the automatic mode. any faster. A setting of 23°C instrument panel, near the
When automatic operation is active, (73°F) is suggested. windshield. For more information
the system automatically controls on the solar sensor, see “Sensors”
the inside temperature, the air In cold weather, the system will
start at reduced fan speeds to later in this section.
delivery mode, and the fan speed.
avoid blowing cold air into your
Climate Controls 8-3
Manual Operation Pressing the arrows will delete To change the current mode, select
AUTO from the digital display. The one of the following:
Driver Power/Temperature: Press
fan graphics with the fan speed bars H (Vent): Air is directed to the
the driver temperature knob to turn
will be shown. The AUTO button instrument panel outlets, with some
the climate control system off. This
must be pressed to return to the air directed to the floor outlets.
is the only setting that completely
automatic fan control.
shuts off the fan. The digital display % (Bi-Level): Air is divided
shows only the outside temperature. If the airflow seems low when the between the instrument panel and
The driver and the passenger set fan speed is at the highest setting, floor outlets.
temperature and the air intake mode the passenger compartment air filter
can still be adjusted when the may need to be replaced. For more 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
climate control is off. information, see Passenger floor outlets, with some air directed
Compartment Air Filter on page 8‑7. to the windshield and side window
Passenger Power/Temperature: defogger outlets.
Press the passenger temperature N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
knob to turn the passenger's climate Press this button to manually lock in - (Floor/Defog): This mode clears
control system on or off. Turn the the current air delivery setting and the windows of fog or moisture. Air
knob to increase or decrease the to stop the automatic mode control. is directed to the windshield and the
temperature for the passenger. If the Pressing N deletes AUTO from the floor outlets, with a small amount
passenger's climate control system digital display and the mode to the side window outlets. In this
is off, the driver's temperature knob graphics will be shown. To change mode, the system automatically
will control the temperature for the turns off the recirculation and runs
the setting, press N again. The the air conditioning compressor
entire vehicle.
AUTO button must be pressed to unless the outside temperature is at
x 9 w (Fan): Press to increase return to the automatic mode or below freezing. The recirculation
or decrease the fan speed. The fan selection. mode cannot be selected while in
speed setting will appear in the the defog mode.
display.
8-4 Climate Controls
1 (Defrost): This mode clears the ^ (Air Conditioning Off): On hot days, open the windows to
windows of fog or frost more quickly. Press to turn the air conditioning let hot inside air escape; then close
Air is directed to the windshield, with compressor off. Press AUTO to them. This helps to reduce the time
a small amount directed to the side return to automatic operation. it takes for the vehicle to cool down.
window outlets. The indicator light When in AUTO, the air conditioning It also helps the system to operate
comes on and the digital display will compressor comes on automatically, more efficiently.
show the defrost mode symbol and as needed. For quick cool down on hot
fan speed when the front defrost Air conditioning does not operate days press the AUTO button and
mode is being used. In this mode, at temperatures below about 2°C to adjust the temperature to a cool,
the system automatically turns off 4°C (35°F to 40°F). In temperatures comfortable setting. To achieve
the recirculation and runs the air above 4°C (40°F), the air maximum cool down, do the
conditioning compressor, unless the conditioning cannot be turned off following:
outside temperature is at or below in defrost and defog, as it helps to
freezing. Recirculation cannot be remove moisture from the vehicle.
1. Select H mode.
selected while in the defrost mode. It also helps to keep the windows 2. Press ?.
Pressing 1 again will return the clear.
system to the last operating mode. 3. Select the a/c on.
You may notice a slight change in
For severe ice conditions, turn the engine performance when the air 4. Select the coolest temperature.
driver's temperature knob to 32°C conditioning compressor shuts off 5. Select the highest fan speed.
(90°F) while in defrost mode. and turns on again. This is normal.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the The system is designed to make
windows are clear. adjustments to help with fuel
economy while still maintaining the
selected temperature.
Climate Controls 8-5
Using these settings together for Sensors If the outside temperature goes up,
long periods of time may cause the the displayed temperature will not
The solar sensor on the vehicle
air inside of your vehicle to become change until:
monitors the solar heat and uses
too dry. To prevent this from . The vehicle's speed is above
the information to maintain the
happening, after the air in the 19 km/h (12 mph) for
selected temperature when
vehicle has cooled, turn the five minutes.
operating in AUTO mode by
recirculation mode off.
automatically adjusting the . The vehicle's speed is above
The air conditioning system temperature, fan speed, and air 52 km/h (32 mph) for two and
removes moisture from the air, so delivery system. The system may one‐half minutes.
a small amount of water might drip also supply cooler air to the side
under the vehicle while idling or of the vehicle facing the sun. The These delays prevent false
after turning off the engine. This is recirculation mode will also be readings. If the temperature goes
normal. activated, as necessary. Do not down, the outside temperature
cover the solar sensor located on will be shown when you start the
? (Recirculation): Press to turn vehicle. If it has been turned off
the recirculation mode on or off. An the top of the instrument panel near
the windshield or the system will for less than three hours, the
indicator light comes on to show temperature will be recalled from
that recirculation is on. This mode not work properly.
the previous vehicle operation.
prevents outside air from entering There is also a sensor located
your vehicle. It can be used to behind the front bumper. This There is also an inside temperature
prevent outside air and odors from sensor reads the outside air sensor located to the left of the
entering your vehicle and to help temperature and helps to maintain ignition switch. The automatic
cool the air inside your vehicle more the temperature inside the vehicle. climate control system uses this
quickly. Recirculation mode is not Any cover on the front of the vehicle sensor to receive information, so if
available in defrost or defog mode. could give a false reading in the you block or cover it, the system will
temperature. not function properly.
8-6 Climate Controls
Rear Window Defogger The vehicle has heated outside Air Vents
rearview mirrors. The mirrors will
The rear window defogger uses a Use the tab located on the air
heat to help clear fog or frost from
warming grid to remove fog or frost outlets to change the direction of
the surface of the mirrors when the
from the rear window. the airflow.
rear window defogger button is
The rear window defogger only pressed.
Operation Tips
works when the engine is running.
For vehicles with a power . Clear away any ice, snow,
= (Rear Window Defogger): convertible top, the rear window
or leaves from the air inlets at
Press to turn the rear window defogger and heated mirrors are
the base of the windshield that
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear automatically disabled when the
may block the flow of air into
as much snow from the rear window power convertible top is moving
your vehicle.
as possible. An indicator light or down.
comes on to show that the rear . Use of non-GM approved hood
Notice: Do not use anything
window defogger is on. deflectors may adversely affect
sharp on the inside of the rear
the performance of the system.
The rear window defogger turns off window. If you do, you could
about 10 minutes after the button cut or damage the warming grid, . Keep the area around the base
is pressed when traveling less than and the repairs would not be of the instrument panel console
48 km/h (30 mph). If turned on covered by the vehicle warranty. and air path under the seats
again, the defogger only runs for Do not attach a temporary vehicle clear of objects to help circulate
about five minutes before turning license, tape, a decal, or anything the air inside of your vehicle
off. The defogger can also be turned similar to the defogger grid. more effectively.
off by turning off the engine.
Climate Controls 8-7
Maintenance The passenger compartment air
filter is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment
Passenger Compartment near the battery. See Engine
Air Filter Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10.
The passenger compartment air
filter removes certain particles from To check or replace the air filter:
the air including pollen and dust
particles. Reductions in airflow,
which may occur more often in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter
may need to be replaced. See
Maintenance Replacement Parts on 3. Remove the filter and install the
page 11‑8. new air filter.
Notice: Driving without a 4. Replace the filter cover.
passenger compartment air filter
in place can cause water and 5. Attach the retainer clips.
small particles, like paper and
leaves, to be pulled into your
climate control system which may
cause damage to it. Make sure 1. Remove the cover retainer
you always replace the old filter clips (A) from the passenger
with a new one. compartment air filter cover.
2. Remove the cover.
8-8 Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-39
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-43
Operating Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
Parking (Manual
9-25 Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-43
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Cruise Control
Parking Over Things Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Driving Information
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Fuel
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 California Fuel
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Racing or Other Competitive Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-28 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-50
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Manual Transmission Filling a Portable Fuel
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-10 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-32 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Brakes
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-13 Towing
Antilock Brake General Towing
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Starting and Operating Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-18 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Conversions and Add-Ons
Front Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Add-On Electrical
Ride Control Systems Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Traction Control
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Retained Accessory Active Handling System . . . . . 9-37
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information WARNING (Continued)
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or Alcohol affects four things that
Defensive driving means “always anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
expect the unexpected.” The first possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques judgment, muscular coordination,
step in driving defensively is to wear vision, and attentiveness.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on could save your life.
page 3‑9. Police records show that
almost 40 percent of all motor
Drunk Driving vehicle-related deaths involve
{ WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these
Assume that other road users { WARNING deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is In recent years, more than
drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes, 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and deaths have been associated with
what they might do and be ready. judgment can be affected by even the use of alcohol, with about
In addition: a small amount of alcohol. You 250,000 people injured.
. Allow enough following can have a serious — or even
distance between you and fatal — collision if you drive after
the driver in front of you. drinking.
. Focus on the task of driving. Do not drink and drive or ride with
(Continued) a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
Driving and Operating 9-3
For persons under 21, it is against Control of a Vehicle Average reaction time is about
the law in every U.S. state to drink three‐fourths of a second. But
alcohol. There are good medical, The following three systems that is only an average. It might be
psychological, and developmental help to control the vehicle while less with one driver and as long as
reasons for these laws. driving — brakes, steering, and two or three seconds or more with
accelerator. At times, as when another. Age, physical condition,
The obvious way to eliminate the driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
leading highway safety problem is alertness, coordination, and
ask more of those control systems eyesight all play a part. So do
for people never to drink alcohol than the tires and road can provide.
and then drive. alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
Meaning, you can lose control of But even in three‐fourths of a
Medical research shows that the vehicle. See Traction Control second, a vehicle moving at
alcohol in a person's system System (TCS) on page 9‑36 and 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
can make crash injuries worse, Active Handling System on 20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot
especially injuries to the brain, page 9‑37. of distance in an emergency, so
spinal cord, or heart. This means Adding non‐dealer accessories can keeping enough space between
that when anyone who has been affect vehicle performance. See the vehicle and others is important.
drinking — driver or passenger — is Accessories and Modifications on
in a crash, that person's chance of And, of course, actual stopping
page 10‑4. distances vary greatly with the
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not surface of the road, whether it is
been drinking.
Braking pavement or gravel; the condition
See Brake System Warning Light on of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
page 5‑21. or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
Braking action involves perception and the amount of brake force
time and reaction time. Deciding to applied.
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
9-4 Driving and Operating
Avoid needless heavy braking. Under certain weather or operating Magnetic Speed Variable
Some people drive in spurts, heavy conditions, occasional brake Assist Steering System
acceleration followed by heavy squeak, squeal, or other noise
braking, rather than keeping pace might be heard with the vehicle's This system continuously adjusts
with traffic. This is a mistake. The performance braking system. the effort felt when steering at all
brakes might not have time to cool This brake system is designed vehicle speeds. It provides ease
between hard stops. The brakes will for superior fade resistance and when parking, yet a firm, solid feel
wear out much faster with a lot of consistent operation using high at highway speeds.
heavy braking. Keeping pace with performance brake pads. Brake Steering Tips
the traffic and allowing realistic noise and brake dust are normal
following distances eliminates a lot and do not affect system It is important to take curves at a
of unnecessary braking. That means performance. reasonable speed.
better braking and longer brake life. Adding non‐dealer accessories can Traction in a curve depends on the
If the engine ever stops while affect vehicle performance. See condition of the tires and the road
the vehicle is being driven, brake Accessories and Modifications on surface, the angle at which the
normally but do not pump the page 10‑4. curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
brakes. If the brakes are pumped, While in a curve, speed is the one
the pedal could get harder to push Steering factor that can be controlled.
down. If the engine stops, there will If there is a need to reduce speed,
still be some power brake assist but Power Steering do it before entering the curve, while
it will be used when the brake is If power steering assist is lost the front wheels are straight.
applied. Once the power assist is because the engine stops or the
used up, it can take longer to stop Try to adjust the speed so you can
system is not functioning, the drive through the curve. Maintain a
and the brake pedal will be harder vehicle can be steered but it will
to push. reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
take more effort. accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
Driving and Operating 9-5
Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery
There are times when steering can The vehicle's right wheels can drop
be more effective than braking. For off the edge of a road onto the
example, you come over a hill and shoulder while driving.
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the
The vehicle can perform very well recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
in emergencies like these. First positions, it can be turned a full
apply the brakes. See Braking on 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is
page 9‑3. It is better to remove as only slightly below the pavement,
much speed as possible from a to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy.
collision. Then steer around the Ease off the accelerator and
problem, to the left or right you have avoided the object.
then, if there is nothing in the way,
depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency steer so that the vehicle straddles
situations are always possible is a the edge of the pavement.
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
9-6 Driving and Operating
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when
(3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn, water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
In a skid, a driver can lose control
until the right front tire contacts material is on the road. For safety,
of the vehicle. Defensive drivers
the pavement edge. Then turn the slow down and adjust your driving
avoid most skids by taking
steering wheel to go straight down to these conditions. It is important
reasonable care suited to existing
the roadway. to slow down on slippery surfaces
conditions, and by not overdriving
because stopping distance is longer
those conditions. But skids are
Loss of Control always possible.
and vehicle control more limited.
Let us review what driving experts While driving on a surface with
The three types of skids correspond
say about what happens when the reduced traction, try to avoid
to the vehicle's three control
three control systems — brakes, sudden steering, acceleration,
systems. In the braking skid,
steering, and acceleration — do not or braking, including reducing
the wheels are not rolling. In the
have enough friction where the tires vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
steering or cornering skid, too much
meet the road to do what the driver gear. Any sudden changes could
speed or steering in a curve causes
has asked. cause the tires to slide. You might
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
not realize the surface is slippery
In any emergency, do not give up. And in the acceleration skid, too
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
Keep trying to steer and constantly much throttle causes the driving
recognize warning clues — such as
seek an escape route or area of wheels to spin.
enough water, ice, or packed snow
less danger. If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored
your foot off the accelerator pedal surface — and slow down when you
and quickly steer the way you have any doubt.
want the vehicle to go. If you start
Remember: Antilock brakes help
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
avoid only the braking skid.
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Driving and Operating 9-7
Racing or Other Except ZO6, ZR1, and Grand ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport Only:
Sport: Be sure to check the oil For racing or competitive driving, it
Competitive Driving level often during racing or other is recommended that the loading of
Racing or competitive driving may competitive driving and keep the the vehicle be limited to the driver
affect the vehicle warranty. See the level at or near 1 L (1 qt) above only, with no other cargo, and that
warranty book before using the the upper mark that shows the tires be inflated to 180 kPa (26 psi)
vehicle for racing or other proper operating range on the for a maximum speed of 230 km/h
competitive driving. engine oil dipstick. After the (143 mph).
competitive driving, remove If the vehicle is a ZO6, ZR1,
Notice: If you use the vehicle
excess oil so that the level on or Grand Sport model, it has
for racing or other competitive
the dipstick is not above the greaseable outer ends on both of
driving, the engine may use more
upper mark that shows the the rear toe‐links. Under normal
oil than it would with normal use.
proper operating range. use, lubrication should be performed
Low oil levels can damage the
engine. For information on how ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport Only: as described in the maintenance
to add oil, see Engine Oil on For racing or competitive driving, schedule. See Scheduled
page 10‑15. it is recommended that the brake Maintenance on page 11‑2 and
fluid be replaced with a high Recommended Fluids and
ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport Only:
performance brake fluid that has Lubricants on page 11‑6. If using
Be sure to check the oil level
a dry boiling point greater than the vehicle for racing, lubrication
often during racing or other
279°C (534°F). After conversion to should be performed at the end of
competitive driving and keep the
the high performance brake fluid, each racing day. See your dealer
level at or near the upper mark
follow the brake fluid service for lubrication and make sure any
that shows the proper operating
recommendations outlined by the needed repairs are made at once.
range on the engine oil dipstick.
fluid manufacturer. Do not use Proper procedures for performing
silicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids. these services can be found in
the service manual. See Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑15.
9-8 Driving and Operating
If the vehicle is used for racing or When performed as instructed, 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2,
other competitive driving, the rear these procedures will not damage five times. This should take
axle fluid temperatures may be the brakes. During the burnishing about 10 minutes.
higher than would occur in normal procedure, the brake pads will 4. After completing the 50 stops,
driving. We recommend that the smoke and produce an odor. The cool the brakes by driving for
rear axle fluid be drained and braking force and pedal travel may 8 km (5 mi) at 97 kph (60 mph).
refilled with new fluid after every increase. After the procedure is
24 hours of racing or competitive complete, the brake pads may As with all high performance brake
driving. See Recommended Fluids appear white at the rotor contact. systems, some amount of brake
and Lubricants on page 11‑6 for squeal is normal.
what fluid to use. Street High Performance Brake
Burnishing Procedure Racing/Track Brake Burnish
ZR1 Brake Burnish Procedure Procedure
Run this procedure in a safe
Notice: These procedures are manner and in compliance with all To prepare the ZR1 brake system
specific to the ZR1 with ceramic local and state ordinances/laws for track events and racing, the
brake rotors. These procedures regarding motor vehicle operation. Street High Performance Brake
should not be run on other Run this procedure only on dry Burnish as described previously
Corvette models as damage may pavement. should be completed.
result. 1. From a stop, accelerate as In addition to completing the Street
Notice: The new vehicle break‐in rapidly as possible without High Performance Brake Burnishing
period should be completed activating traction control to a Procedure, the following procedure
before performing the brake speed of 97 kph (60 mph). needs to be completed to make the
burnish procedure or damage ZR1 brake system ready for track
2. Use enough pedal force to events and racing.
may occur to the powertrain/ completely stop the vehicle in
engine. See New Vehicle Break-In four to five seconds. If ABS This procedure should only be run
on page 9‑18. activates, braking is too hard. on a track and only on dry
pavement.
Driving and Operating 9-9
Notice: Brake pedal fade will Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)
occur during this track burnish
procedure and can cause brake Rain and wet roads can reduce
pedal travel and force to increase. vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate. Flowing or rushing water creates
This could extend stopping strong forces. Driving through
distance until the brakes are fully Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid flowing water could cause the
burnished.
driving through large puddles and vehicle to be carried away. If this
1. Drive a normal first lap and not deep‐standing or flowing water. happens, you and other vehicle
too aggressive. occupants could drown. Do not
2. Laps 2 and 3 should be
gradually driven faster and more
{ WARNING ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
aggressive, while allowing for Wet brakes can cause crashes. through flowing water.
reduced brake output and They might not work as well in
increased stopping distance a quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning
due to brake fade. pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
3. Lap 4 as near to full speed,
can build up under the vehicle's
while allowing for reduced brake After driving through a large tires so they actually ride on the
output and increased stopping puddle of water or a car/vehicle water. This can happen if the road
distance due to brake fade. wash, lightly apply the brake is wet enough and you are going
4. Laps 5 and 6 should be cool pedal until the brakes work fast enough. When the vehicle is
down laps normally. hydroplaning, it has little or no
5. Lap 7 should be normal driving (Continued) contact with the road.
or an easy out lap. There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
9-10 Driving and Operating
Other Rainy Weather Tips Other driving tips include:
Besides slowing down, other wet . Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
{ WARNING
weather driving tips include: . Keep interior temperature cool. If you do not shift down, the
. Allow extra following distance. brakes could get so hot that they
. Keep your eyes moving — scan would not work well. You would
. Pass with caution. the road ahead and to the sides.
then have poor braking or even
. Keep windshield wiping . Check the rearview mirror and none going down a hill. You could
equipment in good shape. vehicle instruments often. crash. Shift down to let the engine
. Keep the windshield washer fluid assist the brakes on a steep
reservoir filled. Hill and Mountain Roads downhill slope.
. Have good tires with proper Driving on steep hills or through
tread depth. See Tires on mountains is different than driving
page 10‑58. on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
{ WARNING
. Turn off cruise control.
. Keep the vehicle serviced and Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
in good shape. or with the ignition off is
Highway Hypnosis dangerous. The brakes will have
. Check all fluid levels and brakes,
Always be alert and pay attention to do all the work of slowing down
tires, cooling system, and
to your surroundings while driving. and they could get so hot that
transmission.
If you become tired or sleepy, find they would not work well. You
a safe place to park the vehicle . Shift to a lower gear when going would then have poor braking or
and rest. down steep or long hills. even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle
in gear when going downhill.
Driving and Operating 9-11
. Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
Winter Driving Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
center of the road. Drive at Driving on Snow or Ice wheels will spin and polish the
speeds that let you stay in your surface under the tires even more.
own lane. Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
. Top of hills: Be road, creating less traction or grip. on page 9‑34 improves vehicle
alert — something could be in Wet ice can occur at about 0°C stability during hard stops on
your lane (stalled car, accident). (32°F) when freezing rain begins to slippery roads, but apply the brakes
. Pay attention to special road fall, resulting in even less traction. sooner than when on dry pavement.
signs (falling rocks area, winding Avoid driving on wet ice or in Allow greater following distance
roads, long grades, passing or freezing rain until roads can be
on any slippery road and watch
no-passing zones) and take treated with salt or sand.
for slippery spots. Icy patches can
appropriate action. Drive with caution, whatever the occur on otherwise clear roads in
condition. Accelerate gently so shaded areas. The surface of a
traction is not lost. Accelerating too curve or an overpass can remain
quickly causes the wheels to spin icy when the surrounding roads
and makes the surface under the are clear. Avoid sudden steering
tires slick, so there is even less maneuvers and braking while
traction. on ice.
Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces.
9-12 Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
vehicle unless there is help nearby. . Adjust the climate control
. Clear away snow from around system to a setting that
If possible, use the Roadside
the base of your vehicle, circulates the air inside the
Assistance Program (U.S. and
especially any that is blocking vehicle and set the fan speed
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
the exhaust pipe.
Assistance Program (Mexico) on to the highest setting. See
page 13‑10. To get help and keep . Check again from time to Climate Control System in
everyone in the vehicle safe: time to be sure snow does the Index.
not collect there.
. Turn on the hazard warning For more information about
flashers. . Open a window about 5 cm carbon monoxide, see Engine
(2 in) on the side of the Exhaust on page 9‑26.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside
vehicle that is away from the
mirror. Snow can trap exhaust gases
wind to bring in fresh air.
under your vehicle. This can
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
cause deadly CO (Carbon
Monoxide) gas to get inside.
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel.
CO could overcome you and kill
under the vehicle. This may (Continued) you. You cannot see it or smell
cause exhaust gases to get it, so you might not know it is in
inside. Engine exhaust contains your vehicle. Clear away snow
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which from around the base of your
cannot be seen or smelled. It can vehicle, especially any that is
cause unconsciousness and even blocking the exhaust.
death.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 9-13
Run the engine for short periods If the Vehicle is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get
only as needed to keep warm, but it Out
be careful. Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and
To save fuel, run the engine for only stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the
short periods as needed to warm front wheels. Turn off any traction
the vehicle and then shut the engine If stuck too severely for the traction
system. Shift back and forth
off and close the window most of system to free the vehicle, turn the
between R (Reverse) and a forward
the way to save heat. Repeat this traction system off and use the
gear, or with a manual transmission,
until help arrives but only when you rocking method.
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
feel really uncomfortable from the R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as
cold. Moving about to keep warm { WARNING little as possible. To prevent
also helps. transmission wear, wait until the
If the vehicle's tires spin at high wheels stop spinning before shifting
If it takes some time for help to
speed, they can explode, and you gears. Release the accelerator
arrive, now and then when you run
or others could be injured. The pedal while shifting, and press
the engine, push the accelerator
vehicle can overheat, causing an lightly on the accelerator pedal
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This engine compartment fire or other when the transmission is in gear.
keeps the battery charged to restart damage. Spin the wheels as little Slowly spinning the wheels in the
the vehicle and to signal for help as possible and avoid going forward and reverse directions
with the headlamps. Do this as little above 55 km/h (35 mph). causes a rocking motion that could
as possible to save fuel. free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
For information about using tire
might need to be towed out. If the
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
vehicle does need to be towed out,
Chains on page 10‑80.
see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑86.
9-14 Driving and Operating
Vehicle Load Limits Tire and Loading Information
{ WARNING Label
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can Do not load the vehicle
carry. This weight is called the any heavier than the Gross
vehicle capacity weight and Vehicle Weight Rating
includes the weight of all (GVWR), or either the
occupants, cargo and all maximum front or rear Gross
nonfactory‐installed options. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Two labels on your vehicle This can cause systems to
show how much weight it may break and change the way the
properly carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. This could
Loading Information label and cause loss of control and a
the Certification label. crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar
(B-pillar) of your vehicle. With
the driver's door open, you will
find the label attached below
the door latch. This label shows
the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
Driving and Operating 9-15
The Tire and Loading Steps for Determining Correct the amount of available cargo
Information label also shows the Load Limit and luggage load capacity
size of the original equipment 1. Locate the statement is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
tires (C) and the recommended “The combined weight of (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
cold tire inflation pressures (D). occupants and cargo should 5. Determine the combined
For more information on tires never exceed XXX kg or weight of luggage and cargo
and inflation see Tires on XXX lbs” on your vehicle's being loaded on the vehicle.
page 10‑58 and Tire Pressure placard. That weight may not safely
on page 10‑66. exceed the available cargo
2. Determine the combined
There is also important loading weight of the driver and and luggage load capacity
information on the vehicle passengers that will be riding calculated in Step 4.
Certification label. It tells you in your vehicle. 6. If your vehicle will be towing
the Gross Vehicle Weight a trailer, the load from your
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross 3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and trailer will be transferred to
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Consult this
the front and rear axle. See passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs. manual to determine how this
“Certification Label” later in this reduces the available cargo
section. 4. The resulting figure equals and luggage load capacity of
the available amount of cargo your vehicle.
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” Your vehicle is neither
amount equals 1400 lbs and designed nor intended to tow
there will be five 150 lb a trailer.
passengers in your vehicle,
9-16 Driving and Operating
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = (400 kg) (181 lbs) Example 2 = 181 kg (400 lbs) Example 3 = 181 kg (400 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 1 = 68 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 181 kg
(150 lbs) (300 lbs) (400 lbs)
C. Available Occupant and Cargo C. Available Cargo Weight = 45 kg C. Available Cargo Weight =
Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs) (100 lbs) 0 kg (0 lbs)
Driving and Operating 9-17
Refer to your vehicle's Tire and your vehicle, called the Gross
Loading Information label for Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). WARNING (Continued)
specific information about your The GVWR includes the weight
vehicle's capacity weight and of the vehicle, all occupants, maximum front or rear Gross
seating positions. The combined fuel and cargo. Never exceed Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
weight of the driver, passengers the GVWR for your vehicle, This can cause systems to
and cargo should never exceed or the Gross Axle Weight break and change the way the
your vehicle's capacity weight. Rating (GAWR) for either the vehicle handles. This could
front or rear axle. cause loss of control and a
Certification Label crash. Overloading can also
Do not load your vehicle shorten the life of the vehicle.
with more weight than it was
designed to carry. See “Steps
for Determining Correct Load Notice : Overloading the
Limit” earlier in this section. vehicle may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do
{ WARNING not overload the vehicle.
Do not load the vehicle
any heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
A vehicle specific Certification (Continued)
label is attached to the rear
edge of the driver's door. It tells
you the gross weight capacity of
9-18 Driving and Operating
If you put things inside your Starting and
vehicle — like suitcases, WARNING (Continued)
tools, packages or anything Operating
. Never stack heavier
else — they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to things, like suitcases, New Vehicle Break-In
stop or turn quickly, or if there is inside the vehicle so that Follow these recommended
a crash, they will keep going. some of them are above guidelines during the first 2 414 km
the tops of the seats. (1,500 miles) of driving this vehicle.
{ WARNING . Do not leave an Parts have a break-in period and
performance will be better in the
unsecured child restraint
Things you put inside your long run.
in your vehicle.
vehicle can strike and injure For the first 322 km (200 miles):
people in a sudden stop or
. When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
. To break in new tires, drive at
turn, or in a crash. moderate speeds and avoid hard
it whenever you can.
. Put things in the rear area cornering for the first 322 km
of your vehicle. Try to (200 miles).
spread the weight evenly. . New brake linings also need a
(Continued) break- in period. Avoid making
hard stops during the first
322 km (200 miles). This is
recommended every time
brake linings are replaced.
Driving and Operating 9-19
For the first 80 km (500 miles): For the first 2 414 km (1,500 miles):
. Avoid full throttle starts and . Do not participate in track
{ WARNING
abrupt stops. events, sport driving schools, ZR1s, and ZO6s with RPO ULZ,
. Do not exceed 4,000 rpm. or similar activities during the contain parts made from carbon
first 2 414 km (1,500 miles). fiber.
. Avoid driving at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
. Check engine oil with every When damaged, the exposed
including the use of cruise refueling and add if necessary. edges can be very sharp.
control. Oil and fuel consumption may be A person could be injured by
higher than normal during the
. Avoid downshifting to brake these sharp edges. Use caution
first 2 414 km (1,500 miles).
or slow the vehicle when the when washing the vehicle,
engine speed will exceed coming in contact with,
Front Air Dam or removing damaged carbon
4000 rpm.
The vehicle is equipped with a front fiber parts. See your dealer for
. Do not let the engine labor. air dam which has minimal ground replacement.
Never lug the engine in high clearance.
gear at low speeds. With a
manual transmission, shift to Vehicles with the ZR1 package, Under normal operation, these
the next lower gear. This rule or ZO6 vehicles with RPO ULZ, also components will occasionally
applies at all times, not just come with a splitter made from contact some road surfaces (speed
during the break-in period. carbon fiber. bumps, driveway ramps, etc.). This
can be heard inside the vehicle as
a scraping noise. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem.
Use care when approaching bumps
or objects on road surfaces and
avoid them when possible.
9-20 Driving and Operating
Ignition Positions / (START): Press this button In an emergency, if the vehicle must
while your foot is on the brake for be shut off while driving:
an automatic transmission, or while 1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressing in the clutch for a manual pressure. Do not pump the
transmission, to start the engine. brakes repeatedly. This may
If the vehicle is in OFF or Retained deplete power assist, requiring
Accessory Power (RAP) mode, the increased brake pedal force.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter must be inside the 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
vehicle to start the engine. can be done while the vehicle is
moving. After shifting to neutral,
9 Acc. (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ firmly apply the brakes and steer
OFF/ACCESSORY): When the the vehicle to a safe location.
vehicle is stopped with the engine
on, press the button once to turn the 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
engine off. to P (Park) with an automatic
The vehicle has an electronic transmission, or Neutral with a
keyless ignition with a push-button Do not turn the engine off when the manual transmission. Turn the
start. vehicle is moving. This will cause a ignition to OFF.
In order to shift out of P (Park), loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable 4. Set the parking brake. See
the vehicle must be running or in Parking Brake on page 9‑35
Acc. mode and the regular brake the airbags.
pedal must be applied.
Driving and Operating 9-21
If an automatic vehicle is not Starting the Engine
{ WARNING correctly placed in P (Park) a SHIFT
TO PARK message will display on Move the shift lever to P (Park)
Turning off the vehicle while the Driver Information Center (DIC). or N (Neutral) for an automatic
moving may cause loss of power transmission. For a manual
assist in the brake and steering For more information, see transmission the vehicle can be
systems and disable the airbags. Transmission Messages on started in Neutral or any other
While driving, only shut the page 5‑53. gear as long as the clutch pedal is
vehicle off in an emergency. When the engine is off, press this pressed. To restart a vehicle with a
button to place the vehicle in manual transmission when you are
accessory mode. ACCESSORY already moving, use the Neutral
5. If the vehicle must be shut off position only. To restart a vehicle
MODE ON will display on the Driver
while driving, turn the ignition to with an automatic transmission
Information Center (DIC). This mode
ACC/ACCESSORY. when you are already moving, use
allows you to use things like the
When the engine is on or the radio and the power windows while N (Neutral).
vehicle is in accessory power the engine is off. Use accessory Notice: Do not try to shift to
mode, it is recommended that a mode if you must have the vehicle P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
manual transmission be placed in motion while the engine is off, for If you do, you could damage the
in R (Reverse). An automatic example, if the vehicle is being transmission. Shift to P (Park)
transmission must be placed in pushed or towed. only when the vehicle is stopped.
P (Park). Then press the Acc.
After being in accessory mode for The RKE transmitter must be inside
button to turn the engine off and
about 10 minutes, the vehicle will the vehicle for the ignition to work.
place the vehicle in RAP. See
automatically enter RAP or OFF,
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
depending on if the doors are
on page 9‑23 for more information.
opened or closed.
9-22 Driving and Operating
Cell phone chargers can interfere 2. When the engine begins 4. If the engine does not start and
with the operation of the Keyless cranking, let go of the button and no DIC message is displayed,
Access System. Battery chargers the engine cranks automatically wait 15 seconds before trying
should not be plugged in when until it starts. If the battery in the again to let the cranking motor
starting or turning off the engine. RKE transmitter is weak, the cool down.
To start the vehicle, do the following: DIC displays FOB BATTERY If the engine does not start after
LOW. You can still drive the 5-10 seconds, especially in very
1. For vehicles with an automatic vehicle.
transmission, with your foot on cold weather (below −18°C
the brake pedal, press the See “Battery Replacement” or 0°F), it could be flooded with
START button located on the under Remote Keyless Entry too much gasoline. Try pushing
instrument panel. For vehicles (RKE) System Operation on the accelerator pedal all the way
with a manual transmission, you page 2‑3 for more information. to the floor while cranking for up
must also press in the clutch If the fob battery is dead, you to 15 seconds maximum. Wait at
pedal while pressing the START need to insert the fob into the least 15 seconds between each
button. fob slot to enable engine try, to allow the cranking motor
starting. See “NO FOBS to cool down. When the engine
If there is not an RKE transmitter DETECTED” under Key and starts, let go of the accelerator.
in the vehicle or if there is Lock Messages on page 5‑42. If the vehicle starts briefly but
something causing interference then stops again, repeat these
with it, the DIC will display 3. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. steps. This clears the extra
NO FOBS DETECTED. See Key gasoline from the engine.
and Lock Messages on Operate the engine and
page 5‑42 for more information. transmission gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates
all moving parts.
Driving and Operating 9-23
Notice: Cranking the engine for Notice: The engine is designed R (Reverse) and set the parking
long periods of time, by pressing to work with the electronics in brake after you turn off the engine
the START button immediately the vehicle. If electrical parts by pressing and holding the Acc.
after cranking has ended, can or accessories are added, you (Off/Accessory) button.
overheat and damage the could change the way the engine If the RKE transmitter is not
cranking motor, and drain the operates. Before adding electrical detected inside the vehicle when it
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds equipment, check with your is turned to off, the DIC displays
between each try, to allow the dealer. If you do not, the engine NO FOB – OFF OR RUN?.
cranking motor to cool down. might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be See Key and Lock Messages on
The vehicle has a page 5‑42 for more information.
Computer-Controlled Cranking covered by the vehicle warranty.
System. This feature assists in Stopping the Engine
starting the engine and protects Retained Accessory
components. Once cranking has If the vehicle has an automatic Power (RAP)
been initiated, the engine continues transmission, move the shift lever
to P (Park) and press and hold the These vehicle accessories can be
cranking for a few seconds or until used for up to 10 minutes after the
the vehicle starts. If the engine does Acc. (Off/Accessory) button, located
on the instrument panel, until the engine is turned off:
not start, cranking automatically
stops after 15 seconds to prevent engine shuts off. If the shift lever . Audio System
cranking motor damage. To prevent is not in P (Park), the engine shuts
off and the vehicle goes into the
. Power Windows
gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is accessory mode. The DIC displays These features continue to work
already running. SHIFT TO PARK. Once the shifter is up to 10 minutes after the engine
moved to P (Park), the vehicle turns is turned off or until either door is
off. If the vehicle has a manual opened. If a door is opened, the
transmission, it is recommended power windows and audio system
that you move the shift lever to will shut off.
9-24 Driving and Operating
Shifting Into Park 1. Hold the brake pedal down Leaving the Vehicle with the
and set the parking brake. See Engine Running (Automatic
(Automatic Transmission) Parking Brake on page 9‑35 for Transmission)
more information.
{ WARNING 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) { WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of by holding in the button on the
the vehicle if the shift lever is not lever and pushing the lever all It can be dangerous to leave the
fully in P (Park) with the parking the way toward the front of the vehicle with the engine running.
vehicle. The vehicle could move suddenly
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine 3. Press the Acc. button (ignition if the shift lever is not fully in
running, the vehicle can move switch) to turn the engine off. P (Park) with the parking brake
suddenly. You or others could be firmly set. And, if you leave the
injured. To be sure the vehicle will vehicle with the engine running,
not move, even when you are on it could overheat and even catch
fairly level ground, use the steps fire. You or others could be
that follow. injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
Driving and Operating 9-25
If you have to leave the vehicle Torque Lock (Automatic If torque lock does occur, you may
with the engine running, be sure Transmission) need to have another vehicle push
the vehicle is in P (Park) and the yours a little uphill to take some of
parking brake is firmly set before If you are parking on a hill and you the pressure from the transmission
you leave it. After you have moved do not shift the transmission into parking pawl, so you can pull the
the shift lever into P (Park), hold P (Park) properly, the weight of the shift lever out of P (Park).
down the regular brake pedal. See if vehicle may put too much force on
the parking pawl in the
you can move the shift lever away
transmission. You may find it difficult
Shifting Out of Park
from P (Park) without first pushing
the button on the lever. If you can, it to pull the shift lever out of P (Park). Shift lock release prevents shifting
means that the shift lever was not This is called “torque lock.” out of P (Park) unless the vehicle is
fully locked into P (Park). To prevent torque lock, set the running or in accessory mode and
parking brake and then shift into the brake pedal is applied.
P (Park) properly before you leave The shift lock release is always
the driver seat. To find out how, see functional except in the case of an
“Shifting Into P (Park)” previously in uncharged or low voltage (less than
this section. 9‐volt) battery. See Jump Starting
When you are ready to drive, move on page 10‑82 for more information.
the shift lever out of P (Park) before
you release the parking brake.
9-26 Driving and Operating
To shift out of P (Park) use the Parking (Manual Engine Exhaust
following:
Transmission)
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Before you get out of the vehicle, { WARNING
2. Release the parking brake. See move the shift lever into R (Reverse)
Parking Brake on page 9‑35. and firmly apply the parking brake. Engine exhaust contains carbon
Once the shift lever has been monoxide (CO) which cannot be
3. Press the shift lever button. seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
placed into R (Reverse) with the
4. Move the shift lever to the clutch pedal pressed in, you can can cause unconsciousness and
desired position. turn the ignition off and release the even death.
If you still are unable to shift out clutch. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
of P (Park): . The vehicle idles in areas
1. Fully release the shift lever Parking Over Things with poor ventilation (parking
button. That Burn garages, tunnels, deep snow
2. While holding down the brake that may block underbody
pedal, press the shift lever { WARNING airflow or tail pipes).
button again. . The exhaust smells or
Things that can burn could touch
3. Move the shift lever to the sounds strange or different.
hot exhaust parts under the
desired position. vehicle and ignite. Do not park . The exhaust system leaks
If you still cannot move the shift over papers, leaves, dry grass, due to corrosion or damage.
lever from P (Park), consult your or other things that can burn. . The vehicle exhaust system
dealer or a professional towing has been modified, damaged
service. or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 9-27
Running the Vehicle
WARNING (Continued)
While Parked
{ WARNING
. There are holes or openings It can be dangerous to get out
It is better not to park with the
in the vehicle body from of the vehicle if the automatic
engine running. But if you ever have
damage or after market transmission shift lever is not fully
to, here are some things to know.
modifications that are not in P (Park) with the parking brake
completely sealed. firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If unusual fumes are detected or
{ WARNING Do not leave the vehicle when
if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed the engine is running unless you
coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can
. Drive it only with the windows
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others
completely down.
contains carbon monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
. Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when
immediately. you are on fairly level ground,
It can cause unconsciousness
Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and
engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park).
area such as a garage or a has no fresh air ventilation. For
building that has no fresh air more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be sure
ventilation. Exhaust on page 9‑26. the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) on page 9‑24.
9-28 Driving and Operating
Automatic { WARNING
P (Park) when the vehicle is
running. If you cannot shift out of
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully way into P (Park) as you maintain
in P (Park) with the parking brake brake application. Then press the
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. shift lever button and move the shift
Do not leave the vehicle when the lever into another gear. See Shifting
engine is running unless you Out of Park on page 9‑25.
have to. If you have left the R (Reverse): Use this gear to
engine running, the vehicle can back up.
move suddenly. You or others Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
could be injured. To be sure the while the vehicle is moving
vehicle will not move, even when forward could damage the
you are on fairly level ground, transmission. The repairs would
always set the parking brake and not be covered by the vehicle
There are several different positions move the shift lever to P (Park). warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
for the shift lever. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic after the vehicle is stopped.
P (Park): This position locks the Transmission) on page 9‑24.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
rear wheels. It is the best position to get out of snow, ice, or sand without
use when starting the engine Be sure the shift lever is fully in damaging the transmission, see If
because the vehicle cannot move P (Park) before starting the engine. the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑13.
easily.
The vehicle has an automatic N (Neutral): In this position, the
transmission shift lock control engine does not connect with the
system. You have to fully apply the wheels. To restart the engine when
brakes and then press the shift lever the vehicle is already moving, use
button before you can shift from
Driving and Operating 9-29
N (Neutral) only. If the vehicle needs power for passing, push the pedal
towing, see Towing the Vehicle on down to achieve the desired level of
page 10‑86. acceleration.
Downshifting the transmission in
{ WARNING slippery road conditions could result
in skidding. See “Skidding” under
Shifting into a drive gear while the Loss of Control on page 9‑6.
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is S (Sport Mode): When in
firmly on the brake pedal, the S (Sport Mode), the transmission will
vehicle could move very rapidly. work as an automatic until you use
the Manual Paddle Shift Controls,
You could lose control and hit
which activates driver manual gear
people or objects. Do not shift The Manual Paddle Shift system is
selection. See Manual Mode on
into a drive gear while the engine page 9‑29. While in S (Sport Mode), activated from S (Sport Mode) by
is running at high speed. the transmission will have more pushing the paddle, above the
noticeable upshifts for sportier steering wheel spokes, to up-shift
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) vehicle performance. to the next gear, or pulling on the
or N (Neutral) with the engine paddle, behind the steering wheel
running at high speed may Manual Mode spokes, to down-shift to the
damage the transmission. The next gear.
repairs would not be covered by Manual Paddle Shift When accelerating the vehicle from
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the While in S (Sport Mode), the paddles a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
engine is not running at high located on the steering wheel can you may want to shift to 2 (Second)
speed when shifting the vehicle. be used to manually up-shift or or 3 (Third) gear. A higher gear
D (Drive): This position is for down-shift the transmission. allows you to gain more traction on
normal driving. It provides the best slippery surfaces. If traction control
fuel economy. If you need more is active, upshifts are delayed to
increase your control of the vehicle.
9-30 Driving and Operating
See Traction Control System (TCS) vehicle slows. The transmission The Manual Paddle Shift system
on page 9‑36 Traction Control will select 2 (Second) gear as the will not allow either an up-shift or a
System (TCS). vehicle stops. From a stop, the down-shift if the vehicle speed is too
The Manual Paddle Shift system vehicle will start from and hold fast or too slow, nor will it allow a
can be deactivated by moving the 2 (Second) gear unless the driver start from 4 (Fourth) or higher gear.
shifter from S (Sport Mode) back manually paddle shifts into a If up-shifting does not occur when
to D (Drive), or by holding either different gear or selects D (Drive). needed, vehicle speed will be
up‐shift paddle for more than The driver can select 1 (First) gear limited to protect the engine.
one second. for maximum acceleration from
a stop. When the transmission gear does
The driver may choose to briefly not respond to a shift change, the
activate the Manual Paddle Shift DIC will show an X over the gear
system while in D (Drive). Tapping display.
either the upshift or downshift
controls will place the transmission
in Manual Paddle Shift mode. The
driver may then exit Manual Paddle
Shift mode by holding either upshift
When using the Manual Paddle
control for two seconds. The system
Shift feature while in S (Sport Mode)
will return to automatic shifting after
, the current gear will be displayed
10 seconds of cruising at a steady When a requested shift is denied
in the Driver Information (DIC),
speed, or when the vehicle comes due to the speed restrictions shown,
or the Head-Up Display (HUD), if the
to a stop. the DIC will momentarily show an X
vehicle has either of these features.
While the Manual Paddle Shift over the gear display and a chime
If the vehicle has a Head-Up will sound.
gear selection system is active,
Display (HUD), see Head-Up
the transmission will automatically
Display (HUD) on page 5‑31.
downshift through the gears as the
Driving and Operating 9-31
If the vehicle has a HUD, and the To prevent damage to the To prevent damage to the
transmission gear does not respond powertrain, Manual Paddle powertrain, Manual Paddle
to a shift change, a chime will sound downshifts to a lower gear cannot downshifts to a lower gear cannot
and the HUD will momentarily show be done above certain speeds. be done above certain speeds.
an X over the gear display. The maximum speed allowed for The maximum speed allowed for
Manual Paddle Shift operation is downshifting of gears 1 (First) downshifting of gears 1 (First)
available for use with Cruise through 4 (Fourth) are: through 4 (Fourth) are:
Control. See Cruise Control on . Into 4 (Fourth) gear over . Into 4 (Fourth) gear over
page 9‑45 Cruise Control for more 250 km/h (155 mph). 234 km/h (145 mph).
information. . Into 3 (Third) gear over . Into 3 (Third) gear over 176 km/h
The vehicle speeds required for 188 km/h (117 mph). (109 mph).
Manual Paddle Shift up-shifts . Into 2 (Second) gear over . Into 2 (Second) gear over
depend on several vehicle inputs, 120 km/h (75 mph). 113 km/h (70 mph).
which will vary the allowed up-shift
speed by a few km/h (mph). . Into 1 (First) gear over . Into 1 (First) gear over 64 km/h
68 km/h (42 mph). (40 mph).
For vehicles with a 2.56:1 Axle
Ratio (RPO GM8) For vehicles with a 2.73:1 Axle If the driver does not request
Ratio (RPO GU2) an upshift as the engine speed
. Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear
.
approaches fuel shut off rpm, the
require approximately 35 km/h Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear engine speed will be limited to
(22 mph). require approximately 31 km/h protect the engine. See Tachometer
(19 mph). on page 5‑11 for more information.
. Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require
approximately 45 km/h (28 mph). . Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require
approximately 39 km/h (24 mph).
. Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear
require approximately 65 km/h . Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear
(41 mph). require approximately 57 km/h
(35 mph).
9-32 Driving and Operating
Manual Transmission You can shift into 1 (First) when
you are going less than 64 km/h
Neutral: Use this position when
you start or idle the engine. The
(40 mph). If you come to a complete shift lever is in Neutral when it is
stop and it is hard to shift into centered in the shift pattern, not in
1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral any gear.
and let up on the clutch. Press the R (Reverse): To back up, press
clutch pedal back down. Then shift down the clutch pedal and shift into
into 1 (First). R (Reverse). Just apply pressure
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal to get the lever past 5 (Fifth) and
as you let up on the accelerator 6 (Sixth) into R (Reverse). Let up
pedal and shift into 2 (Second). on the clutch pedal slowly while
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pressing the accelerator pedal.
pedal as you press the accelerator The six-speed manual transmission
pedal. has a feature that allows you
This is the shift pattern for the 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) to safely shift into R (Reverse)
six-speed manual transmission. and 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third), while the vehicle is rolling at less
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the than 5 km/h (3 mph). You will be
Here is how to operate the same way you do for 2 (Second). locked out if you try to shift into
transmission: Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal you press the accelerator pedal. moving faster than 5 km/h (3 mph).
and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly To stop, let up on the accelerator
let up on the clutch pedal as you pedal and press the brake pedal.
press the accelerator pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Driving and Operating 9-33
Shift Speeds This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear for the best fuel
(Manual Transmission) economy.
Manual Transmission Recommended
{ WARNING Shift Speeds in km/h (mph)
If you skip a gear when you Acceleration Shift Speed
Engine
downshift, you could lose control 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift All Engines 24 (15) 40 (25) 64 (40) 72 (45) 80 (50)
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
If the engine speed drops below One to Four Shift Light
900 rpm, or if the engine is not (Manual Transmission)
running smoothly, you should
downshift to the next lower gear.
You may have to downshift two
or more gears to keep the engine
running smoothly or for good
engine performance.
Notice: When shifting gears, do
not move the shift lever around When this light comes on, you can
unnecessarily. This may damage only shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)
the transmission. Shift directly instead of 1 (First) to 2 (Second).
into the next gear.
See One-to-Four Shift Light (Manual
Transmission) on page 5‑22 for
more information.
9-34 Driving and Operating
Downshifting The six-speed transmission has a Brakes
(Manual Transmission) spring that centers the shift lever
near 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth). This
Do not downshift into the gear spring helps you know which gear Antilock Brake
shown below at a speed greater you are in when you are shifting. Be System (ABS)
than shown in the table: careful when shifting from 1 (First)
This vehicle has the Antilock
1 (First) 80 km/h (50 mph) to 2 (Second) or downshifting from
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
2 (Second) 119 km/h (74 mph) 6 (Sixth) to 5 (Fifth). The spring will
electronic braking system that helps
try to pull the shift lever toward
prevent a braking skid.
163 km/h 4 (Fourth) and 3 (Third). Make sure
3 (Third)
(101 mph) you move the lever into 2 (Second) When the engine is started and the
or 5 (Fifth). If you let the shift lever vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
209 km/h
4 (Fourth) move in the direction of the pulling, checks itself. A momentary motor or
(130 mph)
you may end up shifting from clicking noise might be heard while
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) or from this test is going on, and it might
Notice: If you skip more than one even be noticed that the brake
6 (Sixth) to 3 (Third).
gear when you downshift, or if pedal moves a little. This is normal.
you race the engine when you If the driver does not upshift as the
release the clutch pedal while engine speed approaches fuel shut
downshifting, you could damage off RPM, the engine speed will be
the engine, clutch, driveshaft or limited to protect the engine. See
the transmission. Do not skip Tachometer on page 5‑11 for more
gears or race the engine when information.
downshifting.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑22.
Driving and Operating 9-35
If driving safely on a wet road stopping distance. If you get too Parking Brake
and it becomes necessary to slam close to the vehicle in front of you,
on the brakes and continue braking there will not be enough time to The parking brake lever is located
to avoid a sudden obstacle, a apply the brakes if that vehicle to the right of the center console.
computer senses that the wheels suddenly slows or stops. Always To set the parking brake, hold the
are slowing down. If one of the leave enough room up ahead to brake pedal down. Pull the parking
wheels is about to stop rolling, the stop, even with ABS. brake lever up. If the ignition is on,
computer will separately work the the brake system warning light will
brakes at each wheel. Using ABS
come on.
ABS can change the brake pressure Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
To release the parking brake, hold
to each wheel, as required, faster the brake pedal down firmly and let
the brake pedal down. Then push
than any driver could. This can help ABS work. You might hear the ABS
the release button in as you move
the driver steer around the obstacle pump or motor operating and feel
the parking brake lever all the
while braking hard. the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
way down.
normal.
As the brakes are applied, the Notice: Driving with the parking
computer keeps receiving updates Braking in Emergencies brake on can overheat the brake
on wheel speed and controls ABS allows the driver to steer and system and cause premature
braking pressure accordingly. brake at the same time. In many wear or damage to brake system
Remember: ABS does not change emergencies, steering can help parts. Make sure that the parking
the time needed to get a foot up to more than even the very best brake is fully released and the
the brake pedal or always decrease braking. brake warning light is off before
driving.
9-36 Driving and Operating
Brake Assist Ride Control Systems If cruise control is being used when
TCS begins to limit wheel spin, the
This vehicle has a brake assist cruise control will automatically
feature designed to assist the driver Traction Control disengage. Cruise control may be
in stopping or decreasing vehicle System (TCS) reengaged when road conditions
speed in emergency driving allow. See Cruise Control on
conditions. This feature uses the The vehicle has a Traction Control
page 9‑45.
stability system hydraulic brake System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
control module to supplement the This is especially useful in slippery
power brake system under road conditions. The system
conditions where the driver has operates only if it senses that the
quickly and forcefully applied the rear wheels are spinning too much
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly or are beginning to lose traction.
stop or slow down the vehicle. The When this happens, the system
stability system hydraulic brake works the rear brakes and reduces
control module increases brake engine power (by closing the throttle The SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
pressure at each corner of the and managing engine spark) to limit message and the TCS warning light
vehicle until the ABS activates. wheel spin. will come on if there is a problem
Minor brake pedal pulsation or with TCS. See Ride Control System
The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE
pedal movement during this time Messages on page 5‑44.
message displays on the Driver
is normal and the driver should Information Center (DIC) when TCS When this light and the SERVICE
continue to apply the brake pedal is limiting wheel spin. See Ride TRACTION SYSTEM message are
as the driving situation dictates. Control System Messages on on, the system will not limit wheel
The brake assist feature will page 5‑44. The system may be spin. Adjust your driving
automatically disengage when the heard or felt while it is working, but accordingly.
brake pedal is released or brake this is normal.
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Driving and Operating 9-37
TCS automatically comes on Notice: When traction control accomplished by selectively
whenever the vehicle is started. is turned off, or Competitive applying any one of the vehicle's
To limit wheel spin, especially in Driving Mode is active, it is brakes.
slippery road conditions, the system possible to lose traction. If you The ACTIVE HANDLING message
should always be left on. TCS can attempt to shift with the drive will come on when the system is
be turned off if needed. wheels spinning with a loss of operating. See Ride Control System
traction, it is possible to cause Messages on page 5‑44 for more
damage to the transmission. Do information. The system may be
not attempt to shift when the heard or felt while it is working. This
drive wheels do not have traction. is normal.
Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See the
warranty book for additional
To turn the system off, press the information.
button located on the console. Adding non‐dealer accessories can
The system can be turned on or off affect the vehicle's performance.
at any time by pressing the ACTIVE See Accessories and Modifications
HANDLING button. The DIC will on page 10‑4 for more information. The SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING
display the appropriate message SYSTEM message is displayed, the
when the button is pushed. Active Handling System instrument cluster light comes on,
The Active Handling System is a and a sound is heard if there is a
computer controlled system that problem with the system.
helps the driver maintain directional See Ride Control System Messages
control of the vehicle in difficult on page 5‑44 for more information.
driving conditions. This is
9-38 Driving and Operating
When this light and the SERVICE The DIC will display the appropriate
ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM message when the button is
message are on, the system is not pushed.
operational. Adjust your driving If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
accordingly. system detects a flat tire and the
The Active Handling System comes Driver Information Center (DIC)
on automatically whenever the To turn the system off, press displays TIRE FLAT, or if the TPM
vehicle is started. To help maintain the Active Handling button on system is malfunctioning and the
directional control of the vehicle, the the console until TRACTION DIC displays SERVICE TIRE
system should always be left on. SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING MONITOR, the Active Handling
The system can be turned off if SYSTEM — OFF is displayed. System will be affected as follows:
needed. If the Active Handling The system can be turned back on . The Active Handling System
System is turned off, the Traction at any time by pressing the button. cannot be turned off by the
Control System will also be turned driver.
off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
. If the Active Handling System is
off, it will be turned on
automatically.
. Competitive Driving Mode or
Performance Traction
Management is unavailable.
. The Active Handling System will
feel different in aiding and
maintaining directional control.
Driving and Operating 9-39
Competitive Driving Mode Notice: Do not attempt to
shift when the drive wheels
Competitive Driving Mode, are spinning and do not have
Performance Traction Management, traction. This may cause damage
and Launch Control are systems to the transmission. Damage
designed to allow increased caused by misuse of the vehicle
performance while accelerating and/ is not covered by the vehicle
or cornering. This is accomplished This light is on when the vehicle is
warranty. See the warranty book in the Competitive Driving Mode.
by regulating and optimizing the for additional information.
engine, brakes, and suspension This optional handling mode can be
performance. These modes are Competitive Driving Mode selected by pressing the ACTIVE
for use at a closed course race (Except ZR1) HANDLING button on the console
track and are not intended for quickly two times. COMPETITIVE
Competitive Driving Mode allows
use on public roads. They will DRIVING MODE displays in the
full engine power while the Active
not compensate for a driver’s Driver Information Center (DIC).
Handling System helps maintain
inexperience or lack of familiarity See Ride Control System Messages
directional control of the vehicle by
with the race track. Drivers who on page 5‑44 for more information.
selective brake application. In this
prefer to allow the system to have
mode, TCS is off and Launch When the ACTIVE HANDLING
more control of the engine, brake,
Control is available. Adjust your button is pressed again, the Active
and suspension are advised to turn
driving style to account for the Handling and TCS systems are on.
the normal traction control and
available engine power. See The TRACTION SYSTEM AND
active handling systems on. See
“Launch Control” later in this ACTIVE HANDLING-ON message
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
section. displays briefly in the DIC and a
on page 9‑7 for more information.
chime is heard.
9-40 Driving and Operating
Performance Traction This optional handling mode
Management (ZR1) can be selected by pressing the
ACTIVE HANDLING button on the
Performance Traction Management console quickly two times. PERF
integrates the Traction Control, TRAC 1 - WET ACTIVE HANDLING
Active Handling, and Selective ON displays in the DIC.
Ride Control systems to provide
improved and consistent To experience the performance
performance when cornering. The benefit of this system, after entering
amount of available engine power is a curve and at the point where
based on the mode selected, track the driver would normally start
conditions, driver skill, and the to increase acceleration, the
radius of each corner. accelerator pedal can be fully
pressed. The Performance Traction To select a mode while in
Management system will modify the Performance Traction Management,
level of engine power for a smooth turn the knob located on the
and consistent corner exit. console.
The Performance Traction
Management system contains five
modes. These modes are selected
This light is on when the vehicle is by turning the Selective Ride
in the Performance Traction Control/Performance Traction
Management Mode. Management knob on the center
console. The driver scrolls up or
down through modes 1–5 by
rotating the knob to the right or left.
Driving and Operating 9-41
The following is a DIC display PERF TRAC 3 – SPORT PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVE
description and the recommended ACTIVE HANDLING ON HANDLING OFF
usage of each mode: . For use by drivers who are . For use by experienced drivers
PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVE familiar with the track who are familiar with the track
HANDLING ON . Dry conditions only . Dry conditions only
. Intended for all driver skill levels . Requires more driving skill than . Requires more driving skill than
. Wet or damp conditions mode 2 in other modes
only — not intended for use in . Active Handling is on and more . Active Handling is off and engine
heavy rain or standing water engine power is available than in power is available for maximum
. Active Handling is on and engine mode 2 cornering speed
power is reduced based on Press and release the ACTIVE
PERF TRAC 4 – SPORT
conditions HANDLING button to turn off
ACTIVE HANDLING OFF
PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVE Performance Traction Management
. For use by drivers who are and return to the Active Handling
HANDLING ON familiar with the track and Traction Control Systems. The
. For use by less experienced . Dry conditions only TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE
drivers or while learning a new HANDLING-ON message displays
track
. Requires more driving skill than briefly in the DIC and a chime is
modes 2 or 3 heard.
. Dry conditions only
. Active Handling is off and
. Active Handling is on and engine available engine power is the
power is slightly reduced same as mode 3
9-42 Driving and Operating
Launch Control Launch Control is only available A smooth, quick release of the
when the following criteria are met: clutch, while maintaining the fully
A Launch Control feature is
. Competitive Driving Mode is pressed accelerator pedal, will
available, within Competitive Driving
selected (except ZR1) or any manage wheel slip. Complete
Mode (except ZR1) or Performance
of the Performance Traction shifts as described in Manual
Traction Management (ZR1), on
Management modes are Transmission on page 9‑32.
vehicles with a manual transmission
to allow the driver to achieve high selected (ZR1). The TCS light After the vehicle is launched, the
levels of vehicle acceleration in comes on the instrument panel system continues in Competitive
a straight line. Launch Control is and the appropriate DIC Mode (except ZR1) or Performance
a form of traction control that message displays. Traction Management (ZR1).
manages tire spin while launching . The vehicle is not moving. Competitive Driving Mode,
the vehicle. This feature is intended Performance Traction Management,
for use during closed course race
. The steering wheel is pointing
straight. and Launch Control are systems
events where consistent zero to designed for a closed course race
sixty and quarter mile times are . The clutch is pressed and the track and not intended for use on
desirable. vehicle is in first gear. public roads. The systems are not
. The accelerator pedal is rapidly intended to compensate for lack of
applied to wide open throttle. driver experience or familiarity with
the race track.
The Launch Control feature will
initially limit engine speed as the
driver rapidly applies the accelerator
pedal to wide open throttle.
Driving and Operating 9-43
Limited-Slip Rear Axle Except ZR1 The setting can be changed at any
time. Based on road conditions,
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle steering wheel angle, and the
can give more traction on snow, vehicle speed, the system
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works automatically adjusts to provide
like a standard axle most of the the best handling while providing
time, but when traction is low, this a smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
feature allows the drive wheel with modes will feel similar on a smooth
the most traction to move the road. Select a new setting whenever
vehicle. driving conditions change.
Selective Ride Control Three Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages (SERVICE
The vehicle may have a ride control RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
system called Magnetic Selective INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM
Ride Control. The system provides This knob is located on the center SPEED 129 KM/H (80 MPH) display
the following performance benefits: console. Turn it to select the when a malfunction occurs with the
. Reduced Impact Harshness suspension of your choice. Selective Ride Control system.
Refer to Ride Control System
. Improved Road Isolation TOUR: Use for normal city and Messages on page 5‑44 for more
highway driving. This setting information.
. Improved High-Speed Stability
provides a smooth, soft ride.
. Improved Handling Response
SPORT: Use where road conditions
. Better Control of Body Ride or personal preference demand
Motions more control. This setting provides
more “feel,” or response to the road
conditions.
9-44 Driving and Operating
ZR1 SPORT: Use where road conditions When this mode is selected,
or personal preference demand turning the Selective Ride knob
more control. This setting provides will change the Performance
more “feel,” or response to the road Traction Management mode and
conditions. the suspension setting will be
The setting can be changed at any determined automatically. See
time. Based on road conditions, Competitive Driving Mode on
steering wheel angle, and the page 9‑39 for more information.
vehicle speed, the system Three Driver Information Center
automatically adjusts to provide (DIC) messages (SERVICE
the best handling while providing a RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
smooth ride. The Tour and Sport INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM
modes will feel similar on a smooth SPEED 129 KM/H (80 MPH) display
road. Select a new setting whenever when a malfunction occurs with
This knob is located on the center driving conditions change. the Selective Ride Control system.
console. Turn it to select the The Selective Ride knob will not Refer to Ride Control System
suspension of your choice. The display the Tour or Sport setting Messages on page 5‑44 for more
knob will return to the center when the Performance Traction information.
position when released. The Management mode is selected.
switch will illuminate the current
suspension setting.
TOUR: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
Driving and Operating 9-45
Cruise Control If the vehicle is in cruise control, + (Resume/Accelerate): Makes
and has the Traction Control the vehicle accelerate or resume a
With cruise control, a speed of System (TCS), and it begins to previously set speed.
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can limit wheel spin, the cruise control
be maintained without keeping your automatically disengages. See T (Set): Press this button at the
foot on the accelerator. Cruise Traction Control System (TCS) on end of the lever to set the speed.
control does not work at speeds page 9‑36. When road conditions Setting Cruise Control
below about 40 km/h (25 mph). allow the cruise control to be safely
used again, it can be turned If the cruise button is on when not in
Cruise control will not work if the use, it could get bumped and go into
parking brake is set, or if the master back on.
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cylinder brake fluid level is low. cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
{ WARNING 1. Move the cruise control switch
Cruise control can be dangerous to on.
where you cannot drive safely at 2. Get up to the speed desired.
a steady speed. So, do not use
3. Press T at the end of the lever
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic. and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
Cruise control can be dangerous
pedal.
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can When the cruise control is engaged,
cause excessive wheel slip, and the CRUISE SET TO XX MPH
The vehicle has cruise control.
you could lose control. Do not use message displays on the Driver
cruise control on slippery roads. 9 (Off): Turns the system off. Information Center (DIC). See
R (On): Turns the system on. Cruise Control Messages on
page 5‑38.
9-46 Driving and Operating
Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Reducing Speed While Using
If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control Cruise Control
desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is If the cruise control system is
are applied, the cruise control is already activated, already activated,
disengaged without erasing the set . Use the accelerator pedal to get . Press and hold the set button
speed from memory. until the lower speed desired is
to the higher speed. Press J at
Once the vehicle speed reaches the end of the lever, then release reached, then release it.
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, the button and the accelerator . To slow down in small amounts,
move the cruise control switch pedal. If the accelerator pedal is briefly press J. Each time this
briefly from R to S. The vehicle held longer than 60 seconds, is done, the vehicle goes about
returns to the previous set speed cruise control will turn off. 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
and stays there. . Move the cruise switch from R to Passing Another Vehicle While
If the switch is held at resume/ S. Hold it there until desired Using Cruise Control
accelerate, the vehicle keeps going speed is reached, and then
faster until the switch is released or release the switch. Use the accelerator pedal to
the brake is applied. Do not hold the increase the vehicle speed. When
switch at resume/accelerate, unless
. To increase the vehicle speed in you take your foot off the pedal,
you want the vehicle to go faster. small amounts, move the switch the vehicle will slow down to the
briefly to S. Each time this is previous set cruise speed.
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Driving and Operating 9-47
Using Cruise Control on Hills Cruise Control in Sport and
. If driving in hilly terrain, cruise
Manual Paddle Shift Gear control may not be able to
How well the cruise control works maintain vehicle speed if an
on hills depends upon the vehicle Selection
up-shift or down-shift is not
speed, load, and the steepness When the vehicle is in S (Sport) selected by the driver. While
of the hills. When going up steep and the manual paddle shift controls driving on hilly terrain and cruise
hills, you might want to step on are not being used, cruise control control is active with a manual
the accelerator pedal to maintain operates in the same manner as paddle shift gear selection, the
the vehicle speed. When going D (Drive). driver must select the proper
downhill, you might have to brake When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and gear for the terrain or select
or shift to a lower gear to keep the the manual paddle shift controls are D (Drive) on the gear range
vehicle's speed down. When the being used, cruise control operates selector for full automatic
brakes are applied the cruise control as follows: transmission operation.
is disengaged.
. If cruise control is active and a
gear is selected with the manual
paddle shift controls, the vehicle
speed is maintained in the
driver selected gear and will
not automatically up-shift or
down-shift the transmission
while the driver’s gear selection
is active.
9-48 Driving and Operating
Ending Cruise Control Fuel
. To disengage cruise control,
Use of the recommended fuel is
step lightly on the brake pedal.
an important part of the proper
If the vehicle has a manual
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
transmission, lightly tap the
keep the engine clean and maintain
clutch to end the cruise control
optimum vehicle performance, we
session.
recommend the use of gasoline
. To turn off the cruise control advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
system, move the cruise control Gasoline.
switch to 9. Look for the TOP TIER label on the
When cruise control is disengaged, fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
the CRUISE DISENGAGED enhanced detergency standards The eighth digit of the Vehicle
message displays on the Driver developed by auto companies. A Identification Number (VIN) shows
Information Center (DIC). See list of marketers providing TOP the code letter or number that
Cruise Control Messages on TIER Detergent Gasoline can be identifies the vehicle's engine.
page 5‑38. found at www.toptiergas.com. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Erasing Speed Memory
Identification Number (VIN) on
The cruise control set speed is page 12‑1.
erased from memory by moving
the switch to 9 or if the ignition
is turned off.
Driving and Operating 9-49
Recommended Fuel If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine Gasoline Specifications
(VIN Code T) or the 7.0L V8 engine
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code E), use premium
(U.S. and Canada Only)
(VIN Code W), use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted At a minimum, gasoline should meet
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. For ASTM specification D 4814 in the
octane rating of 91 or higher. You best performance, use premium United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or
can also use regular unleaded unleaded gasoline with a posted 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
gasoline rated at 87 octane or octane rating of 93. In an contain an octane-enhancing
higher, but the vehicle's acceleration emergency, you can use regular additive called
could be slightly reduced, and a unleaded gasoline with an octane methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
slight audible knocking noise, rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
commonly referred to as spark fuel is used, do not perform any against the use of gasolines
knock, might be heard. If the octane aggressive driving maneuvers such containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
is less than 87, a heavy knocking as wide open throttle applications. on page 9‑50 for additional
noise might be heard when driving. You might also hear audible spark information.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated knock during acceleration. Refill the
at 87 octane or higher as soon as tank with premium fuel as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you could possible to avoid damaging the
damage the engine. If heavy engine. If heavy knocking is heard
knocking is heard when using when using gasoline rated at
gasoline rated at 87 octane or 91 octane or higher, the engine
higher, the engine needs service. needs service.
9-50 Driving and Operating
California Fuel Fuels in Foreign Fuel Additives
Requirements Countries To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
If the vehicle is certified to meet Never use leaded gasoline or any in the United States are now
California Emissions Standards, it is other fuel not recommended in the required to contain additives that
designed to operate on fuels that previous text on fuel. Costly repairs help prevent engine and fuel system
meet California specifications. See caused by use of improper fuel deposits from forming, allowing the
the underhood emission control would not be covered by the vehicle emission control system to work
label. If this fuel is not available in warranty. properly. In most cases, nothing
states adopting California Emissions should have to be added to the fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask However, some gasolines contain
Standards, the vehicle will operate an auto club, or contact a major oil
satisfactorily on fuels meeting only the minimum amount of
company that does business in the additive required to meet U.S.
federal specifications, but emission country where you will be driving.
control system performance might Environmental Protection Agency
be affected. The malfunction regulations. To help keep fuel
indicator lamp could turn on and the injectors and intake valves clean
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. and avoid problems due to dirty
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on injectors or valves, look for gasoline
page 5‑18. If this occurs, return to that is advertised as TOP TIER
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
If it is determined that the condition TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
is caused by the type of fuel used, ensure gasoline meets enhanced
repairs might not be covered by the detergency standards developed
vehicle warranty. by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
Driving and Operating 9-51
For customers who do not use TOP However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Some gasolines that are
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, other fuels containing more than not reformulated for low emissions
one bottle of GM Fuel System 10% ethanol must not be used in can contain an octane-enhancing
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel vehicles that were not designed for additive called
tank at every engine oil change, those fuels. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
can help clean deposits from fuel Notice: This vehicle was not tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel designed for fuel that contains where you buy gasoline whether the
System Treatment PLUS is the only methanol. Do not use fuel fuel contains MMT. We recommend
gasoline additive recommended by containing methanol. It can against the use of such gasolines.
General Motors. It is available at corrode metal parts in the fuel Fuels containing MMT can reduce
your dealer. system and also damage plastic spark plug life and affect emission
Gasolines containing oxygenates, and rubber parts. That damage control system performance. The
such as ethers and ethanol, and would not be covered under the malfunction indicator lamp might
reformulated gasolines might be vehicle warranty. turn on. If this occurs, return to your
available in your area. We dealer for service.
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
9-52 Driving and Operating
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep The tethered fuel cap is located The fuel door release button is
sparks, flames, and smoking behind a hinged fuel door on the located on the instrument panel to
materials away from fuel. Do not driver side of the vehicle. the left of the steering wheel. Push
leave the fuel pump unattended the button to release the fuel door.
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
Driving and Operating 9-53
When replacing the fuel cap, turn
{ WARNING it clockwise until it clicks. Make
sure the cap is fully installed. The
Fuel can spray out on you if you diagnostic system can determine if
open the fuel cap too quickly. the fuel cap has been left off or
If you spill fuel and then improperly installed. This would
something ignites it, you could allow fuel to evaporate into the
be badly burned. This spray can atmosphere. See Malfunction
happen if the tank is nearly full, Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18.
and is more likely in hot weather.
The CHECK GAS CAP message
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
displays on the Driver Information
for any hiss noise to stop. Then Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
unscrew the cap all the way. properly installed. See Fuel System
There is also a manual fuel door
release tab. It is located against the Messages on page 5‑41 for more
upper trim in the rear compartment Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not information.
on the driver side of the vehicle. Pull top off or overfill the tank and wait
the tab to release the fuel door. a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
slowly counterclockwise.
surfaces as soon as possible. See
While refueling, let the cap hang by Exterior Care on page 10‑87.
the tether below the fuel fill opening.
9-54 Driving and Operating
Filling a Portable Fuel
{ WARNING Container
WARNING (Continued)
If a fire starts while you are
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill
by shutting off the pump or by Never fill a portable fuel container opening before operating the
notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle. Static nozzle. Contact should be
Leave the area immediately. electricity discharge from the maintained until the filling is
container can ignite the fuel complete.
Notice: If you need a new fuel vapor. You can be badly burned . Do not smoke while
cap, be sure to get the right type. and the vehicle damaged if this pumping fuel.
Your dealer can get one for you. occurs. To help avoid injury to . Do not use a cellular phone
If you get the wrong type, it may you and others: while pumping fuel.
not fit properly. This may cause . Dispense fuel only into
the malfunction indicator lamp to approved containers.
light and may damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
. Do not fill a container while
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on it is inside a vehicle, in a
page 5‑18. vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 9-55
Towing Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if
Add-Ons the vehicle is not operating.
General Towing
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Information Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
The vehicle is neither designed nor Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
intended to tow a trailer. Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 3‑34 and Adding
electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
you check with your dealer first. Vehicle on page 3‑35.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
9-56 Driving and Operating
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Park Brake and P (Park)
Vehicle Care Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-45
Manual Transmission Wiper Blade
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
General Information Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Windshield Replacement . . . 10-47
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-24
California Proposition Cooling System (Engine) . . . 10-28 Headlamp Aiming
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Cooling System Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
California Perchlorate (Intercooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Bulb Replacement
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Accessories and Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-34
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Overheated Engine High Intensity Discharge
Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Protection (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Vehicle Checks Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Headlamps, Front Turn
Doing Your Own Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-36 Signal and Parking
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Engine Compartment Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-22 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-44
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
10-2 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Jump Starting
Electrical System Tire Pressure for High-Speed Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Fuses and Circuit Tire Pressure Monitor Towing
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Engine Compartment Fuse Tire Pressure Monitor Recreational Vehicle
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Instrument Panel Fuse Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Appearance Care
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
When It Is Time for New
Wheels and Tires Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Different Size Tires and
Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Uniform Tire Quality
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-61 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Tire Terminology and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-78
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Vehicle Care 10-3
General Information California Proposition California Perchlorate
For service and parts needs, 65 Warning Materials Requirements
visit your dealer. You will receive Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag
and supported service people. known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
Genuine GM parts have one of cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in
these marks: other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials.
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary.
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Accessories and Damage to vehicle components When you go to your GM dealer
resulting from the installation or use and ask for GM Accessories, you
Modifications of non‐GM certified parts, including will know that GM-trained and
Adding non‐dealer accessories control module modifications, is not supported service technicians will
to the vehicle can affect vehicle covered under the terms of the perform the work using genuine GM
performance and safety, including vehicle warranty and may affect Accessories.
such things as airbags, braking, remaining warranty coverage for Also, see Adding Equipment to the
stability, ride and handling, affected parts. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
emissions systems, aerodynamics, GM Accessories are designed to page 3‑35.
durability, and electronic systems complement and function with other
like antilock brakes, traction control, systems on the vehicle. Your GM
and stability control. Some of these dealer can accessorize the vehicle
accessories could even cause using genuine GM Accessories.
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Lifting the Vehicle Notice: Lifting your vehicle
{ WARNING improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly
{ WARNING Getting under a vehicle when it repairs not covered by your
is jacked up is dangerous. If the warranty. To lift your vehicle
Lifting a vehicle can cause an vehicle slips off the jack, you properly, follow the advice in
injury. The vehicle can slip off the could be badly injured or killed. this part.
jack and roll over you or other Never get under a vehicle when
people. You and they could be it is supported only by a jack. To help prevent vehicle damage:
badly injured. Find a level place . Be sure to place a block or
to lift your vehicle. To help pad between the jack and the
prevent the vehicle from moving: vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake { WARNING . Make sure the jack you are
firmly. Raising the vehicle with the using spans at least two
2. Put an automatic jack improperly positioned can crossmember ribs.
transmission shift lever in damage the vehicle or the vehicle . Lift only in the areas shown
P (Park), or shift a manual may fall and cause you or others in the following pictures.
transmission to 1 (First) or injury.
R (Reverse). For additional information, see
your dealer and the Chevrolet
3. Turn off the engine. If you ever use a jack to lift your Corvette service manual.
To be even more certain the vehicle, follow the instructions that
vehicle won't move, put blocks in came with the jack, and be sure to
front of and behind the wheels. use the correct lifting points to avoid
damaging your vehicle.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Lifting From the Front
1. Locate the front lifting points (A), 3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,
according to the illustration making sure the jack spans at
The front lifting points can be shown. least two of the crossmember
accessed from either side of your 2. Be sure to place a block or pad ribs (B).
vehicle, behind the front tires. between the jack and the
vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-7
Lifting From the Rear
1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), 3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,
according to the illustration making sure the jack spans at
The rear lifting points can be shown. least two of the crossmember
accessed from the rear of the 2. Be sure to place a block or pad ribs (B).
vehicle, on either the driver's or between the jack and the For more information, see Doing
passenger's side. vehicle. Your Own Service Work on
page 10‑8.
10-8 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks WARNING (Continued)
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Doing Your Own Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
. Be sure to use the proper
Service Work nuts, bolts, and other page 3‑34.
fasteners. Metric and English Keep a record with all parts receipts
{ WARNING fasteners can be easily and list the mileage and the date of
confused. If the wrong any service work performed. See
You can be injured and the fasteners are used, parts can Maintenance Records on page 11‑9.
vehicle could be damaged if you later break or fall off. You
try to do service work on a vehicle could be hurt.
without knowing enough about it.
. Be sure you have sufficient
If doing some of your own service
knowledge, experience, the
work, use the proper service
proper replacement parts,
manual. It tells you much more
and tools before attempting
about how to service the vehicle
any vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
maintenance task.
proper service manual, see Service
(Continued) Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑15.
Vehicle Care 10-9
Hood
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release lever with
this symbol on it. It is located
inside the vehicle below the
instrument panel on the 2. Go to the side of the vehicle and
driver side. pull up on the rear edge of the
hood, near the windshield.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
the filler caps are on properly. Then,
just pull the hood down and close it
firmly.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
6.2 L LS3 V8 Engine (Without dry sump engine oil tank)
Vehicle Care 10-11
A. Clutch Master Cylinder G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
Reservoir (If Equipped). See to Add Engine Oil” under Brake
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑24. Fluid on page 10‑41.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer “Checking Engine Oil” under
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
page 10‑37. I. Engine Compartment Fuse
C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Block on page 10‑52.
“Brake Fluid” under Brakes on J. Passenger Compartment Air
page 10‑38. Filter (Out of View). See
D. Coolant Surge Tank and Passenger Compartment Air
Pressure Cap. See Engine Filter on page 8‑7.
Coolant on page 10‑29. K. Battery on page 10‑43.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on If the vehicle has the 6.2 L LS3
page 10‑24. V8 engine (without the dry sump
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. engine oil tank) and you are facing
See Power Steering Fluid on the front of the vehicle.
page 10‑36.
10-12 Vehicle Care
6.2 L LS9 V8 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-13
A. Intercooler. See Cooling System H. Passenger Compartment Air
(Engine) on page 10‑28 or Filter (Out of View). See
Cooling System (Intercooler) on Passenger Compartment Air
page 10‑29. Filter on page 8‑7.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
page 10‑24. to Add Engine Oil” under
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
and Cap. See Power Steering J. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See
Fluid on page 10‑36. “Changing Engine Oil and Filter”
D. Coolant Surge Tank and Brake Fluid on page 10‑41.
Pressure Cap. See Engine K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
Coolant on page 10‑29. “Checking Engine Oil” under
E. Windshield Washer Fluid Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer L. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on (Out of View). See Jump
page 10‑37. Starting on page 10‑82.
F. Clutch Master Cylinder M. Engine Compartment Fuse
Reservoir (If Equipped). See Block on page 10‑52.
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑24. If the vehicle has the 6.2 L LS9
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Supercharged V8 engine and you
“Brake Fluid” under Brakes on are facing the front of the vehicle.
page 10‑38.
10-14 Vehicle Care
6.2 L LS3 V8 Engine (With dry sump engine oil tank) or 7.0 L LS7 V8 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-15
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on H. Coolant Surge Tank and Engine Oil
page 10‑24. Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑29. To ensure proper engine
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. performance and long life, careful
See Power Steering Fluid on I. Windshield Washer Fluid attention must be paid to engine
page 10‑36. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer oil. Following these simple, but
C. Engine Compartment Fuse Fluid” under Washer Fluid on important steps will help protect
Block on page 10‑52. page 10‑37. your investment:
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal J. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See . Always use engine oil approved
(Out of View). See Jump “Brake Fluid” under Brake Fluid to the proper specification and of
Starting on page 10‑82. on page 10‑41. the proper viscosity grade. See
K. Clutch Master Cylinder “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See in this section.
“Checking Engine Oil” under Reservoir. See Hydraulic Clutch
Engine Oil on page 10‑15. on page 10‑24. . Check the engine oil level
If the vehicle has the 6.2 L LS3 regularly and maintain the
F. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See proper oil level. See “Checking
“Changing Engine Oil and Filter” V8 engine with the manual
transmission (with the dry sump Engine Oil” and “When to Add
under Engine Oil on Engine Oil” in this section.
page 10‑15. engine oil tank) or the 7.0 L LS7
V8 engine and you are facing the . Change the engine oil at the
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When driver side of the vehicle. appropriate time. See Engine Oil
to Add Engine Oil” under
Life System on page 10‑22.
Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
. Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil (Except Obtaining an accurate oil level When to Add Engine Oil
ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport) reading is essential: (Except ZO6, ZR1, and Grand
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message 1. If the engine has been running Sport)
displays on the Driver Information recently, turn off the engine and
Center (DIC), check the engine allow several minutes for the oil
oil level right away. For more to drain back into the oil pan.
information, see Engine Oil Checking the oil level too soon
Messages on page 5‑40. Check the after engine shutoff will not
engine oil level regularly; this is an provide an accurate oil level
added reminder. reading.
It is a good idea to check the engine 2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with If the oil is below the cross-hatched
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to a paper towel or cloth, then push area at the tip of the dipstick, add
get an accurate reading, the vehicle it back in all the way. Remove it 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
must be on level ground. The again, keeping the tip down, and and then recheck the level. See
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow check the level. “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
loop. See Engine Compartment this section for an explanation of
Overview on page 10‑10 for the what kind of oil to use. For engine
location of the engine oil dipstick. oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Vehicle Care 10-17
See Racing or Other Competitive Checking Engine Oil (ZO6, These vehicles have a
Driving on page 9‑7 for additional ZR1, and Grand Sport) racetrack‐ready dry sump
information on engine oil. engine lubrication system. This
Notice: Do not add too much high‐performance system operates
oil. Oil levels above or below differently than a standard engine
the acceptable operating range lubrication system and requires a
shown on the dipstick are harmful special procedure when checking
to the engine. If you find that the engine oil level. Follow this
you have an oil level above the procedure closely when checking
operating range, i.e., the engine the engine oil level.
has so much oil that the oil level The engine oil level must be
gets above the cross-hatched checked when the engine is warm.
area that shows the proper Cold oil level in the dry sump tank
operating range, the engine could may not indicate the actual amount
be damaged. You should drain of oil in the system. With this
out the excess oil or limit driving A. Engine Oil Dipstick system, engine oil is contained in
of the vehicle and seek a service an external tank, separate from the
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
professional to remove the engine. Under normal operating
excess amount of oil. It is a good idea to check the engine conditions, the oil pan under the
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to engine does not store any oil. If the
See Engine Compartment Overview
get an accurate reading, the vehicle vehicle has been parked for an
on page 10‑10 for the location of
must be on level ground. extended period without the engine
the engine oil fill cap.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a being started, some oil will seep
Add enough oil to put the level back into the oil pan, reducing the
yellow loop. The dipstick is located
somewhere in the proper operating amount of oil held in the dry sump
on the dry sump engine oil tank.
range . Push the dipstick all the way tank and there could be no engine
See Engine Compartment Overview
back in when through. oil at all showing on the dipstick.
on page 10‑10 for the location of the
dry sump engine oil tank.
10-18 Vehicle Care
This is normal since the dipstick is 4. Remove the dipstick from the See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
designed to read engine oil level external engine oil tank and for an explanation of what kind of oil
only after the engine has run long clean it with a lint‐free paper to use. For engine oil crankcase
enough to reach normal operating towel or a cloth. Re‐insert the capacity, see Capacities and
temperature. Do not add engine dipstick into the external oil tank, Specifications on page 12‑2.
oil based on cold engine dipstick pushing it all the way in until it See Racing or Other Competitive
readings. The engine oil level on the stops. Driving on page 9‑7 for additional
dipstick will also be inaccurate if 5. Remove the dipstick from the oil information on engine oil.
checked while the engine is running. tank and read the level on the Notice: Do not add too much
1. To obtain an accurate engine oil cross‐hatched area. Oil levels oil. Oil levels above or below
level reading, warm up the that fall in the cross‐hatched the acceptable operating range
engine to at least 80°C (175°F). area are normal. shown on the dipstick are harmful
Cold oil will not give a correct oil to the engine. If you find that
level reading. When to Add Engine Oil (ZO6,
ZR1, and Grand Sport) you have an oil level above the
2. Once the engine is warm, turn operating range, i.e., the engine
off the engine. Checking the oil has so much oil that the oil level
while the engine is running will gets above the cross-hatched
result in an incorrect oil level area that shows the proper
reading. operating range, the engine could
3. Wait at least five minutes (but be damaged. You should drain
not more than 20 minutes) to out the excess oil or limit driving
allow oil to drain and settle in of the vehicle and seek a service
the engine. If the oil is below the cross-hatched professional to remove the
area at the tip of the dipstick, add excess amount of oil.
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
through the oil fill cap opening in the
oil tank and then recheck the level.
Vehicle Care 10-19
See Engine Compartment Overview 2. Once the oil has been drained
on page 10‑10 for the location of the from the engine, remove the
external engine oil tank and fill cap. engine oil filter and allow the oil
Add enough oil to put the level to drain.
somewhere in the proper operating 3. Re‐install both drain plugs and
range. Push the dipstick all the way tighten them to 25 Y (18 lb ft).
back into the oil tank when through. 4. Replace the oil filter and tighten
Changing Engine Oil and Filter it to 30 Y (22 lb ft). See
(ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport) Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 11‑8 for the correct
These vehicles have a filter.
racetrack‐ready dry sump
engine lubrication system. This ZO6 Shown, ZR1 and Grand Sport 5. Oil is filled through the opening
high‐performance system operates Similar in the top of the external engine
differently than a standard engine oil tank. Remove the oil fill cap.
A. Engine Oil Drain Plugs
lubrication system and requires a 6. Add 9.9 L (10.5 quarts) of oil to
special procedure when changing B. Seals the oil tank. See Capacities and
the engine oil and filter. Follow this 1. Remove the two engine oil drain Specifications on page 12‑2.
procedure closely when changing plugs from the bottom of the 7. Install the oil fill cap and insert
the engine oil and filter. engine oil pan. One drain plug the dipstick, if removed.
drains the external oil tank via
the oil transfer supply line. The
other drain plug drains residual
oil from the crankcase sump.
Allow the oil to drain.
10-20 Vehicle Care
8. Start the engine and let it run at It is recommended to use Mobil 1®
idle for at least 15 seconds. This engine oils that meet the
will circulate the fresh engine oil requirements of the dexos
through the lubrication system. specification.
9. Shut off the engine and check Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
the oil level as described under dexos is unavailable: In the event
“Checking Engine Oil (ZO6, This vehicle was filled at the factory that dexos‐approved engine oil is
ZR1, and Grand Sport).” with dexos‐approved engine oil. not available at an oil change or
for maintaining proper oil level,
Selecting the Right Engine Oil Notice: Use only engine oil you may use substitute engine oil
that is approved to the dexos displaying the API Starburst symbol
Selecting the right engine oil
specification or an equivalent and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
depends on both the proper oil
engine oil of the appropriate Use of oils that do not meet the
specification and viscosity grade:
viscosity grade. Engine oils dexos specification, however, may
Specification approved to the dexos result in reduced performance under
specification will show the dexos certain circumstances.
Use and ask for engine oils with
symbol on the container. Failure
the dexos™ certification mark. Oils
to use the recommended engine Viscosity Grade
meeting the requirements of the
oil or equivalent can result in SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
vehicle should have the dexos
engine damage not covered grade for the vehicle. Do not
certification mark on the container.
by the vehicle warranty. If you use other viscosity oils such as
This certification mark indicates that
are unsure whether the oil SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
the oil has been approved to the
is approved to the dexos
dexos specification.
specification, ask your service
provider.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Cold Temperature Operation: In an What to Do with Used Oil
area of extreme cold, where the
Used engine oil contains certain
temperature falls below −29°C
elements that can be unhealthy for
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
your skin and could even cause
be used. An oil of this viscosity
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
grade will provide easier cold
your skin for very long. Clean your
starting for the engine at extremely
skin and nails with soap and water,
low temperatures. When selecting
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
properly dispose of clothing or rags
grade, be sure to always select
containing used engine oil. See the
an oil that meets the required
manufacturer's warnings about the
specification, dexos. See
use and disposal of oil products.
“Specification” earlier in this section
for more information. Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
Engine Oil Additives/Engine own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
Oil Flushes from the filter before disposal. Never
Do not add anything to the oil. The dispose of oil by putting it in the
recommended oils with the dexos trash or pouring it on the ground,
specification and displaying the into sewers, or into streams or
dexos certification mark are all that bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
is needed for good performance and it to a place that collects used oil.
engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
10-22 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Life System When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil
that oil life has been diminished, Life System
When to Change Engine Oil it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE Reset the system whenever the
This vehicle has a computer that engine oil is changed so that the
indicates when to change the OIL message comes on. Change
the oil as soon as possible within system can calculate the next
engine oil and filter. This is based engine oil change. To reset the
on engine revolutions and engine the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is
possible that, if driving under the system:
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the best conditions, the oil life system 1. Press the TRIP button so
mileage at which an oil change is might indicate that an oil change the OIL LIFE percentage is
indicated can vary considerably. For is not necessary for up to a year. displayed.
the oil life system to work properly, The engine oil and filter must be
2. Press RESET and hold for
the system must be reset every time changed at least once a year and,
two seconds. OIL LIFE
the oil is changed. at this time, the system must be
REMAINING 100% will appear.
reset. Your dealer has trained
ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport models service people who will perform this If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
have a racetrack‐ready dry sump work and reset the system. It is also message comes back on when the
engine lubrication system. This important to check the oil regularly vehicle is started, the engine oil life
high‐performance system operates over the course of an oil drain system has not reset. Repeat the
differently than a standard engine interval and keep it at the proper procedure.
lubrication system and requires a level.
special procedure when changing
the engine oil and filter. See Engine If the system is ever reset
Oil on page 10‑15. accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
Vehicle Care 10-23
Automatic Transmission additional information or the Manual Transmission
procedure can be found in the
Fluid service manual. To purchase a
Fluid
How to Check Automatic service manual, see Service It is not necessary to check the
Transmission Fluid Publications Ordering Information manual transmission fluid level.
on page 13‑15. A transmission fluid leak is the
It is not necessary to check only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
the transmission fluid level. Notice: Use of the incorrect
automatic transmission fluid occurs, take the vehicle to the
A transmission fluid leak is the dealer service department and
only reason for fluid loss. If a may damage the vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by have it repaired as soon as
leak occurs, take the vehicle to possible. See Recommended Fluids
the dealer service department the vehicle warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid and Lubricants on page 11‑6 for
and have it repaired as soon as the proper fluid to use.
possible. listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
The vehicle is not equipped with
a transmission fluid level dipstick. Change the fluid and filter at the
There is a special procedure for intervals listed in Scheduled
checking and changing the Maintenance on page 11‑2, and
transmission fluid. Because this be sure to use the fluid listed in
procedure is difficult, this should Recommended Fluids and
be done at the dealer service Lubricants on page 11‑6.
department. Contact the dealer for
10-24 Vehicle Care
Hydraulic Clutch Refer to the Maintenance Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Schedule for the proper fluid to use.
It is not necessary to regularly See Recommended Fluids and See Engine Compartment Overview
check clutch fluid unless you Lubricants on page 11‑6. The fluid on page 10‑10 for the location of the
suspect there is a leak in the requires changing every two years. engine air cleaner/filter.
system. Adding fluid will not correct See Scheduled Maintenance on Notice: If you spray water into
a leak. A fluid loss in this system page 11‑2. the engine air cleaner/filter intake
could indicate a problem. Have the and water enters the engine air
system inspected and repaired. How to Check and Add Fluid
cleaner/filter housing, you could
When to Check and What Visually check the clutch fluid damage your vehicle's engine.
to Use reservoir to make sure the fluid level The repairs would not be covered
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the by your warranty. Do not spray
side of the reservoir. The hydraulic water into the engine air cleaner/
clutch fluid system should be closed filter intake and/or housing.
and sealed.
If cleaning the vehicle with the hood
Do not remove the cap to check open, take care not to spray water
the fluid level or to top‐off the fluid directly near the filter opening of
level. Remove the cap only when the air cleaner, as shown in the
The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir necessary to add the proper fluid illustration, as this could damage
cap has this symbol on it. See until the level reaches the MIN line. the vehicle's engine.
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10 for reservoir location.
Vehicle Care 10-25
When to Inspect the Engine Air How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
scheduled maintenance intervals remove the filter from the vehicle
and replace them at the first oil and lightly shake the filter to release
change after each 80 000 km loose dust and dirt. If the filter
(50,000 mi) interval. See Scheduled remains covered with dirt, a new
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more filter is required.
information. If driving in dusty/dirty To inspect or replace the engine air
conditions, inspect the filter at each cleaner/filter:
engine oil change.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑9. 6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2 L
V8 Engine LS9 and 7.0 L
V8 Engine LS7 Similar
A. Tube
B. Clamp
C. Duct
2. Remove the tube (A) from the air
cleaner assembly.
3. Loosen the clamp (B) at the
throttle body and remove the
duct (C).
10-26 Vehicle Care
5. Press on the top and bottom of
the mass air flow sensor
connector (A) and remove.
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2 L 6.2 L V8 Engine LS9 Shown, 7.0 L
V8 Engine LS9 and 7.0 L V8 Engine LS7 Similar
V8 Engine LS7 Similar 6. To access the air filter element,
A. Mass Air Flow Sensor 6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 gently pull the air cleaner
Connector assembly upward until the
fasteners are released from
B. Connector Lock
the retainer pins in the upper
4. Remove the connector lock (B) radiator support.
located at the bottom of the
The LS3 engine has three
mass air flow sensor
retainer pins and the LS7 and
connector (A).
LS9 engines have two.
Vehicle Care 10-27
7. To remove the filter from the
LS3 and LS7 engines, remove { WARNING
the six screws (A) securing the
filter cover (B) then pull away to Operating the engine with the air
gain access to the air filter (C). cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
To remove the filter assembly cleaner not only cleans the air; it
from the LS9 engine, remove the helps to stop flames if the engine
six screws securing the filter backfires. Use caution when
cover. The filter cover and the air
working on the engine and do not
filter are one piece.
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
8. Inspect or replace the filter or
filter cover assembly. See
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2 L Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
Maintenance Replacement Parts
V8 Engine LS9 and 7.0 L on page 11‑8. off, dirt can easily get into the
V8 Engine LS7 Similar engine, which could damage it.
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 7 to Always have the air cleaner/filter
A. Screw replace the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
B. Filter Cover cover.
C. Filter
10-28 Vehicle Care
Cooling System (Engine)
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan
working temperature. under the hood can start up even Do not run the engine if there is
when the engine is not running a leak. If you run the engine, it
and can cause injury. Keep could lose all coolant. That could
hands, clothing, and tools away cause an engine fire, and you
from any underhood electric fan. could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than
{ WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature
Heater and radiator hoses, and engine, heater core, or radiator
other engine parts, can be very corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
you can be burned.
7.0L Engine shown, 6.2L Engine or 24 months, whichever occurs
(Continued) first. Any repairs would not be
similar
covered by the vehicle warranty.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan Always use DEX-COOL
B. Coolant Surge Tank with (silicate-free) coolant in the
Pressure Cap vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Cooling System Checking Coolant 4. Tighten the bleeder valve if there
is coolant flowing out of the
(Intercooler) bleeder valve.
The 6.2L LS9 supercharged 5. If there is no coolant flowing out
V8 engine has an intercooler of the bleeder valve, there could
cooling system. See Engine be a leak in the system. Tighten
Compartment Overview on the bleeder valve and contact
page 10‑10 for location of the the dealer for service.
intercooler.
The intercooler cooling system has Engine Coolant
a special procedure for draining
and adding coolant. Because this The cooling system in the vehicle
procedure is difficult, see the dealer is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
for service if the intercooler is low coolant. This coolant is designed to
on coolant. The procedure can also 1. Verify that the engine and remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
be found in the service manual. To intercooler are no longer hot. 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
purchase a service manual, see occurs first.
2. Place a cloth to absorb possible
Service Publications Ordering coolant loss under the driver's The following explains the cooling
Information on page 13‑15. side bleeder valve (A). system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
3. Loosen, but do not completely problem with engine overheating,
unscrew the bleeder valve to see Engine Overheating on
check for coolant in the system. page 10‑34.
10-30 Vehicle Care
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If extra inhibitors
drinkable water and DEX-COOL and/or additives are used in
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
the vehicle cooling system, the
vehicle could be damaged. Use
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: only the proper mixture of the
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down engine coolant listed in this
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside manual for the cooling system.
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. See Recommended Fluids and
the proper coolant mixture will. Lubricants on page 11‑6 for more
. Gives boiling protection up to information.
The vehicle's coolant warning 129°C (265°F), engine
system is set for the proper temperature. Never dispose of engine coolant
coolant mixture. With plain water by putting it in the trash, pouring
or the wrong mixture, the engine
. Protects against rust and it on the ground, or into sewers,
could get too hot but you would corrosion. streams, or bodies of water.
not get the overheat warning. The . Will not damage aluminum parts. Have the coolant changed by an
engine could catch fire and you or authorized service center, familiar
. Helps keep the proper engine with legal requirements regarding
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable used coolant disposal. This will help
Notice: If an improper coolant protect the environment and your
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
mixture is used, the engine could health.
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Checking Coolant When the engine is hot, the level
could be higher than the FULL
The vehicle must be on a level
COLD line. If the coolant is below
surface when checking the coolant
the FULL COLD line when the
level.
engine is hot, there could be a leak
Check to see if coolant is visible in in the cooling system.
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant The engine coolant surge tank is If the coolant is low, add the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is located toward the rear of the or take the vehicle to a dealer for
boiling, do not do anything else until engine compartment on the driver service.
it cools down. If coolant is visible side of the vehicle. See Engine
but the coolant level is not at or Compartment Overview on
above the FULL COLD mark, add a page 10‑10 for more information on
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable location.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure When the engine is cold, the coolant
the cooling system is cool before level should be at the FULL COLD
this is done. See Engine Coolant on mark on the coolant surge tank.
page 10‑29 for more information.
10-32 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Surge Tank WARNING (Continued)
the coolant surge tank pressure
{ WARNING cap — even a little — they can
You can be burned if you spill come out at high speed. Never
coolant on hot engine parts. turn the cap when the cooling
Coolant contains ethylene glycol system, including the coolant
and it will burn if the engine parts surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
are hot enough. Do not spill Wait for the cooling system and
coolant on a hot engine. coolant surge tank pressure cap
to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap. 1. When the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank
{ WARNING If coolant is needed, add the proper pressure cap and upper radiator
DEX-COOL coolant mixture directly hose, is no longer hot, remove
Steam and scalding liquids from a the pressure cap.
hot cooling system can blow out to the surge tank, but be sure the
and burn you badly. They are cooling system is cool before this Turn the pressure cap slowly
under pressure, and if you turn is done. counterclockwise about
one-quarter turn and then stop.
(Continued)
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still
some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly, and remove it.
Vehicle Care 10-33
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be
sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Check the level in the surge tank
when the system has cooled
down. If the coolant is not at the
proper level, repeat Steps 1
through 4, then reinstall the
pressure cap. If the coolant is
not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see
the dealer.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with 4. With the coolant surge tank Notice: If the pressure cap is
the proper DEX-COOL coolant pressure cap off, start the not tightly installed, coolant loss
mixture until the level inside engine and let it run until the and possible engine damage may
stabilizes at the FULL COLD upper radiator hose can be felt occur. Be sure the cap is properly
mark on the front of the getting hot. Any time during this and tightly secured.
surge tank. procedure, watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level stabilizes at the
FULL COLD mark on the coolant
surge tank.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Engine Overheating Then check to see if the engine If Steam is Coming from the
cooling fan is running. If the engine Engine
The vehicle has several indicators is overheating, the fan should be
to warn of engine overheating. running. If it is not, do not continue
There is an engine coolant to run the engine and have the
{ WARNING
temperature gauge on the vehicle serviced. Steam from an overheated engine
instrument panel cluster. See Notice: Engine damage from can burn you badly, even if you
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge running your engine without just open the hood. Stay away
on page 5‑15. The vehicle may coolant is not covered by the from the engine if you see or hear
also display a COOLANT OVER vehicle warranty. See Overheated steam coming from it. Turn it off
TEMPERATURE message on the Engine Protection Operating and get everyone away from the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See Mode for information on driving vehicle until it cools down. Wait
Engine Cooling System Messages to a safe place in an emergency. until there is no sign of steam or
on page 5‑39 for more information.
Notice: If the engine catches fire coolant before you open
If the decision is made not to lift the while driving with no coolant, the the hood.
hood but to get service help right vehicle can be badly damaged.
away. See Roadside Assistance If you keep driving when the
The costly repairs would not be vehicles engine is overheated,
Program (U.S. and Canada) on covered by the vehicle warranty.
page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance the liquids in it can catch fire. You
See Overheated Engine
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10. or others could be badly burned.
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑35 for information on Stop the engine if it overheats,
If the decision is made to lift the
driving to a safe place in an and get out of the vehicle until the
hood, make sure the vehicle is
emergency. engine is cool.
parked on a level surface.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-35
If the overheat warning is displayed If there is no sign of steam, idle
WARNING (Continued) with no sign of steam: the engine for three minutes while
1. Turn the air conditioning off. parked. If the warning is still
See Overheated Engine displayed, turn off the engine until it
Protection Operating Mode on 2. Turn the heater on to the highest cools down. Also, see “Overheated
page 10‑35 for information on temperature and to the highest Engine Protection Operating Mode”
driving to a safe place in an fan speed. Open the windows as next in this section.
emergency. necessary.
3. If in a traffic jam, shift to Overheated Engine
If No Steam is Coming from N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is Protection
the Engine safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral)
Operating Mode
If an engine overheat warning is and let the engine idle. This emergency operating mode
displayed but no steam can be seen lets the vehicle be driven to a
or heard, the problem may not be If the temperature overheat gauge is
no longer in the overheat zone or an safe place, up to 80 km (50 mi),
too serious. Sometimes the engine in an emergency situation. If an
can get a little too hot when the overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. overheated engine condition exists
vehicle: and the messages COOLANT
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe OVER TEMPERATURE and
vehicle distance from the vehicle in REDUCED ENGINE POWER are
. Stops after high-speed driving
front. If the warning does not come displayed, along with the check
. Idles for long periods in traffic engine light, an overheat protection
back on, continue to drive normally.
mode which alternates firing groups
If the warning continues, pull over, of cylinders helps prevent engine
stop, and park the vehicle damage. In this mode, there is a
right away. significant loss in power and engine
performance.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Driving extended distances in the When to Check Power Steering The level should be at the FULL
overheat protection mode should be Fluid COLD mark. If necessary, add only
avoided. enough fluid to bring the level up to
It is not necessary to regularly the mark.
Notice: After driving in the check power steering fluid unless
overheated engine protection there is a leak suspected in the
operating mode, to avoid engine system or an unusual noise is
damage, allow the engine to cool heard. A fluid loss in this system
before attempting any repair. could indicate a problem. Have the
The engine oil will be severely system inspected and repaired.
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil and How to Check Power Steering
reset the oil life system. See Fluid
Engine Oil on page 10‑15. To check the power steering fluid:
Power Steering Fluid 1. Turn the ignition off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean. When the engine compartment
is hot, the level should be at the
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
HOT mark. When the engine
dipstick with a clean rag.
compartment is cool, the level
4. Replace the cap and completely should be at the FULL COLD mark.
tighten it.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑10 for reservoir location. 5. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
There are markings on both
sides of the dipstick.
Vehicle Care 10-37
What to Use Adding Washer Fluid
. Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
To determine what kind of fluid to Water can cause the solution
use, see Recommended Fluids and to freeze and damage the
Lubricants on page 11‑6. Always washer fluid tank and other
use the proper fluid. parts of the washer system.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid Also, water does not clean as
may damage the vehicle and the well as washer fluid.
damages may not be covered by . Fill the washer fluid tank only
Open the cap with the washer
the vehicle's warranty. Always three-quarters full when it is
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
use the correct fluid listed in very cold. This allows for
until the tank is full. See Engine
Recommended Fluids and fluid expansion if freezing
Compartment Overview on
Lubricants on page 11‑6. occurs, which could damage
page 10‑10 for reservoir location.
the tank if it is
Washer Fluid Notice: completely full.
. When using concentrated . Do not use engine coolant
What to Use
washer fluid, follow the (antifreeze) in the windshield
When the vehicle needs windshield manufacturer's instructions washer. It can damage the
washer fluid, be sure to read the for adding water. windshield washer system
manufacturer's instructions before and paint.
use. If the vehicle will be operating
in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid
that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
10-38 Vehicle Care
Brakes Notice: Continuing to drive with Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result worn-out brake pads could result
Brake Wear (Except in costly brake repair. in costly brake repair.
ZR1 and ZO6) Some driving conditions or climates . Make sure that the brakes have
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc can cause a brake squeal when the been given sufficient time to cool
brake pads have built-in wear brakes are first applied or lightly and then set the park brake.
indicators that make a high-pitched applied. This does not mean
warning sound when the brake pads something is wrong with the brakes.
are worn and new pads are needed. Brake linings should always be
The sound can come and go or be replaced as complete axle sets.
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the Brake Wear (ZR1 and
brake pedal firmly. ZO6 Only)
The ZR1 and ZO6 models do not
{ WARNING have built-in brake pad wear
indicators and periodic visual
The brake wear warning sound inspection of the brake pads is
means that soon the brakes will required to determine when to
not work well. That could lead to replace the brake pads. Rear
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
Vehicle Care 10-39
Brake Rotor Wear
ZR1 and ZO6 models have ceramic
brake rotors. Rotors should be
visually inspected whenever the
brake pads are replaced. Rotors
also need to be weighed before
brake pads are replaced to confirm
that the rotor mass is greater than
the wear‐out mass printed on the
rotor. The rotor can be reused if the
weight of the rotor is above the
mass limit. Rotor inspection and
Front The ZR1 and ZO6 also have an weighing methods can be found in
. Brake pads can be visually electronic brake pad wear sensor the service manual. See Service
inspected through the wheel by system. When pads are worn, the Publications Ordering Information
inspecting the outer brake pads CHANGE BRAKE PADS message on page 13‑15.
at each wheel. displays in the Driver Information
Center. See Brake System
. Brake pads should be replaced Messages on page 5‑36.
when worn to 2 mm of pad
thickness. New pads are 10 mm Some driving conditions or climates
thick. can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
. In addition, brake pad inspection applied. This does not mean
is required any time the tires are something is wrong with the brakes.
removed.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
10-40 Vehicle Care
Brake Rotor Protector A rotor protector should always be
installed before any wheel removal.
{ WARNING The protector can be installed by
feeding it through the wheel spokes
Ceramic rotors will be very hot and slipping it over the outer edge
after operation and touching them of the rotor. Leave the protector
may cause burns. Be sure brake in place, over the rotor edge, until
system is completely cool prior to the wheel is re‐installed. Rotor
installation of protector, or coming protectors are available through
in contact with them. your dealer.
Brake Pedal Travel
Notice: Rotors may be chipped See your dealer if the brake pedal
if hard contact is made with the does not return to normal height,
wheel during wheel installation or if there is a rapid increase in
or removal. Always use the rotor pedal travel. This could be a sign
protectors. Be sure to carefully that brake service might be
follow wheel removal and required.
installation instructions.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the disc brakes
automatically adjust for wear.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Replacing Brake System Parts Brake Fluid There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
The braking system on a vehicle is
might go down:
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together . The brake fluid level goes down
if the vehicle is to have really good because of normal brake lining
braking. The vehicle was designed wear. When new linings are
and tested with top-quality brake installed, the fluid level goes
parts. When parts of the braking back up.
system are replaced — for example, The brake master cylinder reservoir . A fluid leak in the brake
when the brake linings wear down is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See hydraulic system can also cause
and new ones are installed — be Engine Compartment Overview on a low fluid level. Have the brake
sure to get new approved page 10‑10 for the location of the hydraulic system fixed, since a
replacement parts. If this is not reservoir. leak means that sooner or later
done, the brakes might not work the brakes will not work well.
properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong Do not top off the brake fluid.
for the vehicle, the balance between Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
the front and rear brakes can If fluid is added when the linings
change — for the worse. The are worn, there will be too much
braking performance expected can fluid when new brake linings are
change in many other ways if the installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
wrong replacement brake parts are as necessary, only when work is
installed. done on the brake hydraulic system.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Checking Brake Fluid What to Add
{ WARNING Check brake fluid by looking at the Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
If too much brake fluid is added, it brake fluid reservoir. See Engine from a sealed container. See
can spill on the engine and burn, Compartment Overview on Recommended Fluids and
if the engine is hot enough. You page 10‑10. Lubricants on page 11‑6.
or others could be burned, and The fluid level should be above Always clean the brake fluid
the vehicle could be damaged. the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it reservoir cap and the area around
Add brake fluid only when work is not, have the brake hydraulic the cap before removing it. This
is done on the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is helps keep dirt from entering the
system. See “Checking Brake a leak. reservoir.
Fluid” in this section. After work is done on the brake
hydraulic system, make sure the { WARNING
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule level is between the MIN and MAX
marks. With the wrong kind of fluid in
to determine when to check the
the brake hydraulic system, the
brake fluid. See Scheduled
brakes might not work well. This
Maintenance on page 11‑2.
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Vehicle Care 10-43
Notice: For battery replacement, see your Some vehicles have a battery
. Using the wrong fluid dealer or the service manual. To charger package. Follow the
can badly damage brake purchase a service manual, see instructions provided with the
hydraulic system parts. For Service Publications Ordering battery charger package to keep
example, just a few drops Information on page 13‑15. the battery charged when the
of mineral-based oil, such vehicle is not in use. For vehicles
as engine oil, in the brake { DANGER without a battery charger, see the
following information.
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic Battery posts, terminals, and Infrequent Usage: Remove the
system parts so badly that related accessories contain lead black, negative (−) cable from the
they will have to be replaced. and lead compounds, chemicals battery to keep the battery from
Do not let someone put in known to the State of California to running down.
the wrong kind of fluid. cause cancer and reproductive
See “Power Window Initialization” in
harm. Wash hands after handling.
. If brake fluid is spilled on the Power Windows on page 2‑18.
vehicle's painted surfaces, Extended Storage: Remove the
the paint finish can be Vehicle Storage black, negative (−) cable from the
damaged. Be careful not battery or use a battery trickle
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it
{ WARNING charger.
off immediately. Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
Battery You can be badly hurt if you are
Refer to the replacement number on not careful. See Jump Starting on
the original battery label when a page 10‑82 for tips on working
new battery is needed. around a battery without
getting hurt.
10-44 Vehicle Care
Rear Axle If the level is below the bottom of 2. Firmly apply both the parking
the fill plug hole, some lubricant will brake and the regular brake.
When to Check Lubricant need to be added. Add enough See Parking Brake on
It is not necessary to regularly lubricant to raise the level to the page 9‑35.
check rear axle fluid unless a leak is bottom of the fill plug hole. Do not use the accelerator
suspected or an unusual noise is What to Use pedal, and be ready to turn off
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a the engine immediately if it
problem. Have it inspected and To add lubricant when the level is starts.
repaired. low or to completely refill after
draining, see Recommended Fluids 3. For automatic transmission
How to Check Lubricant and Lubricants on page 11‑6. Then vehicles, try to start the engine
fill to the bottom of the fill plug hole in each gear. The vehicle
with the required lubricant. should start only in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
Starter Switch Check in any other position, contact
your dealer for service.
{ WARNING For manual transmission
vehicles, put the shift lever in
When you are doing this Neutral, push the clutch pedal
inspection, the vehicle could down halfway, and try to start
move suddenly. If the vehicle the engine. The vehicle should
moves, you or others could be start only when the clutch pedal
injured. is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts
To get an accurate reading, the when the clutch pedal is not
1. Before starting this check, be pushed all the way down,
vehicle should be on a level sure there is enough room
surface. contact your dealer for service.
around the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-45
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
ignition on, but do not start the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the your foot on the regular brake, set
Function Check regular brake, try to move the the parking brake.
shift lever out of P (Park) with . To check the parking brake's
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
When you are doing this your dealer for service. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
inspection, the vehicle could pressure from the regular brake
move suddenly. If the vehicle Park Brake and P (Park) pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
moves, you or others could be Mechanism Check held by the parking brake only.
injured. . To check the P (Park)
{ WARNING mechanism's holding ability:
1. Before starting this check, be With the engine running, shift
sure there is enough room When you are doing this check, to P (Park). Then release the
around the vehicle. It should be the vehicle could begin to move. parking brake followed by the
parked on a level surface. You or others could be injured regular brake.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. and property could be damaged.
Contact your dealer if service is
See Parking Brake on Make sure there is room in front required.
page 9‑35. of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle
brake immediately if the vehicle begin to move.
begins to move.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Wiper Blade Replacement To remove the wiper blade 3. Press down on the blade
assembly: assembly pivot locking tab (C).
Windshield wiper blades should be Pull down on the blade
inspected for wear and cracking. 1. Open the hood to gain access to
the windshield wipers. assembly (A) to release it from
See Scheduled Maintenance on the wiper arm hook (F).
page 11‑2 for more information. 2. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield. 4. Remove the insert from the
Replacement blades come in blade assembly (A).
different types and are removed in
different ways. For the proper type The insert has two notches at
and length, see Maintenance one end that are locked by the
Replacement Parts on page 11‑8. bottom claws of the blade
assembly. At the notch end, pull
It is a good idea to clean or replace the insert from the blade
the wiper blade assembly every six assembly.
months. Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not be
covered by the vehicle's warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield. A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
Vehicle Care 10-47
To install the new wiper insert: 2. Be sure the notches are locked Installation guide:
by the bottom claws. Make sure
that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the
insert slots.
3. Put the blade assembly pivot in
the wiper arm hook. Pull up until
the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
4. Carefully lower the wiper arm
and blade assembly onto the
windshield.
1. Slide the insert (D), notched end A. Claw in Notch
last, into the end with the two B. Correct Installation
blade claws (A). Slide the insert
all the way through the blade C. Incorrect Installation
claws at the opposite end (B).
The plastic caps (C) will be Windshield Replacement
forced off as the insert is fully
The windshield is part of the
installed.
Head-Up Display (HUD) system.
If you ever have to get the
windshield replaced, get one that
is designed for HUD or the HUD
image may look out of focus.
10-48 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge
Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting
the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
further adjustment. page 10‑50. { WARNING
However, if the vehicle is damaged For any bulb‐changing procedure The low beam high intensity
in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact discharge lighting system
be affected. Aim adjustment to the your dealer.
operates at a very high voltage.
low-beam headlamps may be
If you try to service any of the
necessary if oncoming drivers flash Halogen Bulbs system components, you could be
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim). seriously injured. Have your
{ WARNING dealer or a qualified technician
If the headlamps need to be service them.
re-aimed, it is recommended that Halogen bulbs have pressurized
the vehicle be taken to the dealer gas inside and can burst if you
for service. drop or scratch the bulb. You or The vehicle may have HID
others could be injured. Be sure headlamps. After an HID headlamp
to read and follow the instructions bulb has been replaced, you may
on the bulb package. notice that the beam is a slightly
different shade than it was originally.
This is normal.
Vehicle Care 10-49
Headlamps, Front Turn To replace a high-beam or front
parking/turn signal bulb:
Signal and Parking
Lamps 1. Turn the wheel to allow access
to the wheel well.
4. Remove the headlamp bulb by
releasing the outer tabs from the
socket.
5. Remove the front parking/turn
A. High-beam Headlamp signal bulb by turning the bulb
2. Remove the three outer socket counterclockwise.
B. Low-beam Headlamp fasteners to move the access 6. Replace the high-beam
C. Front Parking/Turn Signal panel back. headlamp bulb with a new bulb
If the low-beam headlamp needs to 3. Remove the outer cover to and reattach to the bulb socket.
be replaced, see your dealer. See expose the high-beam headlamp Replace the front parking/turn
High Intensity Discharge (HID) bulb socket. signal bulb by turning the bulb
Lighting on page 10‑48 for more socket clockwise.
information.
7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 to
reinstall.
10-50 Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal, 5. Push the new bulb in the bulb Electrical System
socket until it snaps into place.
and Stoplamps
To replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turn
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly by Electrical System
first lining up the tabs on the
signal bulb: bottom of the lamp assembly
Overload
1. Remove the screw from the top with the tabs in the vehicle, then The vehicle has fuses and circuit
of the lamp assembly. slide it in. breakers to protect against an
7. Replace the screw at the top of electrical system overload.
the lamp assembly. When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
Replacement Bulbs and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
Exterior Lamp Bulb
normal or the problem is fixed. This
Number
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
Front Parking/Turn overload and fire caused by
Signal 5702KA electrical problems.
Headlamp,
High‐Beam Lamp H9
Sidemarker Lamp 194LL (W3W)
2. Tilt the lamp assembly
Stoplamp/Taillamp/
toward you.
Turn Signal Lamp 3047K
3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter
turn counterclockwise and pull For replacement bulbs not listed
it out. here, contact your dealer.
4. Pull the bulb straight out to
remove it from the socket.
Vehicle Care 10-51
Fuses and circuit breakers protect Windshield Wipers Look at the silver-colored band
the following in the vehicle: inside the fuse. If the band is broken
If the wiper motor overheats due to
. Headlamp Wiring or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
you replace a bad fuse with a new
. Windshield Wiper Motor wipers will stop until the motor cools
one of the identical size and rating.
and will then restart.
. Power Windows and Other If you ever have a problem on the
Power Accessories Although the circuit is protected
road and do not have a spare fuse,
from electrical overload, overload
Replace a bad fuse with a new one you can borrow one that has the
due to heavy snow or ice may
of the identical size and rating. same amperage. Just pick some
cause wiper linkage damage.
feature of the vehicle that you can
If there is a problem on the road Always clear ice and heavy snow
get along without — like the radio or
and a fuse needs to be replaced, from the windshield before using
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse,
the same amperage fuse can be the windshield wipers.
if it is the correct amperage.
borrowed. Choose some feature of If the overload is caused by an Replace it as soon as you can.
the vehicle that is not needed to use electrical problem and not snow or
and replace it as soon as possible. Vehicles with the ZR1 package have
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
an intercooler relay located on the
Headlamp Wiring fan shroud. See your dealer.
Fuses and Circuit
An electrical overload may cause Vehicles with the ZR1 package also
the lamps to go on and off, or in Breakers have a fuel system mini-fuse. It is
some cases to remain off. Have the The wiring circuits in the vehicle are located near the battery in the
headlamp wiring checked right away protected from short circuits by a battery storage compartment in the
if the lamps go on and off or combination of J-Case fuses, rear of the vehicle.
remain off. mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This
greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
There is one fuse block in the
engine compartment located on the
passenger side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10 for more information on
location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
For ZR1 models, the Fuel System Fuse Usage
fuse is located at the battery.
Transmission
The vehicle may not be equipped 1 Control Module/
with all of the fuses, relays, and Transmission
features shown.
Horn, Alternator
2
Sense
Vehicle Care 10-53
Fuse Usage Fuse Usage Fuse Usage
Antilock Brake Odd Numbered Fuel Pump
12 20
3 System (ABS)/Real Fuel Injectors (except ZR1)
Time Damping
Electronic Driver Side
4 Wiper 13 Suspension 21 Low-Beam
Control (Option) Headlamp
Stoplamps/
5
Back-Up Lamps Canister Purge 22 Front Fog Lamp
14 Solenoid, Mass Air
6 Oxygen Sensor Passenger Side
Flow Sensor
23 High-Beam
7 Battery Main 5
Air Conditioner Headlamp
15
8 Parking Lamps Compressor
Driver Side
Powertrain Relay Even Numbered 24 High-Beam
16
9 Input/Electronic Fuel Injectors Headlamp
Throttle Control
17 Windshield Washer Engine Control
Manual Module (ECM)/
18 Headlamp Washer
10 Transmission Transmission
56
Solenoids Passenger Side Control
19 Low-Beam Module (TCM)/
Antilock Brake
11 Headlamp Easy Key Module
System
10-54 Vehicle Care
J-Style Usage Micro-Relays Usage Mini-Relays Usage
Fuses
Parking Windshield Wiper
45
25 Cooling Fan 37 Lamps, On/Off
Foglamps
26 Battery Main 3 Low-Beam
47
Front Headlamp
Antilock Brake 38
27 Fog Lamp
System
High-Beam Spare Fuses Usage
Heating/Ventilation/ 39
Headlamp 48 Spare
28 Air Conditioning
Blower Headlamp 49 Spare
46
Washer
29 Battery Main 2 50 Spare
Fuel Pump
30 Starter 55 51 Spare
(except ZR1)
31 Audio Amplifier 52 Spare
32 Intercooler Pump Mini-Relays Usage
53 Spare
33 Battery Main 1 40 Rear Defog
54 Fuse Puller
Windshield Wiper
41
Micro-Relays Usage High/Low Diodes Usage
34 Horn Windshield Wiper § Diode 1
42
Air Run/Accessory
§ Wiper
35 Conditioning 43 Crank
Compressor § Diode 2
Powertrain
44
Windshield Ignition 1
36
Washer
Vehicle Care 10-55
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
located on the passenger side of the
vehicle, under the instrument panel
and under the toe-board.
Remove the carpet and toe-board
covering to access the fuse block by
pulling at the top of each corner of
the panel. Open the fuse block
cover to access the fuses.
You can remove fuses using the
fuse puller.
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. Brake
BTSI SOL/ Transmission Shift
Fuses Usage
STR Interlock, Steering
BCK/ WHL LCK Wheel
Back‐up Lamps
UP LAMP Column Lock
BLANK Not Used Cluster, Heads‐Up
CLSTR/HUD
Display
BLANK Not Used
10-56 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
CRUISE Cruise Control Heating Ventilation/ REVERSE
HVAC/ Reverse Lamps
SWTCH Switch Air Conditioning, LAMPS
PWR SND
Power Sounder
CTSY/LAMP Courtesy Lamp RUN CRNK Run/Crank Relay
IGN SWTCH/ Ignition Switch,
DR LCK Door Locks Sensing and
INTR SNSR Intrusion Sensor
SDM/AOS Diagnostic Module,
DRIV DR
Driver Door Switch Electric Inside SWTCH Automatic
SWITCH
Rearview Mirror, AIRBAG Occupant Sensing
Engine Control ISRVM/HVAC Heating, Module, Airbag
ECM
Module (ECM) Ventilation, Air
SPARE Spare
Conditioning
Exhaust
SPARE Spare
Module (ZO6 & OnStar®
ONSTAR
EXH MDL ZR1), (if equipped) SPARE Spare
Spare (Coupe and
RDO/ SPARE Spare
Convertible) Radio, S‐Band
S‐BAND
STOP LAMP Stop Lamp
GM LAN
GM LAN Devices Rear Fog Lamp,
RUN/CRNK Steering Wheel
Assembly Line SWC DM
REAR FOG/ Dimming
HTD SEAT/ Heated Seat, Diagnostic Link
ALDL/TOP TELE Telescope Switch,
WPR RLY Wiper Relays Connector,
SWTCH SWTCH/ Memory Seat
Convertible Top
Switch MSM Module
Vehicle Care 10-57
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
TONNEAU AUX PWR Auxiliary Power Power Seats,
Tonneau Release PWR
RELSE Memory Seat
BLANK Not Used SEATS MSM
Module
Tonneau Pulldown
TPA BLANK Not Used
Actuator PWR/
Power Windows,
BLANK Not Used WNDWS/
Trunk, Fuel Door
Fuses Usage TRUNK/
BLANK Not Used Release
FUEL RELSE
BLANK Blank BLANK Not Used
TRUNK
BLANK Blank BLANK Not Used Trunk Release
RELSE
FUEL DR BLANK Not Used WPR DWELL Wiper Dwell
Fuel Door Release
RELSE
DRVR Windshield Wiper/
REAR/FOG Rear Fog Lamps Driver Heated Seat WPR/WSW
HTD SEAT Washer
TONNEAU LTR Cigarette Lighter
Tonneau Release
RELSE
PASS Passenger
TRUNK HTD SEAT Heated Seat
Trunk Release
RELSE
10-58 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires
same danger as overloaded can cause a crash. Only the
Your new vehicle comes with tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. If you Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
ever have questions about your maintain the recommended the tires.
tire warranty and where to pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
obtain service, see your vehicle should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
Warranty booklet for details. For tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such
additional information refer to . Overinflated tires are more as snow, mud, ice, etc.
the tire manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden impact cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING — such as when hitting a
pothole. Keep tires at the
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
. Poorly maintained and recommended pressure.
Operation on page 10‑67 for
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause a inflation pressure adjustment for
dangerous. crash. If the tread is badly high-speed driving.
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
cause overheating as a result . Replace any tires that have
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a with potholes, curbs, etc.
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑14. (Continued)
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-59
Winter Tires If using snow tires:
. Use tires of the same brand and
{ WARNING
Consider installing winter tires on
the vehicle if frequent driving on tread type on all four wheel When the low tire warning light is
snow or ice covered roads is positions. displayed on the instrument panel
expected. All season tires provide . Use only radial ply tires of the cluster, your vehicle's handling
good overall performance on most same size, load range, and capabilities will be reduced during
surfaces, but they may not offer the speed rating as the original severe maneuvers. If you drive
traction or the same level of equipment tires. too fast, you could lose control of
performance as winter tires on snow your vehicle. You or others could
Winter tires with the same speed
or ice covered roads. be injured. Do not drive over
rating as the original equipment tires
Winter tires, in general, are may not be available for H, V, W, Y, 55 mph (90 km/h) when the low
designed for increased traction on and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tire warning light is displayed.
snow and ice covered roads. With tires with a lower speed rating are Drive cautiously and check your
winter tires, there may be decreased chosen, never exceed the tire's tire pressures as soon as
dry road traction, increased road maximum speed capability. you can.
noise, and shorter tread life. After
changing to winter tires, be alert for Run-Flat Tires If a tire goes flat, you will not
changes in vehicle handling and
braking. This vehicle, when new, had run-flat need to stop on the side of the
tires. There is no spare tire, no tire road to change the tire. You can
See your dealer for details changing equipment, and no place keep driving, however, if driven
regarding winter tire availability and to store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat too far or too fast, the tire may
proper tire selection. Also, see tires perform so well without any air be permanently damaged and
Buying New Tires on page 10‑73. that a Tire Pressure Monitor System you might not be able to continue
(TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire driving on the tire. The tire can
has lost pressure. be driven with no air pressure for
up to 105 km (65 miles) at speeds
slower than 90 km/h (55 mph).
10-60 Vehicle Care
The shorter the distance you drive To locate the nearest GM or run-flat Notice: Using liquid sealants
and the slower the speed, the servicing facility, call Roadside can damage the tire valves and
greater the chance that the tire will Assistance. For phone numbers tire pressure monitor sensors in
not have to be replaced. As soon and Roadside Service details see the vehicle's run-flat tires. This
as possible, contact the nearest Roadside Assistance Program (U.S. damage would not be covered
authorized GM or run-flat servicing and Canada) on page 13‑8 or by warranty. Do not use liquid
facility for inspection and repair or Roadside Assistance Program sealants in the vehicle's run-flat
replacement. When a tire is filled (Mexico) on page 13‑10. tires.
with air, it provides a cushion The valve stems on your run-flat
between the road and the wheel. tires have sensors that are part of Low-Profile Tires
Because you will not have this the Tire Pressure Monitor System
cushion when driving on a deflated Low‐Profile Performance Tire
(TPMS). See Tire Pressure Monitor
run-flat tire, try to avoid potholes System on page 10‑68. These The original equipment tires on
and other road hazards that could sensors contain batteries which are your vehicle are classified as
damage the tire and/or wheel designed to last for 10 years under
beyond repair. When a tire has been low‐profile performance tires.
normal driving conditions. See your These tires are designed for
damaged, or if you have driven any dealer if you ever need to have a
distance on a run-flat tire, check very responsive driving on wet
wheel replaced, or if the sensors
with an authorized run-flat tire or dry pavement. You may also
ever need replacement.
service center to determine whether notice more road noise with
the tire can be repaired or should be low‐profile tires and that they
replaced. To maintain your vehicle's tend to wear faster.
run-flat feature, all replacement tires
must be run-flat tires.
Vehicle Care 10-61
Notice: If the vehicle has (B) TPC Spec (Tire
low‐profile tires, they are more Performance Criteria
susceptible to damage from Specification): Original
road hazards or curb impact equipment tires designed to
than standard profile tires. GM's specific tire performance
Tire and/or wheel assembly criteria have a TPC specification
damage can occur when code molded onto the sidewall.
coming into contact with road GM's TPC specifications meet or
hazards like, potholes, exceed all federal safety
or sharp edged objects, guidelines.
or when sliding into a curb. (C) DOT (Department of
The vehicle warranty does not Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example Transportation): The
cover this type of damage. Department of Transportation
Keep tires set to the correct (A) Tire Size: The tire size is
a combination of letters and (DOT) code indicates that
inflation pressure and, when the tire is in compliance with
possible avoid contact with numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height, the U.S. Department of
curbs, potholes, and other Transportation Motor Vehicle
road hazards. aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the Safety Standards.
Tire Sidewall Labeling “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
Useful information about a tire
is molded into its sidewall.
The examples show a typical
passenger tire sidewall.
10-62 Vehicle Care
(D) Tire Identification Number (G) Maximum Cold Inflation vehicle tire engineered to
(TIN): The letters and numbers Load Limit: Maximum load standards set by the U.S. Tire
following the DOT code are the that can be carried and the and Rim Association.
Tire Identification Number (TIN). maximum pressure needed to (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
The TIN shows the support that load. number indicates the tire section
manufacturer and plant code, width in millimeters from
tire size, and date the tire was Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall.
manufactured. The TIN is
Tire Size (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may The following is an example of a number that indicates the tire
have the date of manufacture. typical passenger vehicle height‐to‐width measurements.
tire size. For example, if the tire size
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
of cord and number of plies in item C of the illustration, it would
the sidewall and under the tread. mean that the tire's sidewall is
(F) Uniform Tire Quality 60 percent as high as it is wide.
Grading (UTQG): Tire (D) Construction Code:
manufacturers are required A letter code is used to indicate
to grade tires based on three the type of ply construction
performance factors: treadwear, (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a in the tire. The letter R means
traction, and temperature radial ply construction; the
resistance. For more information metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in letter D means diagonal or
see Uniform Tire Quality bias ply construction; and the
Grading on page 10‑76. the tire size means a passenger
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
Vehicle Care 10-63
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of Accessory Weight: The Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
the wheel in inches. combined weight of optional tire in which the plies are laid
(F) Service Description: These accessories. Some examples at alternate angles less than
characters represent the load of optional accessories are, 90 degrees to the centerline of
index and speed rating of the automatic transmission, power the tread.
tire. The load index represents steering, power brakes, power Cold Tire Pressure: The
the load carrying capacity a tire windows, power seats, and air amount of air pressure in a tire,
is certified to carry. The speed conditioning. measured in kPa (kilopascal)
rating is the maximum speed a Aspect Ratio: The relationship or psi (pounds per square inch)
tire is certified to carry a load. of a tire's height to its width. before a tire has built up heat
Belt: A rubber coated layer of from driving. See Tire Pressure
Tire Terminology and cords that is located between on page 10‑66.
Definitions the plies and the tread. Cords Curb Weight: The weight of a
Air Pressure: The amount may be made from steel or other motor vehicle with standard and
of air inside the tire pressing reinforcing materials. optional equipment including the
outward on each square inch Bead: The tire bead contains maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
of the tire. Air pressure is steel wires wrapped by steel and coolant, but without
expressed in psi (pounds per cords that hold the tire onto passengers and cargo.
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). the rim.
10-64 Vehicle Care
DOT Markings: A code molded Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle
into the sidewall of a tire The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb
signifying that the tire is in that must always face outward weight, accessory weight,
compliance with the U.S. when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and
Department of Transportation Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: The
Standards. The DOT code number of occupants a vehicle
includes the Tire Identification Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and is designed to seat multiplied by
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
designator which can also some multipurpose passenger
vehicles. Load Limits on page 9‑14.
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and Load Index: An assigned Occupant Distribution :
date of production. number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight that corresponds to the load Outward Facing Sidewall:
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits carrying capacity of a tire. The side of an asymmetrical tire
on page 9‑14. Maximum Inflation Pressure: that has a particular side that
The maximum air pressure to faces outward when mounted
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight on a vehicle. The side of the
Rating for the front axle. See which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is tire that contains a whitewall,
Vehicle Load Limits on bears white lettering, or bears
page 9‑14. molded onto the sidewall.
manufacturer, brand, and/or
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Load Rating: model name molding that is
Rating for the rear axle. See The load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
page 9‑14. pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Vehicle Care 10-65
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Sidewall: The portion of a tire UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
A tire used on passenger cars between the tread and the bead. Grading Standards):
and some light duty trucks and Speed Rating: An A tire information system
multipurpose vehicles. alphanumeric code assigned that provides consumers with
Recommended Inflation to a tire indicating the maximum ratings for a tire's traction,
Pressure: Vehicle speed at which a tire can temperature, and treadwear.
manufacturer's recommended operate. Ratings are determined by
tire inflation pressure as shown tire manufacturers using
Traction: The friction between government testing procedures.
on the tire placard. See Tire the tire and the road surface.
Pressure on page 10‑66 and The ratings are molded into the
The amount of grip provided. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑14. Tread: The portion of a tire Tire Quality Grading on
that comes into contact with page 10‑76.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic the road.
tire in which the ply cords that Vehicle Capacity Weight:
extend to the beads are laid at Treadwear Indicators: Narrow The number of designated
90 degrees to the centerline of bands, sometimes called wear seating positions multiplied by
the tread. bars, that show across the tread 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
of a tire when only 1.6 mm cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire (1/16 in) of tread remains. See Limits on page 9‑14.
and upon which the tire beads When It Is Time for New Tires
are seated. on page 10‑72.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Notice: Neither tire The Tire and Loading
Tire: Load on an individual tire underinflation nor Information Label on the
due to curb weight, accessory overinflation is good. vehicle indicates the original
weight, occupant weight, and Underinflated tires, or tires equipment tires and the correct
cargo weight. that do not have enough air, cold tire inflation pressures. The
Vehicle Placard: A label can result in: recommended pressure is the
permanently attached to a . Tire overloading and minimum air pressure needed to
vehicle showing the vehicle over-heating which could support the vehicle's maximum
capacity weight and the lead to a blowout. load carrying capacity.
original equipment tire size . Premature or For additional information
and recommended inflation irregular wear. regarding how much weight
pressure. See “Tire and Loading the vehicle can carry, and an
Information Label” under Vehicle . Poor handling. example of the Tire and Loading
Load Limits on page 9‑14. . Reduced fuel economy. Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑14. How
Tire Pressure Overinflated tires, or tires that the vehicle is loaded affects
have too much air, can vehicle handling and ride
Tires need the correct amount result in:
of air pressure to operate comfort. Never load the vehicle
effectively.
. Unusual wear. with more weight than it was
. Poor handling. designed to carry.
. Rough ride. When to Check
. Needless damage from Check the tires once a month
road hazards. or more.
Vehicle Care 10-67
How to Check If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until the recommended WARNING (Continued)
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check the tire pressure is reached. If the
You could have a crash and you
pressure. Proper tire inflation inflation pressure in high, press
or others could be killed. Some
cannot be determined by on the metal stem in the center
high-speed rated tires require
looking at the tire. Check the tire of the tire valve to release air. inflation pressure adjustment for
inflation pressure when the tires Re‐check the tire pressure with high speed operation. When
are cold, meaning the vehicle the tire gauge. speed limits and road conditions
has not been driven for at least Return the valve caps on the are such that a vehicle can be
three hours or no more than valve stems to keep out dirt and driven at high speeds, make sure
1.6 km (1 mi). moisture and prevent leaks. the tires are rated for high speed
operation, in excellent condition,
Remove the valve cap from the and set to the correct cold tire
tire valve stem. Press the tire Tire Pressure for
inflation pressure for the
gauge firmly onto the valve to High-Speed Operation vehicle load.
get the pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure { WARNING If you will be driving your vehicle at
matches the recommended speeds of 175 mph (282 km/h) or
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
pressure on the Tire and higher, where it is legal, set the cold
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
Loading Information Label, no inflation pressure to the maximum
additional strain on tires.
further adjustment is necessary. Sustained high-speed driving inflation pressure shown on the
causes excessive heat build up tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
and can cause sudden tire failure. whichever is lower. See the
example following. When you end
(Continued)
10-68 Vehicle Care
this high-speed driving, return the Tire Pressure Monitor As an added safety feature, your
tires to the cold inflation pressure vehicle has been equipped with a
shown on the Tire and Loading
System tire pressure monitoring system
Information label. See Vehicle Load The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
Limits on page 9‑14. (TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale when one or
Example: technology to check tire pressure more of your tires is significantly
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor under‐inflated.
You will find the maximum load the air pressure in your tires and
and inflation pressure molded on Accordingly, when the low tire
transmit tire pressure readings to a pressure telltale illuminates, you
the tire's sidewall, in small letters, receiver located in the vehicle.
near the rim flange. It will read should stop and check your tires as
something like this: Maximum load Each tire, including the spare soon as possible, and inflate them
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) (if provided), should be checked to the proper pressure. Driving on
Max. Press. monthly when cold and inflated to a significantly under‐inflated tire
the inflation pressure recommended causes the tire to overheat and can
For this example, you would set the by the vehicle manufacturer on the lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
inflation pressure for high‐speed vehicle placard or tire inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
driving at 38 psi (265 kPa). pressure label. (If your vehicle has tire tread life, and may affect the
Racing or other competitive driving tires of a different size than the size vehicle's handling and stopping
may affect the warranty coverage indicated on the vehicle placard or ability.
of your vehicle. See your warranty tire inflation pressure label, you
booklet for more information. should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Vehicle Care 10-69
Please note that the TPMS is malfunctions may occur for a variety Tire Pressure Monitor
not a substitute for proper tire of reasons, including the installation
maintenance, and it is the driver's of replacement or alternate tires or
Operation
responsibility to maintain correct tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent This vehicle may have a Tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has the TPMS from functioning properly. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
not reached the level to trigger Always check the TPMS malfunction The TPMS is designed to warn
illumination of the TPMS low tire telltale after replacing one or more the driver when a low tire pressure
pressure telltale. tires or wheels on your vehicle to condition exists. TPMS sensors are
Your vehicle has also been ensure that the replacement or mounted onto each tire and wheel
equipped with a TPMS malfunction alternate tires and wheels allow assembly on your vehicle. The
indicator to indicate when the the TPMS to continue to function TPMS sensors monitor the air
system is not operating properly. properly. pressure in the tires and transmits
The TPMS malfunction indicator is See Tire Pressure Monitor the tire pressure readings to a
combined with the low tire pressure Operation on page 10‑69 for receiver located in the vehicle.
telltale. When the system detects a additional information.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then Federal Communications
remain continuously illuminated. Commission (FCC) and
This sequence will continue upon Industry Canada
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as See Radio Frequency Statement on
long as the malfunction exists. page 13‑19 for information
When the malfunction indicator is regarding Part 15 of the Federal When a low tire pressure condition
illuminated, the system may not Communications Commission (FCC) is detected, the TPMS illuminates
be able to detect or signal low tire rules and Industry Canada the low tire pressure warning light,
pressure as intended. TPMS Standards RSS-210/220/310. located in the instrument cluster.
10-70 Vehicle Care
If the warning light comes on, The low tire pressure warning light The TPMS can warn about a low
stop as soon as possible and inflate may come on in cool weather when tire pressure condition but it does
the tires to the recommended the vehicle is first started, and then not replace normal tire
pressure shown on the tire loading turn off as the vehicle is driven. This maintenance. See Tire Inspection
information label. See Vehicle Load could be an early indicator that the on page 10‑72, Tire Rotation on
Limits on page 9‑14. air pressure is getting low and page 10‑72, When It Is Time for
A message to check the pressure in needs to be inflated to the proper New Tires on page 10‑72, and Tires
a specific tire displays in the Driver pressure. on page 10‑58.
Information Center (DIC). The low A Tire and Loading Information Notice: Tire sealant materials are
tire pressure warning light and the label shows the size of the original not all the same. A non-approved
DIC warning message appear at equipment tires and the correct tire sealant could damage the
each ignition cycle until the tires inflation pressure for the tires when TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
are inflated to the correct inflation they are cold. See Vehicle Load damage caused by using an
pressure. Using the DIC, tire Limits on page 9‑14, for an example incorrect tire sealant is not
pressure levels can be viewed. For of the Tire and Loading Information covered by the vehicle
additional information and details label and its location. Also see Tire warranty. Always use only
about the DIC operation and Pressure on page 10‑66 for the GM-approved tire sealant
displays see Driver Information additional information. available through your dealer or
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 and Tire included in the vehicle.
Messages on page 5‑51.
Vehicle Care 10-71
TPMS Malfunction Light and
. One or more TPMS sensors are If the TPMS is not functioning
Message missing or damaged. The properly, it cannot detect or signal a
malfunction light and the DIC low tire condition. See your dealer
The TPMS will not function properly message should go off when the for service if the TPMS malfunction
if one or more of the TPMS sensors TPMS sensors are installed and light and DIC message come on
are missing or inoperable. When the sensor matching process is and stays on.
the system detects a malfunction, performed successfully. See
the low tire warning light flashes your dealer for service. TPMS Sensor Matching
for about one minute and then stays Process
on for the remainder of the ignition
. Replacement tires or wheels do
cycle. A DIC warning message also not match the original equipment Each TPMS sensor has a unique
displays. The malfunction light and tires or wheels. Tires and wheels identification code. The identification
DIC warning message come on at other than those recommended code needs to be matched to a new
each ignition cycle until the problem could prevent the TPMS from tire/wheel position after replacing
is corrected. Some of the conditions functioning properly. See Buying one or more of the TPMS sensors.
that can cause these to come New Tires on page 10‑73. The malfunction light and the DIC
on are: . Operating electronic devices or message should go off at the next
being near facilities using radio ignition cycle. The sensors are
. The TPMS sensor matching matched to the tire/wheel positions,
process was not done or not wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
completed successfully. The following order: driver side front tire,
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction.
passenger side front tire, passenger
message should go off after side rear tire, and driver side rear.
successfully completing the See your dealer for service.
sensor matching process.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Tire Inspection
. The tread or sidewall is When It Is Time for New
cracked, cut, or snagged
GM recommends that the tires, deep enough to show cord or
Tires
including the spare tire, if the fabric. Factors such as maintenance,
vehicle has one, be inspected temperatures, driving speeds,
for signs of wear or damage at
. The tire has a bump, bulge, vehicle loading, and road conditions
least once a month. or split. affect the wear rate of the tires.
Replace the tire if:
. The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
. The indicators at three or be repaired well because of
more places around the tire the size or location of the
can be seen. damage.
. There is cord or fabric
showing through the tire's Tire Rotation
rubber. The tires on your vehicle are
different sizes front to rear. Due
to this, the tires should not be
rotated. Each tire and wheel
should be used only in the
position it is in. Treadwear indicators are one way to
tell when it is time for new tires.
Vehicle Care 10-73
Treadwear indicators appear when Vehicle Storage Buying New Tires
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
Tires age when stored normally GM has developed and matched
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park specific tires for your vehicle. The
Inspection on page 10‑72 and Tire
a vehicle that will be stored for at original equipment tires installed on
Rotation on page 10‑72 for more
least a month in a cool, dry, clean your vehicle, when it was new, were
information.
area away from direct sunlight to designed to meet General Motors
The rubber in tires ages over time. slow aging. This area should be Tire Performance Criteria
This also applies for the spare tire, free of grease, gasoline, or other Specification (TPC Spec) system
if the vehicle has one, even if it is substances that can deteriorate rating. If you need replacement
never used. Multiple conditions rubber. tires, GM strongly recommends that
including temperatures, loading you get tires with the same TPC
Parking for an extended period can
conditions, and inflation pressure Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
cause flat spots on the tires that
maintenance affect how fast aging will continue to have tires that are
may result in vibrations while
takes place. Tires will typically need designed to give the same
driving. When storing a vehicle for
to be replaced due to wear before performance and vehicle safety,
at least a month, remove the tires or
they may need to be replaced due during normal use, as the original
raise the vehicle to reduce the
to age. Consult the tire tires.
weight from the tires.
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
10-74 Vehicle Care
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen { WARNING { WARNING
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of your Tires could explode during Mixing tires could cause you to
vehicle, including brake system improper service. Attempting to lose control while driving. If you
performance, ride and handling, mount or dismount a tire could mix tires of different sizes (other
traction control, and tire pressure cause injury or death. Only your than those originally installed on
monitoring performance. GM's TPC dealer or authorized tire service your vehicle), brands, or types
Spec number is molded onto the center should mount or dismount (radial and bias-belted tires), the
tire's sidewall near the tire size. the tires. vehicle may not handle properly,
If the tires have an all‐season tread and you could have a crash.
design, the TPC Spec number will Winter tires with the same speed Using tires of different sizes
be followed by an MS for mud and rating as your original equipment (other than those originally
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on tires may not be available for H, V, installed on your vehicle), brands
page 10‑61, for additional W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. or types, may also cause damage
information. If you choose snow tires with a to your vehicle. Be sure to use
GM recommends replacing tires in lower speed rating, never exceed the correct size, brand, and type
sets of four. This is because uniform the tire's maximum speed capability. tires on all four wheels.
tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most
like it did when the tires were new.
Replacing less than a full set of tires
can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑72 and
Tire Rotation on page 10‑72.
Vehicle Care 10-75
the proper warning level you would
{ WARNING get with TPC Spec rated tires. See { WARNING
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
Using bias-ply tires on the page 10‑69. If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle may cause the wheel there may not be an acceptable
rim flanges to develop cracks Your vehicle's original equipment level of performance and safety
tires are listed on the Tire and if tires not recommended for
after many miles of driving. Loading Information label. See
A tire and/or wheel could fail those wheels are selected. This
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14, increases the chance of a crash
suddenly and cause a crash. for more information about the Tire
Use only radial-ply tires with and serious injury. Only use GM
and Loading Information label and
the wheels on the vehicle. specific wheel and tire systems
its location on your vehicle.
developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by
If you must replace your vehicle's Different Size Tires and a GM certified technician.
tires with those that do not have Wheels
a TPC Spec number, make sure
If wheels or tires are installed that See Buying New Tires on
they are the same size, load range,
are a different size than the original page 10‑73 and Accessories and
speed rating, and construction type
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle Modifications on page 10‑4 for
(radial and bias‐belted tires) as your
performance, including its braking, additional information.
vehicle's original tires.
ride and handling characteristics,
Vehicles that have a tire pressure stability, and resistance to rollover
monitoring system could give an may be affected. If the vehicle has
inaccurate low‐pressure warning electronic systems such as antilock
if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are brakes, rollover airbags, traction
installed on it. Non‐TPC Spec control, and electronic stability
rated tires may give a low‐pressure control, the performance of these
warning that is higher or lower than systems can also be affected.
10-76 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality (UTQG) system does not apply Treadwear
Grading to deep tread, winter-type snow The treadwear grade is a
tires, space-saver, or temporary comparative rating based
Quality grades can be found use spare tires, tires with
where applicable on the tire on the wear rate of the tire
nominal rim diameters of when tested under controlled
sidewall between tread shoulder 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
and maximum section width. For conditions on a specified
or to some limited-production government test course.
example: tires. For example, a tire graded
Treadwear 200 Traction AA While the tires available on 150 would wear one and a
Temperature A General Motors passenger cars half (1½) times as well on the
The following information relates and light trucks may vary with government course as a tire
to the system developed by the respect to these grades, they graded 100. The relative
United States National Highway must also conform to federal performance of tires depends
Traffic Safety Administration safety requirements and upon the actual conditions of
(NHTSA), which grades tires additional General Motors Tire their use, however, and may
by treadwear, traction, and Performance Criteria (TPC) depart significantly from the
temperature performance. This standards. norm due to variations in
applies only to vehicles sold in All Passenger Car Tires Must driving habits, service practices
the United States. The grades Conform to Federal Safety and differences in road
are molded on the sidewalls of Requirements In Addition To characteristics and climate.
most passenger car tires. The These Grades.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Vehicle Care 10-77
Traction – AA, A, B, C tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
The traction grades, from conditions on a specified indoor Balance
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
and C. Those grades represent and balanced at the factory to
the tire's ability to stop on wet material of the tire to degenerate
provide the longest tire life and best
pavement as measured under and reduce tire life, and overall performance. Adjustments to
controlled conditions on excessive temperature can lead wheel alignment and tire balancing
specified government test to sudden tire failure. The grade will not be necessary on a regular
surfaces of asphalt and C corresponds to a level of basis. However, check the
concrete. A tire marked C may performance which all alignment if there is unusual tire
have poor traction performance. passenger car tires must meet wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
under the Federal Motor Safety one side or the other. If the vehicle
Warning: The traction grade vibrates when driving on a smooth
assigned to this tire is based on Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of road, the tires and wheels might
straight-ahead braking traction need to be rebalanced. See your
tests, and does not include performance on the laboratory
dealer for proper diagnosis.
acceleration, cornering, test wheel than the minimum
hydroplaning, or peak traction required by law. Warning: The
characteristics. temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
Temperature – A, B, C properly inflated and not
The temperature grades overloaded. Excessive speed,
are A (the highest), B, and C, underinflation, or excessive
representing the tire's resistance loading, either separately or in
to the generation of heat and its combination, can cause heat
ability to dissipate heat when buildup and possible tire failure.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Wheel Replacement If you need to replace any of your
wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, { WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent, replace them only with new GM
cracked, or badly rusted or original equipment parts. This way, Replacing a wheel with a used
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming you will be sure to have the right one is dangerous. How it has
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts been used or how far it has been
wheel nuts should be replaced. for your vehicle. driven may be unknown. It could
If the wheel leaks air, replace it fail suddenly and cause a crash.
(except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). { WARNING When replacing wheels, use a
new GM original equipment
See your dealer if any of these Using the wrong replacement wheel.
conditions exist. wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Your dealer will know the kind of nuts can be dangerous. It could Notice: The wrong wheel can
wheel you need. affect the braking and handling also cause problems with
Each new wheel should have of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, bearing life, brake cooling,
the same load-carrying capacity, and cause loss of control, causing speedometer or odometer
diameter, width, offset, and be a crash. Always use the correct calibration, headlamp aim,
mounted the same way as the one wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel bumper height, vehicle ground
it replaces. nuts for replacement. clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts Notice: Improperly tightened
{ WARNING wheel nuts can lead to brake
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or { WARNING pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
on the parts to which it is Never use oil or grease on studs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
fastened, can make wheel or the threads of the wheel nuts. the proper sequence and to the
nuts become loose after a If you do, the wheel nuts might proper torque specification.
time. The wheel could come come loose and the wheel could
off and cause a crash. When fall off, causing a crash.
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where
the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, a { WARNING
cloth or a paper towel can be Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
used, however, use a scraper tightened wheel nuts can cause
or wire brush to remove all the wheel to become loose and
rust or dirt. even come off. This could lead
to a crash. Be sure to use the
correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new Tighten the wheel lug nuts firmly in
GM original equipment a crisscross sequence as shown.
wheel nuts.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
{ WARNING manufacturer recommends it for while you are driving, especially if
use on the vehicle and tire size you maintain the tires properly. If
Do not use tire chains. There is air goes out of a tire, it is much
not enough clearance. Tire chains combination and road conditions.
Follow that manufacturer's more likely to leak out slowly. See
used on a vehicle without the Tires on page 10‑58 for additional
proper amount of clearance can instructions. To help avoid
damage to the vehicle, drive information. But if you should ever
cause damage to the brakes, have a blowout, here are a few tips
suspension, or other vehicle slowly, re‐adjust or remove the
about what to expect and what
parts. The area damaged by the device if it is contacting the
to do:
tire chains could cause you to vehicle, and do not spin the
wheels. If you do find traction If a front tire fails, the flat tire
lose control of the vehicle and creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
you or others may be injured in devices that will fit, install them
on the rear tires. toward that side. Take your foot off
a crash. Use another type of the accelerator pedal and grip the
traction device only if its steering wheel firmly. Steer to
(Continued) maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
Vehicle Care 10-81
A rear blowout, particularly on a The vehicle, when new, had run-flat
curve, acts much like a skid and tires. This type of tire can operate { WARNING
may require the same correction effectively with no air pressure, so
you would use in a skid. In any rear you will not need to stop on the Special tools and procedures
blowout remove your foot from the side of the road to change a flat tire. are required to service a run-flat
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle You can just keep on driving. The tire. If these special tools and
under control by steering the way shorter the distance you drive and procedures are not used you or
you want the vehicle to go. It may the slower the speed, the greater others could be injured and the
be very bumpy and noisy, but you the chance that the run-flat tire will vehicle could be damaged.
can still steer. Gently brake to a not have to be replaced. Run-flat Always be sure the proper tools
stop, well off the road, if possible. tires perform so well without any air and procedures, as described in
The vehicle has no spare tire, no that a Tire Pressure Monitor System the service manual, are used.
tire changing equipment, and no (TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire
place to store a tire. has lost pressure. See Run-Flat
To order a service manual, see
Tires on page 10‑59 and Tire
Service Publications Ordering
Pressure Monitor System on
Information on page 13‑15.
page 10‑68.
10-82 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting Notice: If you try to start your
vehicle by pushing or pulling it,
vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical
For more information about the you could damage your vehicle. systems.
vehicle battery, see Battery on Do not push or pull your vehicle To avoid the possibility of the
page 10‑43. to start it; instead, use the jump vehicles rolling, set the parking
If your battery has run down, you starting procedure in this manual brake firmly on both vehicles
may want to use another vehicle to start your vehicle when the involved in the jump start
and some jumper cables to start battery has run down. procedure. Put an automatic
your vehicle. Be sure to use the 1. Check the other vehicle. It must transmission in P (Park) or a
following steps to do it safely. have a 12-volt battery with a manual transmission in Neutral
negative ground system. before setting the parking
{ WARNING Notice: Only use a vehicle that brakes.
has a 12-volt system with a Notice: If the radio or other
Batteries can hurt you. They can negative ground for jump accessories are left on during the
be dangerous because: starting. If the other vehicle does jump starting procedure, they
. They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a could be damaged. The repairs
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles would not be covered by the
can be damaged. warranty. Always turn off the
. They contain gas that can
2. Get the vehicles close enough radio and other accessories when
explode or ignite.
so the jumper cables can reach, jump starting the vehicle.
. They contain enough
but be sure the vehicles are not
electricity to burn you.
touching each other. If they
If you do not follow these steps are, it could cause a ground
exactly, some or all of these connection you do not want. You
things can hurt you. would not be able to start your
Vehicle Care 10-83
3. Turn off the ignition on both The remote negative (−)
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary terminal (B) is located
accessories plugged into the underneath the engine cover,
cigarette lighter or the accessory below the engine oil fill cap.
power outlet. Turn off the radio See Engine Compartment
and all lamps that are not Overview on page 10‑10 for
needed. This will avoid sparks the location of the engine
and help save both batteries. compartment fuse block and
And it could save the radio! engine oil fill cap.
4. Open the hoods and locate the You will not need to access the
positive (+) and negative (−) battery for jump starting. The
terminal locations on each remote terminals are for that
vehicle. 6.2 L LS3 shown, 7.0 L LS7 and
purpose.
6.2 L LS9 similar
Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) terminal (A) and a
{ WARNING
remote negative (−) terminal (B), An electric fan can start up even
as shown in the illustration, when the engine is not running
which should be used to jump and can injure you. Keep hands,
start your vehicle. clothing and tools away from any
The remote positive (+) underhood electric fan.
terminal (A) can be accessed
by opening the cover of the
engine compartment fuse block.
10-84 Vehicle Care
too. And do not connect the
{ WARNING { WARNING negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead
Using an open flame near a Fans or other moving engine battery because this can cause
battery can cause battery gas to parts can injure you badly. Keep sparks.
explode. People have been hurt your hands away from moving
doing this, and some have been parts once the engine is running. 6. Connect the red positive (+)
blinded. Use a flashlight if you cable to the positive (+) terminal
need more light. of the dead battery. Use a
5. Check that the jumper cables do remote positive (+) terminal if
Be sure the battery has enough not have loose or missing the vehicle has one.
water. You do not need to add insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could 7. Do not let the other end touch
water to the battery installed in metal. Connect it to the
your new vehicle. But if a battery be damaged too.
positive (+) terminal of the
has filler caps, be sure the right Before you connect the cables, good battery. Use a remote
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, here are some basic things you positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
add water to take care of that should know. Positive (+) will go has one.
first. If you do not, explosive gas to positive (+) or to a remote
could be present. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle 8. Now connect the black
has one. Negative (−) will go to a negative (−) cable to the
Battery fluid contains acid that negative (−) terminal of the
heavy, unpainted metal engine
can burn you. Do not get it on part or to a remote negative (−) good battery. Use a remote
you. If you accidentally get it in terminal if the vehicle has one. negative (−) terminal if the
your eyes or on your skin, flush vehicle has one.
the place with water and get Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a Do not let the other end touch
medical help immediately. anything until the next step. The
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
Vehicle Care 10-85
battery. It goes to a heavy, 11. Try to start the vehicle that
unpainted metal engine part or had the dead battery. If it will
to a remote negative (−) terminal not start after a few tries, it
on the vehicle with the dead probably needs service.
battery. Notice: If the jumper cables are
9. Connect the other end of the connected or removed in the
negative (−) cable at least 45 cm wrong order, electrical shorting
(18 inches) away from the dead may occur and damage the
battery, but not near engine vehicle. The repairs would not be
parts that move. The electrical covered by the vehicle warranty.
connection is just as good there, Always connect and remove the
and the chance of sparks getting jumper cables in the correct
back to the battery is much less. order, making sure that the Jumper Cable Removal
Your vehicle has a remote cables do not touch each other A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
negative (−) terminal for this or other metal. Part or Remote Negative (−)
purpose. Terminal
10. Now start the vehicle with the B. Good Battery or Remote
good battery and run the Positive (+) and Negative (−)
engine for a while. Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
10-86 Vehicle Care
To disconnect the jumper cables Towing Recreational Vehicle
from both vehicles, do the following:
Towing
1. Disconnect the black Towing the Vehicle Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead Notice: To avoid damage, towing the vehicle may cause
battery. the disabled vehicle should be damage because of reduced
towed with all four wheels off ground clearance. Always put
2. Disconnect the black the ground. Care must be taken the vehicle on a flatbed truck or
negative (−) cable from the with vehicles that have low trailer.
vehicle with the good battery. ground clearance and/or special The vehicle was neither designed
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) equipment. Always flatbed on a nor intended to be towed with any
cable from the vehicle with the car carrier. of its wheels on the ground. If the
good battery. Consult your dealer or a vehicle must be towed, see Towing
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) professional towing service if the the Vehicle on page 10‑86.
cable from the other vehicle. disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program
5. Return the engine fuse block (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
cover to its original position. Roadside Assistance Program
6. You may also need to initialize (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
the power windows. See “Power
Window Initialize” under Power
Windows on page 2‑18 for more
information.
Vehicle Care 10-87
Appearance Care Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
Do not use cleaning agents that are that does not have enough
Exterior Care petroleum based or that contain clearance for the wide rear tires
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will acid or abrasives, as they can and wheels, you could damage
make them last longer, seal better, damage the paint, metal or plastic the vehicle. Verify with the
and not stick or squeak. Apply on the vehicle. Approved cleaning manager of the car wash that the
silicone grease with a clean cloth. products can be obtained from your vehicle will fit before entering the
During very cold, damp weather dealer. Follow all manufacturers' car wash or use a touchless
frequent application may be directions regarding correct product car wash.
required. See Recommended Fluids usage, necessary safety High pressure car washes may
and Lubricants on page 11‑6. precautions and appropriate cause water to enter the vehicle.
disposal of any vehicle care Avoid using high pressure washes
Washing the Vehicle product. closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
The best way to preserve the Rinse the vehicle well, before surface of the vehicle. Use of power
vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by washing and after to remove all washers exceeding 8 274 kPa
washing it often. cleaning agents completely. If they (1,200 psi) can result in damage or
Notice: Certain cleaners contain are allowed to dry on the surface, removal of paint and decals.
chemicals that can damage the they could stain.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
emblems or nameplates on the Dry the finish with a soft, clean Lenses
vehicle. Check the cleaning chamois or an all-cotton towel to
product label. If it states that it avoid surface scratches and water Use only lukewarm or cold water,
should not be used on plastic spotting. a soft cloth and a car washing soap
parts, do not use it on the vehicle to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
or damage may occur and it Follow instructions under “Washing
would not be covered by the the Vehicle”.
warranty.
10-88 Vehicle Care
Finish Care Foreign materials such as calcium Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
chloride and other salts, ice melting Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, Bright metal parts should be
of the vehicle by hand may be
bird droppings, chemicals from cleaned regularly to keep their
necessary to remove residue from
industrial chimneys, etc., can luster. Washing with water is all that
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
damage the vehicle's finish if they is usually needed. However, chrome
products can be obtained from your
remain on painted surfaces. Wash polish may be used on chrome or
dealer.
the vehicle as soon as possible. stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ If necessary, use non-abrasive
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat cleaners that are marked safe for Use special care with aluminum
gives more depth and gloss to painted surfaces to remove foreign trim. To avoid damaging protective
the colored basecoat. Always matter. trim, never use auto or chrome
use waxes and polishes that are polish, steam or caustic soap to
Exterior painted surfaces are clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
non-abrasive and made for a
subject to aging, weather and rubbed to high polish, is
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
chemical fallout that can take their recommended for all bright metal
Notice: Machine compounding toll over a period of years. To help parts.
or aggressive polishing on a keep the paint finish looking new,
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish keep the vehicle garaged or ZR1 Carbon Fiber Panels
may damage it. Use only covered whenever possible. Carbon fiber panels can be washed
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
and waxed like any other panels.
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the Use a clear or black pigmented wax
vehicle. on the inner hood carbon fiber
panel.
Vehicle Care 10-89
ZR1 Hood Window Wipers can be damaged by: Finish Damage
The hood window on the ZR1 can . Extreme dusty conditions Any stone chips, fractures or deep
be cleaned in the same manner as . Sand and salt scratches in the finish should be
the headlamp lenses. See “Cleaning repaired right away. Bare metal will
Exterior Lamps/Lenses” for more . Heat and sun corrode quickly and may develop
information. . Snow and ice, without proper into major repair expense.
Windshield and Wiper Blades removal Minor chips and scratches can be
Tires repaired with touch-up materials
Clean the outside of the windshield available from your dealer. Larger
with glass cleaner. To clean the tires, use a stiff brush areas of finish damage can be
Clean the rubber blades using with tire cleaner. corrected in your dealer's body and
a lint free cloth or paper towel Notice: Using petroleum-based paint shop.
soaked with windshield washer tire dressing products on the Chemicals used for ice and snow
fluid or a mild detergent. Wash vehicle may damage the paint removal and dust control can collect
the windshield thoroughly when finish and/or tires. When applying on the underbody. If these are not
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road a tire dressing, always wipe off removed, corrosion and rust can
grime, sap and a buildup of vehicle any overspray from all painted develop on the underbody parts
wash/wax treatments may cause surfaces on the vehicle. such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper and exhaust system even though
blades if they are worn or damaged. they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas where
10-90 Vehicle Care
mud and debris can collect. Dirt Fiberglass Springs (Composite Although no defect in the paint job
packed in close areas of the Springs) causes this, we will repair, at no
frame should be loosened before charge to the owner, the surfaces
being flushed. Your dealer or an Notice: If you use acidic or of new vehicles damaged by this
underbody car washing system corrosive cleaning products, fallout condition within 12 months
can do this. engine degreasers or aluminum or 20 000 km (12,000 miles) of
cleaning agents on fiberglass purchase, whichever occurs first.
Underbody Maintenance springs, you may damage the
springs. The repairs would not be
Chemicals used for ice and snow
covered by your warranty. Use
Interior Care
removal and dust control can collect
only approved cleaners when The interior will continue to look its
on the underbody. If these are not
cleaning your vehicle's fiberglass best if it is cleaned often. Although
removed, corrosion and rust can
springs. not always visible, dust and dirt can
develop on the underbody parts
accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, Chemical Paint Spotting can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection. Some weather and atmospheric and plastic surfaces. Regular
conditions can create a chemical vacuuming is recommended to
At least every spring, flush these fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall remove particles from the
materials from the underbody upon and attack painted surfaces on upholstery. It is important to keep
with plain water. Clean any areas the vehicle. This damage can take the upholstery from becoming and
where mud and debris can collect. two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped remaining heavily soiled. Soils
Dirt packed in close areas of the discolorations, and small, irregular should be removed as quickly as
frame should be loosened before dark spots etched into the paint possible. The interior may
being flushed. Your dealer or an surface. experience extremes of heat that
underbody car washing system could cause stains to set rapidly.
can do this.
Vehicle Care 10-91
Lighter colored interiors may require Many cleaners contain solvents that
. Heavy pressure or aggressive
more frequent cleaning. Use care may become concentrated in the rubbing with a cleaning cloth.
because newspapers and garments breathing space. Before using Use of heavy pressure can
that transfer color to home cleaners, read and adhere to all damage the interior and does
furnishings may also transfer color safety instructions on the label. not improve the effectiveness of
to the interior. While cleaning the interior, maintain soil removal.
When cleaning the interior, only adequate ventilation by opening the . Laundry detergents or
use cleaners specifically designed doors and windows. dishwashing soaps with
for the surfaces being cleaned. Dust may be removed from small degreasers can leave residue
Permanent damage may result buttons and knobs using a small that streaks and attracts dirt. For
from using cleaners on surfaces brush with soft bristles. liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
for which they were not intended. per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
Products that remove odors from good guide. Use only mild,
Use glass cleaner only on glass. the upholstery and clean the glass
Remove any accidental over-spray neutral-pH soaps.
can be obtained from your dealer.
from other surfaces immediately. To . Too much cleaner that saturates
prevent over-spray, apply cleaner Do not clean the vehicle using: the upholstery.
directly to the cleaning cloth. . A knife or any other sharp object . Cleaners that contain solvents
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners to remove a soil from any interior can damage the interior.
when cleaning glass surfaces surface.
on the vehicle, could scratch the . A stiff brush. It can cause
glass and/or cause damage to damage to the interior surfaces.
the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
10-92 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet To clean: If any of the soil remains, a
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white commercial fabric cleaner or spot
Use a vacuum cleaner with a
cloth with water or club soda. lifter may be necessary. When a
soft brush attachment frequently
commercial upholstery cleaner or
to remove dust and loose dirt. 2. Wring the cloth to remove spot lifter is to be used, test a small
A canister vacuum with a beater bar excess moisture. hidden area for colorfastness first.
in the nozzle may only be used on
3. Start on the outside edge of the If the locally cleaned area gives any
floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
soil and gently rub toward the impression that a ring formation may
For any soil, always try to remove it
center. Continue cleaning, using result, clean the entire surface.
first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as a clean area of the cloth each After the cleaning process has been
much of the soil as possible using time it becomes soiled. completed, a paper towel can be
one of the following techniques: 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled used to blot excess moisture from
area until the cleaning cloth the fabric or carpet.
. For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper remains clean.
towel. Allow the soil to absorb 5. If the soil is not completely
into the paper towel until no removed, use a mild soap
more can be removed. solution and repeat the cleaning
. For solid dry soils: remove as process that was used with plain
much as possible and then water.
vacuum.
Vehicle Care 10-93
Coated Moldings To remove dust, a soft cloth appearance and feel of the leather
dampened with water can be used. and are not recommended. Do not
These moldings are around the
If a more thorough cleaning is use silicone or wax-based products,
hatch opening in the rear area.
necessary, a soft cloth dampened or those containing organic solvents
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a with a mild soap solution can be to clean the interior because they
sponge or soft lint-free cloth used. Your dealer has a GM can alter the appearance by
dampened with water. approved leather cleaner available increasing the gloss in a
. When heavily soiled, use warm that provides superior cleaning non-uniform manner.
soapy water. performance when used regularly
on finished automotive leathers. Instrument Panel, Vinyl and
Leather Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do other Plastic Surfaces
not use heat, steam, spot lifters or A soft cloth dampened with
Leather, and lighter colored leather
spot removers, or shoe polish on water may be used to remove
in particular, will need more frequent
leather. Many commercial leather dust. If a more thorough cleaning
cleaning to prevent the buildup of
cleaners and coatings that are is necessary, a clean soft cloth
dust, dirt, and colors transferred
sold to preserve and protect leather dampened with a mild soap solution
from other items so that these do
may permanently change the can be used to gently remove dust
not become permanent stains.
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces. Many
10-94 Vehicle Care
commercial cleaners and coatings Notice: Air fresheners contain Cargo Cover and
that are sold to preserve and protect solvents that may cause damage Convenience Net
soft plastic surfaces may to plastics and painted surfaces.
permanently change the Follow the manufacturer’s Wash with warm water and mild
appearance and feel of the interior instructions when using air detergent, rinse with cold water and
and are not recommended. Do not fresheners in the vehicle. If air tumble dry on low. Do not use
use silicone or wax-based products, freshener comes in contact with chlorine bleach.
or those containing organic solvents paint or a plastic surface, blot Care of Safety Belts
to clean the interior because they immediately with a soft cloth.
can alter the appearance by Damage caused by using air Keep belts clean and dry.
increasing the gloss in a fresheners would not be covered
non-uniform manner. by the vehicle warranty. { WARNING
Some commercial products may Do not bleach or dye safety
increase gloss on the instrument belts. It may severely weaken
panel. The increase in gloss may
them. In a crash, they might not
cause annoying reflections in the
be able to provide adequate
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under protection. Clean safety belts
certain conditions. only with mild soap and lukewarm
water.
Vehicle Care 10-95
Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
If a floor mat is the wrong size or vehicle. If the floor mats need
is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be
pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
Interference with the pedals can may not fit properly and may
cause unintended acceleration interefere with the accelerator or
and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that
distance which can cause a crash the floor mats do not interfere
and injury. Make sure the floor with the pedals. Installing and Replacing the
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the Floor Mats
accelerator or brake pedal. correct side up. Do not turn 1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
it over. mat to remove it from the hook
. Do not place anything on top of retainers.
the driver side floor mat. 2. Reinstall by lining up the
. Use only a single floor mat on openings in the floor mat over
the driver side. the hook retainers and push
down into position.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another. 3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
The driver side floor mat is held in it does not interfere with the
place by two hook-type retainers accelerator or brake pedals.
and the passenger side is held in
place by one.
10-96 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
recommended fluids, and Please read the information under
General Information lubricants are necessary to keep Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 this vehicle in good working the vehicle in good condition, see
condition. Damage caused by your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled
The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 maintenance might not be
vehicles that:
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Recommended Fluids, . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts As the vehicle owner, you are
within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and responsible for the scheduled
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 maintenance in this section. We
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement recommend having your dealer
on page 9‑14.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 perform these services. Proper
. Are driven on reasonable road
vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records keep the vehicle in good working surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9 condition, improves fuel economy, limits.
and reduces vehicle emissions for . Use the recommended fuel. See
better air quality. Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑49.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
At your dealer, you can be Scheduled
{ WARNING certain that you will receive the
Performing maintenance work can
highest level of service available. Maintenance
Your dealer has specially trained
be dangerous. Some jobs can service technicians, uses genuine When the Change Engine Oil
cause serious injury. Perform replacement parts, as well as, Message Displays
maintenance work only if you up‐to‐date tools and equipment Change engine oil and filter. See
have the required know-how and to ensure fast and accurate Engine Oil on page 10‑15. An
the proper tools and equipment. diagnostics. Emission Control Service.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
The proper replacement parts, When the CHANGE OIL SOON
have a qualified technician do the
fluids, and lubricants to use are message displays, service is
work. See Doing Your Own listed in Recommended Fluids and
Service Work on page 10‑8. required for the vehicle as soon
Lubricants on page 11‑6 and as possible, within the next
Maintenance Replacement Parts on 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving
page 11‑8. We recommend the use under the best conditions, the
of genuine parts from your dealer. engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil
and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system
must be reset. Your dealer has
Service and Maintenance 11-3
trained service technicians who will
. Windshield wiper blade . Steering and suspension
perform this work and reset the inspection for wear, cracking, inspection. Visual inspection
system. If the engine oil life system or contamination and windshield for damaged, loose, or missing
is reset accidentally, service the and wiper blade cleaning, parts or signs of wear.
vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles if contaminated. See Exterior . Body hinges and latches,
since the last service. Reset the oil Care on page 10‑87. Worn key lock cylinders, any
life system whenever the oil is or damaged wiper blade folding seat hardware, and
changed. See Engine Oil Life replacement. See Wiper Blade rear compartment, hood, and
System on page 10‑22. Replacement on page 10‑46. console door hinges and latches
Every Engine Oil Change
. Tire inflation pressures check. lubrication. See Recommended
See Tire Pressure on Fluids and Lubricants on
. Change engine oil and filter. page 10‑66. page 11‑6. More frequent
Reset oil life system. See lubrication may be required
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Engine Oil on page 10‑15 and when the vehicle is exposed to a
Inspection on page 10‑72.
Engine Oil Life System on corrosive environment. Applying
page 10‑22. An Emission . Fluids visual leak check (or silicone grease on weatherstrips
Control Service. every 12 months, whichever with a clean cloth makes them
occurs first). A leak in any last longer, seal better, and not
. Engine coolant level check. See
system must be repaired and stick or squeak.
Engine Coolant on page 10‑29.
the fluid level checked.
. Engine cooling system
. Restraint system component
. Engine air cleaner filter check. See Safety System
inspection. Visual inspection
inspection. See Engine Air Check on page 3‑21.
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑24.
clamps and replacement,
if needed. . Brake system inspection (or
every 12 months, whichever
. Windshield washer fluid level
occurs first).
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑37.
11-4 Service and Maintenance
. Fuel system inspection for Once a Year Once Every Two Years
damage or leaks. . See Starter Switch Check on . Clutch hydraulic system drain,
. Exhaust system and nearby heat page 10‑44. flush, and refill. Service at a
shields inspection for loose or regular service interval every
damaged components.
. See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control Function two years. This service can
Additional Required Services Check on page 10‑45. be complex; have your dealer
perform this service. See
. See Park Brake and P (Park)
At Each Fuel Stop Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑24.
Mechanism Check on
. Engine oil level check. See page 10‑45. First Engine Oil Change After
Engine Oil on page 10‑15. Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
. Accelerator pedal check for
. Engine coolant level check. See damage, high effort, or binding.
. Passenger compartment air
Engine Coolant on page 10‑29. Replace if needed. filter replacement (or every
. Windshield washer fluid level 24 months, whichever occurs
. Underbody flushing service. first). More frequent replacement
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑37. . Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass may be needed if you drive in
Support Gas Strut Service: areas with heavy traffic, areas
Once a Month Visually inspect gas strut, with poor air quality, or areas
. Tire inflation check. See Tire if equipped, for signs of wear, with high dust levels.
Pressure on page 10‑66. cracks, or other damage. Check Replacement may also be
the hold open ability of the gas needed if you notice reduced
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire strut. Contact your dealer if air flow, windows fogging up,
Inspection on page 10‑72 and service is required. or odors. Your dealer can help
Tire Rotation on page 10‑72. you determine when it is the
right time to replace the filter.
Service and Maintenance 11-5
. ZR1 Only: Engine air cleaner Check that the purge valve,
. Spark plug replacement and
filter replacement. See Engine if the vehicle has one, works spark plug wires inspection. An
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑24. properly. Replace as needed. An Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After Emission Control Service. The First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles U.S. Environmental Protection Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
Agency or the California Air
. Engine air cleaner filter Resources Board has
. Engine cooling system drain,
replacement. See Engine Air determined that the failure to flush, and refill (or every five
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑24. perform this maintenance item years, whichever occurs first).
. Automatic transmission fluid will not nullify the emission See Engine Coolant on
change (severe service) for warranty or limit recall liability page 10‑29. An Emission
vehicles mainly driven in heavy prior to the completion of the Control Service.
city traffic in hot weather, in vehicle's useful life. We, . ZR1 Only: Intercooler system
hilly or mountainous terrain, however, urge that all drain, flush, and refill (or every
when frequently towing a recommended maintenance five years, whichever occurs
trailer, or used for taxi, police, services be performed at the first). See Engine Coolant on
or delivery service. See indicated intervals and the page 10‑29.
Automatic Transmission Fluid on maintenance be recorded. . Engine drive belts inspection
page 10‑23. First Engine Oil Change After for fraying, excessive cracks,
. Evaporative control system Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles or obvious damage (or every
inspection. Check all fuel and . Automatic transmission fluid 10 years, whichever occurs
vapor lines and hoses for proper change (normal service). See first). Replace, if needed.
hook‐up, routing, and condition. Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑23.
11-6 Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑29.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
ZR1 Only: Intercooler System
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑29.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806,
Hydraulic Brake System
in Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only GM Part No. 88958860,
Hydraulic Clutch System
in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4 brake fluid.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Service and Maintenance 11-7
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubrication (Rear Toe‐Link
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Outer Ends with ZO6, ZR1, or Z51
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Option)
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, in Canada 88861801).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Rear Axle (Limited-Slip Differential) DEXRON ® LS Gear Oil. See Rear Axle on page 10‑44.
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hood and Door Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
11-8 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 and 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines 15776148 A3077C
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 25940997 A3107C
Engine Oil Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 89017524 PF48
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine with Z52 Dry Sump Oil System 12626224 UPF-48R
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 12626224 UPF-48R
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 12626224 UPF-48R
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 15848592 CF139
Spark Plug
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 12621258 41-110
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 12571165 41-104
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 12571165 41-104
Wiper Blades — 52.5 cm (20.7 in)
Driver Side 12335960 —
Passenger Side 12335961 —
Service and Maintenance 11-9
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
11-10 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont.)
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Service and Maintenance 11-11
Maintenance Record (cont.)
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
11-12 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont.)
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-6 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑6 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 11.3 L 11.9 qt
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Cooling System 12.0 L 12.7 qt
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Supercharger
4.9 L 5.2 qt
Intercooler Cooling System
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 11.3 L 11.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt
6.2L LS3 V8 with Z52 Dry Sump Oil System 9.9 L 10.5 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 9.9 L 10.5 qt
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 9.9 L 10.5 qt
Fuel Tank 68.0 L 18.0 gal
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter
6.2 L 6.5 qt
Replacement)
Manual Transmission – Base 3.5 L 3.6 qt
Manual Transmission – Z16 4.0 L 4.2 qt
Manual Transmission – ZO6 4.3 L 4.5 qt
Manual Transmission – ZR1 4.3 L 4.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap Firing Order
Automatic
6.2L LS3 V8 W 1.016 mm (0.040 in) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
Manual
6.2L LS9 V8 T Manual 1.016 mm (0.040 in) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
7.0L LS7 V8 E Manual 1.016 mm (0.040 in) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
Technical Data 12-5
Engine Data
Engine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio
6.2L LS3 V8 without
430 @ 5900 rpm 424 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1
option NPP
6.2L LS3 V8 with
436 @ 5900 rpm 428 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1
option NPP
6.2L LS9 V8
638 @ 6500 rpm 604 lb ft @ 3800 rpm 6.2L 9.10:1
Supercharged
7.0L LS7 V8 505 @ 6300 rpm 470 lb ft @ 4800 rpm 7.0L 11.00:1
12-6 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6.2L LS9 V8 Engine
6.2L LS3 V8, 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-12 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by the dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-17 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 can be quickly resolved at that level.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-18 If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Radio Frequency reviewed with the sales, service,
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19 or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency of the dealership or the general
Appointments (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, your case will generally be heard
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will within 40 days. If you do not agree
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's with the decision given in your case,
resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest you may reject it and proceed with
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. any other venue for relief available
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: to you.
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making Line Program using the toll-free
Canada Customer Communication sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them at
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However, the following address:
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business Bureaus,
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you Inc.
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Suite 800
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all
title, or the plate at the top left disputes regarding vehicle repairs 50 states and the District of
of the instrument panel and or the interpretation of the New Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
visible through the windshield. Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although vehicle age, mileage, and other
you may be required to resort to this factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
informal dispute resolution program
. Vehicle delivery date and prior to filing a court action, use of limitations and/or discontinue its
present mileage. the program is free of charge and participation in this program.
Customer Information 13-3
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction
Owners: In the event that you eligibility in the Canadian Motor
do not feel your concerns have Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
been addressed after following call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the procedure outlined in Steps the General Motors Customer
One and Two, General Motors of Communication Centre,
Canada Limited wants you to be 1-800-263-3777 (English),
aware of its participation in a 1-800-263-7854 (French),
no-charge Mediation/Arbitration or write to:
Program. General Motors of Canada The Mediation/Arbitration Program
Limited has committed to binding c/o Customer Communication Did you get the Warranty Extension
arbitration of owner disputes Centre Plan? This plan is recommended by
involving factory-related vehicle General Motors of Canada Limited General Motors to supplement the
service claims. The program Mail Code: CA1-163-005 warranty included with the new
provides for the review of the facts 1908 Colonel Sam Drive vehicle purchase.
involved by an impartial third party Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
arbiter, and may include an informal See your dealer for details.
hearing before the arbiter. The Your inquiry should be accompanied
program is designed so that the by the Vehicle Identification
entire dispute settlement process, Number (VIN).
from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be
completed in about 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
13-4 Customer Information
Customer Assistance If you have a problem that has not STEP THREE
Procedure been satisfactorily handled through If your case is not resolved in a
the normal means, we suggest the reasonable amount of time by your
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are following steps:
very important to your dealer and dealer, please call the General
General Motors. STEP ONE Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the
Normally, any problem with the Explain your case to the dealer following information:
transaction, sale, or usage of the service agent, service manager,
vehicle must be handled by your dealer sales agent, or sales . Name
dealer sales or service departments. manager, depending on your case. . Address
However, we recognize that Make sure that they have all
despite the good intentions of all
. Phone number
necessary information. They are
parties involved, sometimes a interested in your continual
. Model year
misunderstanding may occur. satisfaction. . Brand
STEP TWO . Vehicle Identification
If you are not satisfied, please Number (VIN)
contact the general manager or the . Mileage
dealership owner to ask for their . Delivery date
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the . Description of the problem
right people at General Motors for . Dealership name
support, if needed.
. Dealership address
Customer Information 13-5
See Customer Assistance Offices From Puerto Rico: Mexico, Central America, and
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or 1-800-496-9992 (English) Caribbean Islands/Countries
Customer Assistance Offices 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Except Puerto Rico and
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more U.S. Virgin Islands)
information. From U.S. Virgin Islands:
General Motors de Mexico,
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance S. de R.L. de C.V.
Canada Customer Assistance Center
Offices (U.S. and Canada) Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
General Motors of Canada Limited Col. Granada
Chevrolet encourages customers Customer Communication Centre,
to call the toll-free number for C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
assistance. However, if a customer 1908 Colonel Sam Drive 01-800-466-0800
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
the letter should be addressed to: www.gm.ca
United States 1-800-263-3777 (English) Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division 1-800-263-7854 (French) Offices (Mexico)
Chevrolet Customer 1-800-263-3830 (For Text To contact the Customer Assistance
Assistance Center Telephone devices (TTYs)) Center (CAC), use the phone
P.O. Box 33170 Roadside Assistance: numbers listed in this section.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 1-800-268-6800 Customer assistance is available
www.Chevrolet.com Overseas Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
1-800-222-1020 20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
Please contact the local General 08:00 to 15:00 hours.
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Motors Business Unit.
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
Roadside Assistance: Assistance Center (CAC) should be
1-800-243-8872 sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com.
13-6 Customer Information
Mexico El Salvador Online Owner Center
From Mexico City 800-6273 Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)
5329-0811 Honduras www.chevyownercenter.com
From Other Mexico Locations 800-0122-6101 Information and services
customized for your specific
01-800-466-0811 vehicle — all in one convenient
Customer Assistance for
United States and Canada place.
Text Telephone (TTY)
1-866-466-8190
. Digital owner manual, warranty
Users (U.S. and Canada) information, and more.
Costa Rica To assist customers who are deaf, . Storage for online service and
00-800-052-1005 hard of hearing, or speech-impaired maintenance records.
and who use Text Telephones
Guatemala (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY . Chevrolet dealer locator for
equipment available at its Customer service nationwide.
1-800-999-5252
Assistance Center. Any TTY user . Exclusive privileges and offers.
Panama in the U.S. can communicate with
. Recall notices for your specific
Chevrolet by dialing:
00-800-052-0001 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in vehicle.
Dominican Republic Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. . OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries.
1-888-751-5301
Customer Information 13-7
Other Helpful Links Here are a few of the valuable tools GM Mobility
and services you will have
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
access to:
Reimbursement Program
Chevrolet Merchandise — . My Showroom: Find and save
(U.S. and Canada)
www.chevymall.com
information on vehicles and
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area.
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do . My Dealers: Save details such
. FAQ as address and phone number
. Contact Us for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
My GM Canada www.gm.ca . My Driveway: Access quick links This program is available to
My GM Canada is a to parts and service estimates, qualified applicants for cost
password-protected section of check trade-in values, reimbursement of eligible
www.gm.ca where you can save or schedule a service aftermarket adaptive equipment
information on GM vehicles, get appointment by adding the required for the vehicle, such as
personalized offers, and use handy vehicles you own to your hand controls or a wheelchair/
tools and forms with greater ease. driveway profile. scooter lift for the vehicle.
. My Preferences: Manage your For more information on the limited
profile and use tools and forms offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
with greater ease. call the GM Mobility Assistance
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
section within www.gm.ca. Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
13-8 Customer Information
General Motors of Canada also Calling for Assistance Coverage
has a Mobility Program. Call
When calling Roadside Assistance, Services are provided up to 5 years/
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
have the following information 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
details. TTY users call
ready: comes first.
1-800-263-3830.
. Your name, home address, and In the U.S., anyone driving the
Roadside Assistance home telephone number. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
Program (U.S. and . Telephone number of your
permission from the owner is not
Canada) location.
covered.
. Location of the vehicle.
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, Roadside Assistance is not a part of
call 1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text . Model, year, color, and license the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Telephone (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). plate number of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, . Odometer reading, Vehicle Canada Limited reserve the right to
call 1-800-268-6800. Identification Number (VIN), and make any changes or discontinue
delivery date of the vehicle. the Roadside Assistance program at
Service is available 24 hours a day, any time without notification.
365 days a year. . Description of the problem.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right
to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Customer Information 13-9
Services Provided
. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to Canadian
change a flat tire with the spare Purchased Vehicles
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Delivery of enough fuel for the must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
vehicle to get to the nearest properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian.
service station. responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other
unlock the vehicle if you are covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through
locked out. A remote unlock may this service.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
be available if you have OnStar. jump start a dead battery. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
For security reasons, the driver registration is required.
must present identification Services Not Included in . Trip Routing Service: Detailed
before this service is given. Roadside Assistance
maps of North America are
. Emergency Tow From a Public . Impound towing caused by provided when requested either
Road or Highway: Tow to the violation of any laws. with the most direct route or the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for . Legal fines. most scenic route. There is a
warranty service, or if the vehicle limit of six requests per year.
was in a crash and cannot be . Mounting, dismounting, Additional travel information is
driven. Assistance is also given or changing of snow tires, also available. Allow three
when the vehicle is stuck in the chains, or other traction devices. weeks for delivery.
sand, mud, or snow. . Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
13-10 Customer Information
. Trip Interruption Benefits
and Assistance: Must be
Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
over 250 kilometers from Program (Mexico) Appointments (U.S. and
where your trip was started Roadside Assistance is available Canada)
to qualify. General Motors of 24 hours a day, 365 days of
Canada Limited requires When the vehicle requires warranty
the year. service, contact the dealer and
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy For detailed information about request an appointment. By
of the repair orders. Once Roadside Assistance, please see scheduling a service appointment
authorization has been received, the brochure provided with your and advising the service consultant
the Roadside Assistance advisor new vehicle or visit our website at: of your transportation needs, the
will help to make arrangements www.chevrolet.com.mx. Navigate dealer can help minimize your
and explain how to receive the site and click on “Asistencia en inconvenience.
payment. el Camino.” E-mail correspondence If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
should be sent to: into the service department
. Alternative Service: asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com.
If assistance cannot be immediately, keep driving it until
provided right away, the To contact Roadside Assistance by it can be scheduled for service,
Roadside Assistance advisor phone, use the following numbers: unless, of course, the problem is
may give permission to get local safety related. If it is, please call the
Mexico dealership, let them know this, and
emergency road service. You
will receive payment, up to $100, 01-800-466-0800 ask for instructions.
after sending the original receipt United States If the dealer requests you to bring
to Roadside Assistance. the vehicle for service, you are
Mechanical failures may be 1-866-466-8901 urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for Canada day as possible to allow for the
parts and labor for repairs not same day-repair.
covered by the warranty are the 1-800-268-6800
owner responsibility.
Customer Information 13-11
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally
Canada) be completed while you wait. If the vehicle requires overnight
However, if you are unable to warranty repairs, and public
To enhance your ownership wait, GM helps to minimize transportation is used instead of
experience, we and our participating inconvenience by providing several the dealer's shuttle service, the
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy transportation options. Depending expense must be supported by
Transportation, a customer support on the circumstances, the dealer original receipts and can only
program for vehicles with the can offer one of the following: be up to the maximum amount
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty allowed by GM for shuttle service.
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle Service In addition, for U.S. customers,
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred should you arrange transportation
hybrid‐specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy through a friend or relative, limited
the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide reimbursement for reasonable
Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your fuel expenses may be available.
options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption Claim amounts should reflect
reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes actual costs and be supported by
warranty repairs are required. one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service original receipts. See the dealer for
within reasonable time and distance information regarding the allowance
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of the dealer's area. amounts for reimbursement of fuel
part of the New Vehicle Limited or other transportation costs.
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
13-12 Customer Information
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair
The dealer may arrange to provide Information (U.S. and Canada)
you with a courtesy rental vehicle All program options, such as
or reimburse you for a rental vehicle If the vehicle is involved in a
shuttle service, may not be available collision and it is damaged, have
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept at every dealer. Please contact
for an overnight warranty repair. the damage repaired by a qualified
the dealer for specific information technician